The URL can be used to link to this page

WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP 1 AND WTP 2 - 16-0031-UTCITY OF CLEARWATER WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP #1 AND WTP #2 (1G -0031 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for BRIGHT ANI) BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH CONFORMED DOCUMENTS APRIL/ 2018 City of Clearwater, Florida WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTPNO. 1AND WTPNO. 2 (16 -0031 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ADDENDA ADDENDUM NO. 1 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION 1 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP NO. 1 AND WTP NO.2 Documents and plans for Project # [16 -0031 -UT] are available at www.myclearwater.com/bid. The work includes: Fluoride feed facilities at the City's Water Treatment Plants 1 and 2 (WTP 1 and WTP 2). The fluoride equipment includes storage, pumping, and related equipment to add fluoride to the City's potable water system. Pre -Bid Conference: [Insert Date & Time here] [Insert location here] Pre -qualification DEADLINE: [Insert Date] Category: [Insert Category Type & Amount] Bids DUE: [Insert Date here] City of Clearwater, Project # [16 -0031 -UT] Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 Issued by: Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager For additional information contact Engineering Dept.: 727-562-4750 SECTION I Page 1 Updated 4/7/2017 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents SECTION II i INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 8 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SECTION II I Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the DVC Marketing Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non- refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders or others. 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www.myclearwater.com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction- management. Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre - qualification status before a Bid Opening. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 1 1 1 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19. BID PROTEST 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE: SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3. PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 SECTION III I Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 15 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 16 6.10. EMERGENCIES 17 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 22 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 25 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 26 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 SECTION III ii Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 41 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 43 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 SECTION III Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.1. GENERAL 44 22.2. EXAMPLE 45 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3. FIXED SIGN 46 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 46 23.5. SIGN COLORING 46 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 46 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 46 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE47 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 48 SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 SECTION III—General Conditions 1. DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the SECTION III Page 1 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SECTION III Page 2 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F. D. O. T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. SECTION III Page 3 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 Person Project SECTION III — General Conditions Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been SECTION III Page 4 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. SECTION III Page 5 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be SECTION III Page 6 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 7 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. SECTION III Page 8 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub- contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD SECTION III Page 10 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for Contractor's negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub -contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured SECTION III Page 11 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. SECTION III Page 12 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III - General Conditions ' Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish ' satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and ' conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or ' materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS ' Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item ' or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be ' not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's ' Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or ' "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. SECTION III Page 13 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or SECTION III Page 14 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the SECTION III Page 15 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property SECTION 111 Page 16 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10. EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. SECTION III Page 17 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. SECTION III Page 18 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. SECTION III Page 19 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. SECTION III Page 20 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SECTION III Page 21 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3. Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. SECTION III Page 22 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahonyc@nivC learwater.com. 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. SECTION ID Page 23 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. SECTION III Page 24 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. SECTION III Page 25 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed SECTION III Page 26 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. SECTION III Page 27 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: SECTION III Page 28 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III - General Conditions 1 • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; 1 • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract 1 Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 1 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 1 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable 1 to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any 1 claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the ' occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate 1 data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted 1 in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by 1 unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the 1 Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and ' where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for 1 SECTION III Page 29 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1 Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by SECTION III Page 30 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the SECTION III Page 31 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. SECTION III Page 32 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the SECTION III Page 33 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract SECTION III Page 34 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as - built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all SECTION III Page 35 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. SECTION III Page 36 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed SECTION III Page 37 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which SECTION III Page 38 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): SECTION III Page 39 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SECTION III Page 40 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike SECTION III Page 41 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: Michae1.Pryor a7myClearwater.com. 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or SECTION III Page 42 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the SECTION III Page 43 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SECTION III Page 44 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 22.2. EXAMPLE SECTION III — General Conditions CITY LOGO of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right- of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK. 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined SECTION III Page 45 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3. FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 46 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' <PROJECT NAME> <CONTRACT NUMBER> <DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT .-CON TRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE. FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 2' minimum height PRIGHt \N1) 1WAUTII i'7_• BAY TO REACH 7.1 3'-614, 4"x4" P.T. — Post (Typ.) 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of SECTION III Page 47 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SECTION III Page 48 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the Bid/Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 49 of 49 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Content: 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 2 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 2 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3 105-1. CON TRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3 105-4. EQUIPMENT 4 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 4 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4 105-8. LIGHTING 4 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 5 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 5 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 5 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5 106. STREET SIGNS 5 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 6 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 8 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 8 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 8 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 9 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 9 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 9 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 9 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 10 SECTION IV i Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 10 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 10 109-6. POSTING 10 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 10 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 11 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 11 1 1 1 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 12 203. DEWATERING 12 203-1. GENERAL 12 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12 I 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 13 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 13 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 13 I 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 13 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 14 I 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 14 I 207-1. GENERAL 14 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 14 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 15 I 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 15 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 15 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 15 I 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 15 207-8. MAINTENANCE 15 207-9. COMPLIANCE 16 I 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 16 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 16 I 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 16 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 16 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 16 I 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 17 208-6. RIP -RAP 17 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 17 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 18 301. CONCRETE 18 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 18 302-1. EXCAVATION 18 302-2. FORMS 18 303. REINFORCEMENT 18 SECTION IV ii Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 304. BACKFILL 19 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 19 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 19 305. RIPRAP 20 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 22 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 22 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 22 401-2. PRECAST TYPE 22 401-3. DROP MANHOLES 23 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 23 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 23 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 23 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 23 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 23 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 24 403-1. MATERIALS 24 403-2. INSTALLATION 24 403-3. TESTING 25 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26 404-1. INTENT 26 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 26 404-3. MATERIALS 26 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION 27 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 28 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION 29 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 29 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 29 404-9. PAYMENT 29 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 30 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 30 405-2. PAYMENT 30 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 30 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 31 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 32 405-6. GROUTING MIX 32 405-7. LINER MIX 32 405-8. WATER 33 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS 33 405-10. EQUIPMENT 33 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 34 SECTION IV iii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 405-12. 1NNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 35 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 41 501. SCOPE 41 502. MATERIALS 41 502-1. GENERAL 41 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41 502-3. GATE VALVES 43 502-4. VALVE BOXES 44 502-5. HYDRANTS 44 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES 45 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 45 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 46 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES 46 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 46 503. CONSTRUCTION 46 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 46 503-2. PIPE LAYING 47 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 48 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 49 504. TESTS 49 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 49 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST 50 505. STERILIZATION 50 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT 50 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 50 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 50 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 50 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS 50 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 51 506-1. GENERAL 51 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 51 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 52 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 52 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 52 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 53 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 53 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 53 602. UNDERDRAINS 53 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 53 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 SECTION IV iv Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 603. STORM SEWERS 54 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 54 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 55 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 55 604-2. PRECAST TYPE 56 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 56 605-1. MATERIAL 56 605-2. PERFORMANCE 57 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 59 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 59 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 59 702-1. BASE 59 702-2. SUBGRADE 61 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 62 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 62 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 62 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 63 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 63 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 63 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 63 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 64 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 64 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 65 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 65 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 65 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 66 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66 706. CONCRETE CURBS 66 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 67 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 67 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 67 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 67 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 68 SECTION IV v Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 68 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 68 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 69 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 69 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 69 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 69 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 69 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 69 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 70 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 70 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 71 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 71 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 71 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 71 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 72 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 73 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 73 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 73 902-1. IRRIGATION 73 902-2. LANDSCAPE 83 903. SODDING 97 904. SEEDING 98 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 98 905-1. SCOPE 98 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 99 905-3. WORK METHODS 99 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 101 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 101 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 101 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 102 910. TREE PROTECTION 102 910-1. TREE BARRICADES 102 910-2. ROOT PRUNING 103 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 104 SECTION IV vi Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: Water Treatment Fluoride Addition — WTP 1 and WTP 2 Project Number: 16 -0031 -UT Scope of Work: The work includes the installation of fluoride feed facilities at the City's Water Treatment Plants 1 and 2 (WTP 1 and WTP 2). The fluoride equipment includes storage, pumping, and related equipment to add fluoride to the City's potable water system. The Contractor shall provide 2 [Fixed] project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. Contract Period: 330 Consecutive Calendar Days SECTION IV Page 1 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. 102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. SECTION IV Page 2 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by City's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction conditions. 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation. SECTION IV Page 3 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 105-4. EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 105-8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to SECTION IV Page 4 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard SECTION IV Page 5 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans. 107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision: "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans. 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local SECTION IV Page 6 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer. 107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. SECTION IV Page 7 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded. SECTION IV Page 8 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://wvvw.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ SECTION IV Page 9 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications. 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 109-6. POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SECTION IV Page 10 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench -shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. SECTION IV Page 11 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 202. OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 203. DEWATERING 203-1. GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 203-2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The City will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. SECTION IV Page 12 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material. 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines SECTION IV Page 13 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207-1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices. 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of training and SECTION IV Page 14 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre -Construction Meeting. 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 207-8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. SECTION IV Page 15 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 207-9. COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed and maintained in a safe condition at all times. 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and replaced to their current height. 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: (a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. (b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. SECTION IV Page 16 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications (c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. (d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. (e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. (f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. (g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post - construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208-6. RIP -RAP On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. SECTION IV Page 17 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placement. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty-eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 302-1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302-2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall SECTION IV Page 18 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 requirements. 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 304. BACKFILL 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145. Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications. Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by SECTION IV Page 19 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services. Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation. Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D-698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed finished grade. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch (8") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons. SECTION IV Page 20 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. SECTION IV Page 21 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches (24"). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches (24"). Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 401-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. SECTION IV Page 22 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 401-3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301. 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm). 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® or approved water stop coupling. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SECTION IV Page 23 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403-1. MATERIALS 403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical Specifications Article 501. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 403-2. INSTALLATION 403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. SECTION IV Page 24 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403-3. TESTING 403-3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403-3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SECTION IV Page 25 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 403-4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403-4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 404-1. INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8") to twelve inch (12") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 404-3. MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have SECTION IV Page 26 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids. 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SECTION IV Page 27 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as specified below. 404-5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor - provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database. 404-5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. 404-5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4 format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real-time. The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program (Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo- database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. 404-5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synch process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to SECTION IV Page 28 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404-9. PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SECTION IV Page 29 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 405-2. PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per linear foot of liner. 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 405-3.1. MATERIALS 405-3.1.1. LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 405-3.1.2. MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3) parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 405-3.1.3. GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SECTION IV Page 30 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible. Pour six inches (6") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SECTION IV Page 31 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405-4.1. MATERIALS 405-4.1.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-6. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-7. LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one - SECTION IV Page 32 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one-half inch (1/2") in length nor greater than five-eighths inch (5/8") in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405-8. WATER Shall be clean and potable. 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405-10. EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. SECTION IV Page 33 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-11.1. PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 405-11.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405-11.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. SECTION IV Page 34 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-11.4. PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes may be prepared each day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 405-11.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405-11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 405-12.1. SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration. 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam -injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or b. Hydrophilic gel -injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one-half inch (1/2") 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils SECTION IV Page 35 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-12.2. MATERIALS 405-12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 405-12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 405-12.2.3. WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for SECTION IV Page 36 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties ' are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x10^-1° cm/sec to 7.6x10^-11 cm/sec at 100% RH at50%RH 405-12.2.4. CEMENT LINING A self -bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty-four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees Fahrenheit. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2"), but no greater than two inches (2"). It will have a dark grey color. 405-12.2.5. EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray SECTION IV Page 37 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 405-12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 405-12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.) 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 405-12.3.2. PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. SECTION IV Page 38 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 405-12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill five-eighths inch (5/8") holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 405-12.3.5. WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 405-12.3.6. CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2") (and no more than two inches (2")) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a twenty-four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 405-12.3.7. EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. SECTION IV Page 39 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-12.3.8. CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 405-12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for a forty eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405-12.3.10. WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. SECTION IV Page 40 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 1 501. SCOPE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 502. MATERIALS 502-1. GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Cl51/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. SECTION IV Page 41 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. 502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4") through eight inch (8") shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than eight inch (8") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4") through eight inch (8") when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of four inch (4") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18") between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2") PVC pipe to twelve inches (12") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be plugged with a two inch (2") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 502-2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fitting from four inch (4") through sixteen inch (16") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C 104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA SECTION IV Page 42 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 502-2.4. RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 502-2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 502-3. GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4") and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with two inch (2") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, non -shock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch (2") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3") diameter are not allowed. Gate Valves, four inch (4") to sixteen inch (16") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 -ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body. Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped SECTION IV Page 43 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 502-4. VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three-piece valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502-5. HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0 -ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately two inches (2") above the ground line. Breakaway bolts are not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut. SECTION IV Page 44 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 - rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5-1/4") valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2-1/2") hose nozzles and one (1) four and one half inch (4-1/2") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4") P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on four inch (4") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2"). Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2") service connections to six inch (6") and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. SECTION IV Page 45 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three-quarter inch (3/4") bronze test plug. 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 503. CONSTRUCTION 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. SECTION IV Page 46 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 503-2. PIPE LAYING 503-2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30") and a maximum of forty-two inches (42") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 503-2.2. INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the SECTION IV Page 47 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10%) or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503-3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503-3.2. VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed eighteen inches (18") from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 503-3.3. HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall SECTION IV Page 48 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6") ductile iron branch controlled by an independent six inch (6") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. 503-3.4. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater. 504. TESTS 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at their expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. SECTION IV Page 49 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 505. STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O -S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a.clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than twenty-four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. SECTION IV Page 50 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in ' accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The ' City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1 506-1. GENERAL ' Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: ' • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill ' • • Grading Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. ' 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS ' 506-2.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, ' including the length of valves and fittings. 506-2.2. PAYMENT 1 Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. SECTION IV Page 51 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 506-3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 506-3.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506-4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 506-4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 506-5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Article 501-2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. 506-5.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust anchorage, six inch (6") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SECTION IV Page 52 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non -degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 53 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. SECTION IV Page 54 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 55 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 604-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 605-1. MATERIAL 605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. 605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener SECTION IV Page 56 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. 605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. 605-2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at Least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SECTION IV Page 57 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 58 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus two inches (2"), if over six inches (6"), and compacted to 98% of maximum density perAASHTO T-180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702-1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is SECTION IV Page 59 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Technical Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. SECTION IV Page 60 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (I/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 702-2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade. 702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 61 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703-1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one-quarter inch ('/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SECTION IV Page 62 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Type SP/Spec 334-1 Type FC/Spec 337-8 Type B/Spec 234-8 ATPB/287-8 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 703-6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. SECTION IV Page 63 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped SECTION IV Page 64 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's interne site. The address is: http://www.dot.state.fl.us/construction/fuel&bit/fuel&bit.shtm. For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. SECTION IV Page 65 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SECTION IV Page 66 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted. 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SECTION IV Page 67 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. SECTION IV Page 68 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703-7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. SECTION IV Page 69 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 70 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. SECTION IV Page 71 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 72 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at the pre -construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 902-1. IRRIGATION 902-1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. SECTION IV Page 73 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty- four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty-four inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 902-1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater. SECTION IV Page 74 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-1.2. PRODUCTS 902-1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902-1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 75 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AW WA -C-509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inch (2") square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut. 902-1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance -pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1") slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 76 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 902-1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION 902-1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 902-1.2.10.2.OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be seven inch (7"). B. For on -surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 902-1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub -surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 902-1.2.10.4.AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 902-1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within +/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high -impact SECTION IV Page 77 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 902-1.2.10.6. FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 902-1.2.10.7. FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 902-1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. SECTION IV Page 78 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.3. EXECUTION 902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. SECTION IV Page 79 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch (1/2"). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. SECTION IV Page 80 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. SECTION IV Page 81 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty- four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1 After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior to installation. 902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6"), nor less than four inches (4") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SECTION IV Page 82 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-2. LANDSCAPE 902-2.1. GENERAL 902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902-2.1.2. A. SCOPE OF WORK All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health SECTION IV Page 83 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Article. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call"/"Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T. Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 84 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. 0.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DL4.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SECTION IV Page 85 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1") caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than two-thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve inches (12") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. SECTION IV Page 86 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting operations. 902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 902-2.2. PRODUCTS 902-2.2.1. MATERIALS 902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided SECTION IV Page 87 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty- four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. SECTION IV Page 88 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902-2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager. B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902-2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one-fourth ('/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 902-2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2") caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2") caliper and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 902-2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL SECTION IV Page 89 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1"). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three inches (3") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into native soil. 902-2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 902-2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade. 902-2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 902-2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902-2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. SECTION IV Page 90 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2.3. EXECUTION 902-2.3.1. PREPARATION 902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches (1'/z") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3") of one-third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS SECTION IV Page 91 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4"). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4") of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an eighteen inch (18") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. SECTION IV Page 92 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each Y2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade. Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. SECTION IV Page 93 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one and one half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4') height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30") of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2 SECTION IV Page 94 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run-off. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum three inch (3") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6") of non -mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 902-2.3.2.8. PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 902-2.3.2.9. CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 902-2.3.2.10. PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (0.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. SECTION IV Page 95 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902-2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. SECTION IV Page 96 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902-2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 903. SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit SECTION IV Page 97 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy- two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional. compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905-1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; SECTION IV Page 98 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 905-3. WORK METHODS 905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. 905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty-four (24) hours after providing the service. 905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while SECTION IV Page 99 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification: 905-3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905-3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905-3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 905-3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 905-3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. 905-3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3"). 905-3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. SECTION IV Page 100 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 905-3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 905-3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 905-3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man- hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be SECTION IV Page 101 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910-1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2") lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. SECTION IV Page 102 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 910-2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. The City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562-4747, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. SECTION IV Page 103 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18"). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion -tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 104 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 105 of 105 Updated 2/11/2016 Section Title CITY OF CLEARWATER WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP 1 AND WTP 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS — CONFORMED DOCUMENTS DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 Project Requirements 01010 Summary of Project 01025 Measurement and Payment 01041 Project Coordination 01070 Abbreviations and Symbols 01091 Reference Specifications 01200 Project Meetings 01310 Construction Progress Schedules 01340 Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples 01410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services 01568 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control 01600 Material and Equipment 01650 Start -Up and Demonstration 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Final Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 01740 Warranties and Bonds DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK 02050 Removal of Existing Equipment 02220 Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction 02822 Solid Sodding DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete DIVISION 5 — METALS 05120 Structural Steel Framing DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09905 Piping, Valve, and Equipment Identification System 09961 High Performance Paints and Coatings DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT P M W/a b/specs/s-1/TOC Tt #200-41125-16005 i- 062217 Section Title CITY OF CLEARWATER WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP 1 AND WTP 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONFORMED DOCUMENTS 11218 Chemical Transfer Pumps 11241 Chemical Feed Systems 11245 Chemical Metering Pumps 11500 Hydrofluosilicic Acid Air Scrubber System DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13216 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks and Accessories 13219 Polyethylene Chemical Storage Tanks and Accessories 13410 Basic Instrumentation Requirements 13413 Fiber Optic Cable 13423 Level Measurement 13424 Pressure Measurement 13491 Spare Parts DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15044 Pressure Testing of Piping 15070 Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 15076 Double Wall Containment Piping 15090 Chemical Feed System Piping 15100 Valves and Appurtenances 15126 Pipe Hangers and Supports for Process Piping 15129 Couplings and Connectors 15130 Pressure Gauges DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16015 Electrical Systems Analysis 16050 Basic Electrical Requirements 16060 Grounding 16070 Supporting Devices 16075 Electrical Identification 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Raceways 16135 Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings 16140 Wiring Devices 16220 Motors 16748 Software Services PM W/ab/specs/s-1/TOC Tt #200-41125-16005 -ii- 062217 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01005 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. The summary of the work is presented in Section 01010: Summary of Work. 2. Work Included: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant power, Tight, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and means of construction necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary local building and other regulatory permits, except as provided for in The Florida Department of Environmental Protection water facilities construction permit. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. b. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. c. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials, and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. PMW/vd/specs/01005 Tt#200-41125-16005 01005-1 051517 3. Public Utility Installations and Structures: P M W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies, or privately owned by individuals, firms, or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be affected by the Work shall be deemed included hereunder. b. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. c. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the Work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. d. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced, or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various Contract Items. No separate payment shall be made therefor. e. Where public utility installations of structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the Work, and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the Work under this Contract, such Work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such Work may be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously, and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement, or 01005-2 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be paid for as extra work as provided in the Agreement. f. The Contractor shall, at all times in performance of the Work, employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility installations and structures; and shall, at all times in the performance of the Work, avoid unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services, and shall cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end. g. The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of his proposed construction operations, at least 48 -hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work. h. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation, or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the owners of such utilities. 1.02 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large-scale drawings in preference to small-scale drawings. B. Supplementary Drawings: 1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer, and the Contractor will be furnished one (1) complete set of Construction Drawings (24 inches by 36 inches) and one (1) reproducible copy of the Project Manual. 2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary Drawings require either Tess or more than the estimated quantities of Work, credit to the Owner or compensation therefor to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. C. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: 1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, schedules, Specifications, or other data received from the Engineer, and shall notify him of all errors, omissions, P M W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 01005-3 051517 conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction, or improper operation resulting therefrom, nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be discovered. 2. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility or the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract. D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications consist of three (3) parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General Requirements which govern the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify and supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. E. Intent: 1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the Work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. 2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, the interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: 1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request and at the Engineer's option, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. P M W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 01005-4 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Any two (2) or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type, or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. B. Delivery: 1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the Work so as to complete the Work within the allotted time. 2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related Contractor. C. Tools and Accessories: 1. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment, one (1) complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data. D. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: 1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test, and place in operation, the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. PM W/vd/specs/01005 Tt#200-41125-16005 01005-5 051517 • 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five (5) copies of the reports shall be submitted, and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 2. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be notified thereof, and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the Owner. 3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs: 1. All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. 3. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in making such tests of materials and equipment which are rejected for non-compliance. PMW/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 01005-6 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Certificate of Manufacture: 1. Contractor shall furnish to Engineer authoritative evidence in the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. D. Shop Tests: 1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function, or special requirements are specified shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Five (5) copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company and/or independent laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Start-up Tests: 1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make start-up tests of equipment. 2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to demonstration tests, make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the start- up tests as applicable. F. Demonstration Tests: 1. Prior to Contractor's request for a Substantial Completion inspection, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration tests, at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall assist in the demonstration tests as applicable. PM W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 01005-7 051517 1.05 LINES AND GRADES A. Grade: 1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor. 2. Adjustments of grades shown on Drawings may be necessary to conform to actual field conditions or to maintain cover under proposed future grades. Such adjustments shall be considered part of the job conditions and no extra compensation will be allowed for such changes, except where specifically otherwise noted in the Drawings or Specifications. Such adjustments must be approved by the Engineer prior to being made. 3. The Engineer will establish bench marks and baseline controlling points. Reference marks for lines and grades as the Work progresses will be located by the Contractor to cause as little inconvenience to the prosecution of the Work as possible. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him contrary to this provision. B. Surveys: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other such materials. 2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any inaccuracies. 3. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by the Engineer, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. He shall, however, be subject to the check and review by the Engineer. C. Safeguarding Marks: 1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work, bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and marks. P M W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 01005-8 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments, and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01005 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01005-9 051517 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF PROJECT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. This Contract is for the City of Clearwater Water Treatment Fluoride Addition WTP No. 1 and WTP No. 2 as specified herein. The Work consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials for the construction of the facilities consisting of, but not limited to, the following at each water treatment plant (WTP) : WTP No. 1 and WTP No. 2: 1. New hydrofluosilicic acid storage and feed system. 2. Miscellaneous chemical piping. 3. Electrical and instrumentation systems. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products and materials at the job site. If additional storage or work areas are required, they shall be obtained by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 PROJECT SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall establish his work sequence based on the use of crews to facilitate completion of construction and testing within the specified Contract Time. The proposed project sequence, including Contractor's plans for provision of temporary facilities, shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to construction. B. All tie-ins to existing utilities shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner. END OF SECTION P M W/vd/specs/01010 Tt#200-41125-16005 01010-1 051517 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Refer to Section 01010 for a description of the work required for completion of the Work. B. Subject to the provisions in the Contract General Conditions, all work and payment for the work is represented by the Total Base Bid amount shown on the Bid Form. 1.02 PAYMENT A. Work under this contract will be paid for on a unit price basis as outlined on the Bid Form. The amount of payment will be as defined in the Standard Form of Agreement Between OWNER and Contractor, Article 5 of Payment Procedures. B. The prices shown on the Bid Form establish a total price cost for completing the Work in its entirety. Furnish all materials, equipment, transportation, tools, labor, services and supplies, plus any miscellaneous items and services that may not be specifically identified in the Contract Drawings and Specifications but that can be inferred from the Contract Drawings and Specifications and are necessary to produce a completed Work that is usable in a manner for which it was intended. If any items for a complete work are omitted or not shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install them without additional cost to the OWNER. No separate payment will be made for another Payment Item required to complete the work of a lump sum item. C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an Application for Payment no more often than each month. D. Retainage shall apply to all Contractor payments prior to final acceptance as provided for in the Contract General Conditions. 1.03 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT A. Measurement for Lump Sum bid items shall be based on the percent of actual completion as determined by the Contractor and agreed upon by the ENGINEER. B. Measurement of volumes shall be the actual "as -built" volume pertinent to payment items. Quantities on the Bid Form are estimated and may be increased or decreased without limit. P M W/vd/specs/01025 Tt#200-41125-16005 01025-1 051517 1.04 PAYMENT ITEMS A. Separate payment will be made for the Unit Price and Lump Sum Items listed on the Bid Form. Related work not specifically listed or identified, but evidently necessary for satisfactory completion of the Item, shall be considered to be included. B. No separate payment will be made for the following Work and its cost shall be included in appropriate Payment Items: 1. Maintenance and replacement of plantings and sodding. 2. Record drawings. 3. Construction photographs and videotape recordings. 4. Field office(s) and storage facilities. 5. Clean up. 6. Testing materials and apparatus. 7. Appurtenant work. 8. Contractor fees associated with the performance of the Work. 9. Night work. C. The following will clarify the work included for bid items in the Pay Item Sheet: 1. Mobilization and Demobilization (Bid Item No. 1): a. Measurement of various items for Mobilization and Demobilization will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. P M W/vd/specs/01025 Tt #200-41125-16005 b. Payment for Mobilization and Demobilization will be made at the Contract lump sum price for the item, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the Project and demobilizing for ending work on the Project. The establishment of field offices, buildings, safety equipment, first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities, as required by these Specifications, State and local laws and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the state of the Work; the cost of field engineering, including disposal of cleared and grubbed material and debris, permits and fees, construction schedules, preconstruction video and photographs, project signs, shop drawings, temporary facilities, lay down storage area, construction aids, erosion control, work associated with Contractor support during Owner/Engineer testing, reviews and inspection, re -inspection and any rework resulting from same, cleaning, project records documents, operating and maintenance data. The Contractor shall submit invoices substantiating the cost of mobilization with each pay request. Ten percent of the cost for mobilization and demobilization will be 01025-2 051517 withheld. until acceptance and final payment. Contractor is responsible for securing a site for storage of materials and equipment and all other construction needs and providing security for this site and its contents. 2. General Requirements (Bid Item No. 2): a. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements will not be made for payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for General Requirements shall include all Insurance requirements costs, the costs of all bonds, and all administrative costs associated with acquiring and maintaining the necessary coverage as described in the Contract Documents. This item will be paid upon each payment request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the payment request invoices to substantiate that appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor. Payment will be based on percentage of work completed during the pay period at time of pay application to the nearest 10% complete. The cumulative total shall not exceed the Lump Sum Bid Pay Item Amount. 3. Indemnification (Bid Item No. 3): a. In consideration of the Contractor's indemnity agreement as set out in the Contract Documents, the OWNER specifically agrees to give the Contractor a minimum of $1,000.00 and other good and valuable consideration, receipt of which is acknowledged upon signing of the Agreement. 4. All other work not included in line items 1, 2, and 3 to construct the fluoride addition systems at WTP No. 1 and WTP No. 2 (Bid Item No. 4): a. Measurement of various items not included in other bid items to construct the fluoride addition systems at WTP No. 1 and WTP No. 2 will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for these items will include all materials, equipment, and work required to complete the project as shown on or inferred by the Contract Documents and will be made at the contract lump sum. Contractor shall provide line item breakdown of specific work and associated costs in the Schedule of Values. 5. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item No. 5): a. The work covered by this Bid Item consists of unforeseen items of work not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on the plans. The cost for unforeseen Utility Relocations will be paid for under a separate Pay Item. The cost P M W/vd/specs/01025 Tt #200-41125-16005 01025-3 051517 of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this additional work. The value of the work shall be based on unit prices or similar bid items called for in the Proposal. b. Measurement: The quantities and cost of unspecified work to be paid under this item shall be agreed upon and approved in writing by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this unspecified work. c. The bid price for this Bid Item shall be ten percent (10%) of the total bid. This item will be treated as an allowance, against which the Owner, at his discretion, may direct work not shown on the plans, or require other additional work which falls within the general scope of work for the project, as approved in writing from the Owner. Each dollar of cost for the additional work will be considered one unit. The final project change order shall include all additional costs approved under the contingency. This item is for contingency if required during the course of the project to facilitate the project, and will be paid only after written authorization to include the item in the progress payments. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) P M W/vd/specs/01025 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01025-4 051517 SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish personnel and equipment that will be efficient, appropriate and Targe enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract time. If at any time, such personnel appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work aforementioned, he may order the Contractor to increase the efficiency, change the character or increase the personnel and equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE LOCATIONS A. All pipes shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items where required. 3.02 OPEN EXCAVATIONS A. Contractor shall adequately safeguard all open excavations by providing temporary barricades, caution signs, lights, and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by workmen. All open excavations shall comply with applicable OSHA Standards. 3.03 TEST PITS A. Test pits for the purpose of locating underground pipelines or structures in advance of the construction shall be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The costs for such test pits shall be borne by the Contractor. PM W/vd/specs/01041 Tt #200-41125-16005 01041-1 051517 3.04 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the Work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other manner acceptable to the Engineer. 3.05 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from damage in any way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads on it shall be allowed and all portions damaged shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Protect all structures in a suitable manner to prevent damage. Should any part of a structure become heaved, cracked or otherwise damaged, all such damaged portions of the work shall be completely repaired and made good by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, in the final inspection of the work, any defects, faults or omissions are found, the Contractor shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by proper materials and workmanship without extra compensation for the materials and labor required. Further, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the satisfactory maintenance and repair of the construction and other work undertaken herein, for at least the guarantee period described in the Contract. C. Further, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any structure due to water pressure during and after construction and until such structure is accepted and taken over by the Owner. 3.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper authority (County, City, FDOT, etc.), all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for safety satisfactory to the Engineer. B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured, the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the Owner. All maintenance of traffic plans PM W/vd/specs/01041 Tt #200-41125-16005 01041-2 051517 required for construction shall be approved by the local governmental entity having jurisdiction. C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection has been provided. 3.07 PRIVATE LAND A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside the site, except by written permission of the appropriate owners. Contractor shall provide Owner a copy of such written permission prior to entering private land. 3.08 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall, prior to interrupting a utility service (water, sewer, etc.) for the purpose of making cut -ins to the existing lines or for any other purposes, contact the Owner and make arrangements for the interruption, which will be satisfactory to the Owner. 3.09 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTS A. This Contract may require a portion of the work to be connected to work done under other contract(s). It will be necessary for the Contractor to plan his work and cooperate with other contractors insofar as possible to prevent any interference and delay. END OF SECTION PM W/vd/specs/01041 Tt #200-41125-16005 01041-3 051517 SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. Referenced Standards: Any reference to published specifications or standards of any organization or association shall comply with the requirements of the specification or standard which is current on the date of Advertisement for Bids. In case of a conflict between the referenced specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. In case of conflict between the referenced specifications or standards and the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern. B. Abbreviations: AA Aluminum Association AAA American Arbitration Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AASHO The American Association of State Highway Officials ABA American Bar Association ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AFBMA Anti -Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association Al The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIA American Insurance Association AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers (Now IEEE) AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Condition Association ANSI American National Standard Institute APA American Plywood Association P M W/vd/specs/01070 Tt #200-41125-16005 01070-1 051517 API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI American Refrigeration Institute ASA American Standards Association (Now ANSI) ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSCBC American Standard Safety Code for Building Construction ASSHTO American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America (formerly SCPI) CDA Copper Development Association CFS Cubic Feet Per Second CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association DOT Spec Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction Florida Department of Transportation, 1982 E/A Engineer and/or Architect EDA Economic Development Association EEI Edison Electric Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCI Fluid Control Institute FDEP Florida Department of Environmental Protection FDOT Florida Department of Transportation Fed Spec Federal Specification FGS Florida Geological Survey FPS Feet Per Second FS Federal Standards GPM Gallons Per Minute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HP Horsepower HSBII Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Co. ID Inside Diameter PMW/vd/specs/01070 Tt #200-41125-16005 01070-2 051517 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IPS Iron Pipe Size MGD Million Gallons Per Day MHI Materials Handling Institute MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association NaOCI Sodium Hypochlorite NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBHA National Builders' Hardware Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NCSA National Crushed Stone Association NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association ND Nominal Diameter NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NLA National Lime Association NPC National Plumbing Code NPT National Pipe Threads NSC National Safety Council NSF National Sanitation Foundation OD Outside Diameter OSHA U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PS United States Products Standards PSI Pounds per Square Inch PSIA Pounds per Square Inch Absolute PSIG Pounds per Square Inch Gauge RAS Return Activated Sludge RPM Revolutions Per Minute SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SDI Steel Decks Institute SJI Steel Joists Institute SWFWMD Southwest Florida Water Management District SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SSI Scaffolding and Shoring Institute SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC Structural Steel Painting Council STA Station (100 feet) TDH Total Dynamic Head TH Total Head UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. P M W/vd/specs/01070 Tt #200-41125-16005 01070-3 051517 USASI or United States of America Standards Institute USGS United States Geological Survey WAS Waste Activated Sludge C. Additional abbreviations and symbols are shown on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01070 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01070-4 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01091 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable Publications. Whenever in these specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the drawings shall be waived because of any provision of or omission from said standards or requirements. B. Assignment of Specialists. In certain instances, specification test requires (or implies) that specific Work is to be assigned to specialist or expert entities who must be engaged for the performance of the Work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. They are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of Work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract requirements remains with the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the specifications, all Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of these specifications not the applicable codes. B. References herein to "Building Code" shall mean the Florida Building Code (FBC). The latest edition of the code as approved and used by the local agency as of the date of award as adopted by the agency having jurisdiction shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or labor. The Contractor shall bid the most stringent requirements. PMW/vd/specs/01091 Tt #200-41125-16005 01091-1 051517 D. Applicable Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall construct the Work specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01091 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01091-2 051517 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the Engineer to schedule and administer the preconstruction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specifically called meetings throughout the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall: a. Prepare agenda for meetings. b. Make physical arrangements for meetings. c. Preside at Progress meetings. d. Take and distribute meeting minutes. 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 3. The Owner shall attend meetings to ascertain that the Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 4. The Contractor shall record the preconstruction meeting and each progress meeting in its entirety, and shall provide the Engineer with a copy of such recording, having good quality and clarity, and a typed transcript of the minutes of each meeting. A copy of the minutes of each progress meeting shall be available five business days after the meeting. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 2. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples: Section 01340. 3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. PMW/ab/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 01200-1 062317 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Engineer will schedule a preconstruction meeting no later than twenty (20) days after date of Notice to Proceed. The meeting shall be scheduled at the convenience of all parties. B. Location: A local site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Owner. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Engineer and his professional consultants. 3. Resident project representative. 4. Contractor and his superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. 6. Representatives of major suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate. 7. Governmental representatives as appropriate. 8. Others as requested by the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer. D. The Engineer shall preside at the preconstruction meeting. The Contractor shall provide for keeping minutes and distribution of minutes to the Owner, Engineer and others. The purpose of the preconstruction meeting is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. E. Contractor shall provide a preliminary construction schedule to demonstrate complete fulfillment of contract requirements utilizing critical path method at the Pre - Construction Meeting. F. The suggested agenda for the preconstruction meeting would include the following: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected schedules. c. Schedule of Values. PMW/ab/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 01200-2 062317 2. Critical work sequencing: Relationships and coordination with other contracts and/or work. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination: Designation and responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Request for Information. d. Submittals. d. Change Orders. f. Applications for Payment. 6. Submittal of Shop Drawings, project data and samples. 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 9. Use of premises: a. Office, work, and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. c. Access and traffic control. 10. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. 11. Temporary utilities. 12. Safety and first aid procedures. 13. Check of required Bond and Insurance certifications. 14. Completion time for contract and liquidated damages. 15. Request for extension of Contract Time. PMW/ab/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 01200-3 062317 16. Procedures for periodic monthly (or whatever interval is deemed appropriate or necessary, however, a minimum of monthly meetings will be required) progress meetings, for all involved. 17. Security procedures. 18. Procedures for making partial payments. 19. Guarantees on completed work. 20. Equipment to be used. 21. Project layout and staking of work. 22. Project inspection. 23. Labor requirements. 24. Laboratory testing of material requirements. 25. Provisions for material stored (well casing only) on site and monthly inventory of materials stored. 26. Requirements of other organizations such as utilities, railroads, highway departments, building departments. 27. Rights-of-way and easements. 28. Housekeeping procedures. 29. Liquidated damages. 30. Posting of signs and installation of Project Sign. 31. Pay request submittal dates. 32. Equal opportunity requirements. 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Engineer shall schedule regular periodic meetings. The progress meetings will be held as needed and at other times as required by the progress of the Work. The first meeting shall be held within thirty (30) days after the preconstruction meeting. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the Work. C. Location of the meetings: Owner's Offices. P M W/a b/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 01200-4 062317 D. Attendance: 1. Engineer and his professional Subconsultants as needed. 2. Resident Project Representative. 3. Contractor and his Superintendent. 4. Owner's representatives. 5. Subcontractors (active on the site, as appropriate to the agenda). 6. Others as appropriate to the agenda (suppliers, manufacturers, other subcontractors, etc.). E. The Contractor shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping minutes and distribution of the minutes to the Owner, Engineer, and others. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work. Contractor shall provide updated progress construction schedule at each progress meeting. F. The suggested agenda for the progress meetings will include but not be limited to the following: 1. Review approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting and Work scheduled (3 -week look ahead schedule). 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Status of approved Construction Schedule and revisions to the Construction Schedule as appropriate. 8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review status of submittals and submittal schedule, expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. PMW/ab/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 01200-5 062317 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Shop drawing problems. 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Critical/long lead items. 16. Other business. G. The Contractor is to attend progress meetings and is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, and be prepared to discuss pertinent topics and provide specific information including but not limited to: 1. Status of all submittals and what specifically is being done to expedite them. 2. Status of all activities behind schedule and what specifically will be done to regain the schedule. 3. Status of all material deliveries, latest contact with equipment manufacturer, and specific actions taken to expedite materials. 4. Status of open deficiencies and what is being done to correct the same. H. The Contractor is to provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/a b/specs/01200 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01200-6 062317 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Promptly after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Engineer estimated construction progress schedules demonstrating complete fulfillment of all Contract requirements utilizing a Critical Path Method (hereinafter referred to as CPM) in planning, coordinating, and performing the Work under this Contract (including all activities of subcontractors, equipment vendors, and suppliers). The principles and definition of CPM terms used herein shall be as set forth in the Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) publication, The Use of CPM in Construction, A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry, Copyright 1976, but the provisions of this Specification shall govern the planning, coordinating, and performance of the Work. 2. Submit revised progress schedules on a monthly basis. No partial payments shall be approved until there is an updated construction progress schedule on hand. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Summary of Work: Section 01010. 3. Meetings and Conferences: Section 01200. 4. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples: Section 01340. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. A statement of computerized CPM capability shall be submitted and shall verify that either Contractor's organization has in-house capability to use the CPM technique or that Contractor will employ a CPM consultant who is so qualified. 1.03 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. P M W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-1 051517 1. Provide a separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation within each structure or item. 2. Horizontal time scale: a. Show starting and completion dates for each activity in terms of the number of days after Notice to Proceed. All completion dates shown shall be within the period specified for contract completion. b. Identify the first work day of each month. 3. Scale and Spacing: Sufficient to allow space for notations and future revisions. 4. Maximum Sheet Size: 24 inches by 36 inches. B. Format of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work for each structure. C. Identification of Listings: By major specification section numbers as applicable and by structure. D. Construction Progress Schedules shall be computer generated using software equal to Primavera Project Planner for Windows by Primavera Systems, Inc., Bala Cynwyd, P.A., Microsoft Project, or approved equal. 1.04 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity and by structure. 2. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of construction in no more than a two (2) week increment scale. 3. Show projected percentage of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show projected dollar cash flow requirements for each month of construction and for each activity as indicated by the approved Schedule of Values. B. Submittals for construction progress schedules shall be in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Work Drawings, and Samples. Indicate on the schedule the following: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. P M W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-2 051517 2. The dates submittals will be required for Owner -furnished products, if applicable. 3. The dates approved submittals will be required from the Engineer. C. A typewritten list of all long lead items (equipment, materials, etc.). D. Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date. E. Scheduling Constraints: The work within Owner's property must be completed within the maximum number of days start to finish, as indicated in the Contract. Additionally, work must proceed on a continuous basis, without stoppages, except for nights and weekends. There shall be no lapses between phases of construction. 1.05 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. D. If the Work falls behind the critical path schedule by two (2) weeks or more, the Contractor shall prepare a recovery schedule. 1.06 SUBMISSIONS A. Submittal Requirements. 1. Logic network and/or time -phased bar chart, computer generated. P M W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-3 051517 2. Narrative description of the logic and reasoning of the schedule. B. Time of Submittals: Within ten (10) working days after Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit a network diagram describing the activities to be accomplished in the project and their dependency relationships, (predecessor/successor) as well as a tabulated schedule as herein defined. The total length of time indicated on the initial CPM schedule shall equal the exact number of days as defined in the Contract. The schedule produced and submitted shall also indicate calendar dates, including project starting and completion dates, based on the Contract Commencement and completion dates indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The Engineer will complete the review of the complete schedule within fifteen (15) working days after receipt. During the review process, the Engineer may meet with a representative of Contractor to review the proposed plan and schedule to discuss any clarifications that may be necessary. C. Within ten (10) working days after the conclusion of the Engineer's review period, Contractor shall revise the network diagram as required and resubmit the network diagram and a tabulated schedule produced therefrom. The revised network diagram and tabulated schedule shall be reviewed and accepted or rejected by the Engineer within fifteen (15) working days after receipt. The network diagram and tabulated schedule, when accepted by the Engineer, shall constitute the project work schedule unless a revised schedule is required due to substantial changes in the Work, a change in Contract Time or a recovery schedule is required and requested. D. Acceptance. The finalized schedule will be acceptable to the Engineer when, in the opinion of the Engineer, it demonstrates an orderly progression of the Work to completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. Such acceptance will neither impose on the Engineer responsibility for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve Contractor from full responsibility therefore. The finalized schedule of shop drawing submittals will be acceptable to the Engineer when, in the opinion of the Engineer, it demonstrates a workable arrangement for processing the submittals in accordance with the requirements. The finalized Schedule of Values (lump sum price breakdown), as applicable, will be acceptable to the Engineer as to form and content when, in the opinion of the Engineer, it demonstrates a substantial basis for equitably distributing the Contract Price. When the network diagram and tabulated schedule have been accepted, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) copies of the time -scaled network diagram, six (6) copies of a computerized tabulated schedule in which the activities have been sequenced by numbers, six (6) copies of a computerized tabulated schedule in which the activities have been sequenced by early starting date, and six (6) copies of a computerized, tabulated schedule in which activities have been sequenced by total float, and six (6) copies sorted by predecessor/successor. E. Revised Work Schedules. Contractor, if requested by the Engineer, shall provide a revised work schedule if, at any time, the Engineer considers the completion date to be in jeopardy because of "activities behind schedule." The revised work schedule shall include a new diagram and tabulated schedule conforming to the requirements of Paragraph 1.09 herein, designed to show how Contractor intends to accomplish the PM W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-4 051517 Work to meet the completion date. The form and method employed by Contractor shall be the same as for the original work schedule. No payment will be made if activities fall more than two (2) weeks behind schedule and a revised work schedule is not furnished. F. Schedule Revisions. The Engineer may require Contractor to modify any portions of the work schedule that become infeasible because of "activities behind schedule" or for any other valid reason. An activity that cannot be completed by its original latest completion date shall be deemed to be behind schedule. No change may be made to the sequence, duration, or relationships of any activity without approval of the Engineer. 1.07 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Engineer. 2. Jobsite file. 3. Subcontractors. 4. Other concerned parties. 5. Owner (two copies). B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules. 1.08 CHANGE ORDERS A. Upon approval of a change order, the approved changes shall be reflected in the next scheduled revision or update submittal of the construction progress schedule by the Contractor. 1.09 CPM STANDARDS A. CPM, as required by this Section, shall be interpreted to be generally as outlined in the Associated General Contractor's (AGC) publication, The Use of CPM in Construction, A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry, Copyright 1976. B. Work schedules shall include a graphic network and computerized, tabulated schedules as described below. To be acceptable the schedule must demonstrate the following: 1. A logical succession of work from start to finish. PMW/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-5 051517 2. Definition of each activity. Activities shall be identified by major specification section numbers, as applicable, and by major structure. 3. A logical flow of work crews/equipment (crews are to be defined by manpower category and man-hours; equipment by type and hours). 4. Show all work activities and interfaces including submittals as well as major material and equipment deliveries. C. Networks. 1. The CPM network, or diagram, shall be in the form of a time -scaled diagram of the customary activity -on -type and may be divided into a number of separate pages with suitable notation relating the interface points among the pages. Notation on each activity line shall include a brief work description and a duration, as described in Paragraph 1.09, D. herein. 2. All construction activities and procurement shall be indicted in a time -scaled format, and a calendar shall be shown on all sheets along the entire sheet length. Each activity arrow shall be plotted so the beginning and completion dates of said activity can be determined graphically by comparison with the calendar scale. All activities shall be shown using the symbols that clearly distinguish between critical path activities, non-critical path activities, and float for each non-critical activity. All non-critical path activities shall show estimated performances time and float time in scaled form. D. The duration indicated for each activity shall be in calendar days and shall represent the single best time considering the scope of the work and resources planned for the activity including time for inclement weather. Except for certain non -labor activities, such as curing concrete or delivering materials, activity durations shall not exceed fourteen (14) days nor be less than one (1) day unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. E. Tabulated Schedules. The initial schedule shall include the following minimum data for each activity. 1. Activity Beginning and Ending Numbers (i -j numbers) (single activity numbers may be used). 2. Duration. 3. Activity Description. 4. Early Start Date (Calendar Dated). 5. Late Start Date (Calendar Dated). P M W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 01310-6 051517 6. Early Finish Date (Calendar Dated). 7. Late Finish Date (Calendar Dated). 8. Identified Critical Path. 9. Total Float (Note: No activity may show more than 20 days float). 10. Cost of Activity. 11. Equipment Hours, by type; Man -Power Hours, by crew or trade. F. Project Information. Each tabulation shall be prefaced with the following summary data. 1. Project Name. 2. Contractor. 3. Type of Tabulation (Initial or Updated). 4. Project Duration. 5. Project Scheduled Completion Date. 6. Effective or Starting Date of the Schedule. 7. New Project Completion Date and Project Status (if an updated or revised schedule). 8. Actual Start Date and Actual Finish Date (for all updated schedules.) 1.10 SCHEDULE MONITORING A. At not Tess than monthly intervals or when specifically requested by Engineer, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a computer printout of an updated schedule for those activities that remain to be completed. Typically, the updated schedule will be submitted with the application for payment as specified below. B. The updated schedule shall be submitted in the form, sequence, and number of copies requested for the initial schedule. 1.11 PROGRESS MEETINGS For the monthly progress meeting, Contractor shall submit a revised CPM schedule and a three- week look -ahead schedule, showing all activities completed, in progress, uncompleted, or scheduled to be worked during the weeks. The three weeks include the current week plus the PM W/vd/specs/01310 Tt#200-41125-16005 01310-7 051517 next two weeks. All activities shall be from the approved CPM and must be as shown on the CPM unless behind or ahead of schedule. One copy of the revised CPM schedule shall be submitted with each copy of that month's application for payment, six (6) copies minimum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01310 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01310-8 051517 SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval, such Shop Drawings, Test Reports, and Product Data on materials and equipment (hereinafter in this Section called Data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section called Samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but not limited to those Shop Drawings, Data, and Samples for materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the Drawings. 2. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of preliminary data on items for which Shop Drawings are to be submitted. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed manufacturers furnishing specified items. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way expressed or implied relieve the Contractor from submitting complete Shop Drawings and providing materials, equipment, etc., fully in accordance with the Contract Documents. This procedure is required in order to expedite final review of Shop Drawings. 3. The Contractor is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and will bring this log to each scheduled progress meeting with the Owner and the Engineer. This log should include the following items: a. Submittal description and number assigned. b. Date to Engineer. c. Date returned to Contractor (from Engineer). d. Status of submittal (Approved, Approved as Noted, Amend and Resubmit, and Rejected). e. Date of resubmittal and return (as applicable). f. Date material release (for fabrication). g. Projected date of fabrication. P M W/sc/specs/01340 Tt#200-41125-16005 01340-1 062217 h. Projected date of delivery to site. i. Status of O&M manuals submittal. j. Specification Section. k. Drawings sheet number. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. General Conditions: Section 00700 2. Shop Drawing Submittal Form: Section 00847 3. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 4. Material and Equipment: Section 01600. 5. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all drawings, data and samples prepared before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each and every copy of the Drawings and data shall bear the Contractor's stamp showing that they have been so checked. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this requirement. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor takes exception to the specifications, the Contractor shall note the exception in the letter of transmittal to the Engineer. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule of Shop Drawing submittals fixing the respective dates for the submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning and ending of manufacture, testing, and installation of materials, supplies, and equipment. This schedule shall indicate those that are critical to the progress schedule. PMW/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-2 062217 D. The Contractor shall not begin any of the work covered by a Shop Drawing, Data, or a Sample returned for correction until a revision or correction thereof has been reviewed and returned to him, by the Engineer, with approval. E. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all drawings and schedules sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no Tess than thirty (30) calendar days for checking and appropriate action from the time the Engineer receives them. F. All submittals shall be accompanied with a transmittal letter prepared in duplicate containing the following information: 1. Date. 2. Project Title and Number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawings, Project Data, and Sample submitted. 5. Notification of Deviations from Contract Documents. a. The Contractor shall indicate in bold type at the top of the cover sheet of submittal of shop drawing if there is a deviation from the Drawings, Specifications, or referenced specifications or codes. b. The Contractor shall also list any deviations from the Drawings, Specifications, or referenced specifications or codes and identify in green ink prominently on the applicable Shop Drawings. 6. Submittal Log Number conforming to Specification Section Number. G. The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of descriptive or product data information and Shop Drawings to the Engineer plus the number of copies which the Contractor requires returned. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs of damages which may result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of Work prior to the completion of the review by the Engineer of the necessary Shop Drawings. I. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for observing the need for and making any changes in the arrangement of piping, connections, wiring, manner of installation, etc., which may be required by the materials/equipment he proposes to supply both as pertains to his own work and any work affected under other parts, headings, or divisions of the Drawings and Specifications. J. The Contractor shall not use Shop Drawings as a means of proposing alternate items to demonstrate compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. P M W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-3 062217 K. Each submittal will bear a stamp indicating that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. The Contractor stamp shall be similar to the sample given below. (OWNER'S NAME) (PROJECT NAME) (PROJECT NUMBER) SHOP DRAWING NO.: SPECIFICATION SECTION: DRAWING NO. WITH RESPECT TO THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE, I HAVE DETERMINED AND VERIFIED ALL QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE CRITERIA, INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, CATALOG NUMBERS, AND SIMILAR DATA WITH RESPECT THERETO AND REVIEWED OR COORDINATED THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE WITH OTHER SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. NO VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS SHOWN (CONTRACTOR'S NAME) (CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS) BY: DATE: AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE L. Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the work of all trades and sub -contractors involved, before they are submitted for review by the Engineer and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamp of approval shall be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. 1.03 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Engineer's review of Shop Drawings, Data, and Samples as submitted by the Contractor will be to determine if the items(s) generally conforms to the information in the Contract Documents and is compatible with the design concept. The Engineer's review and exceptions, if any, will not constitute an approval of dimensions, connections, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item shown. P M W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-4 062217 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The review of drawings and schedules will be general, and shall not be construed: 1. As permitting any departure from the Contract Documents. 2. As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials. 3. As approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein. C. If the drawings or schedules as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract Documents which the Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or contract time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D. "Approved As Noted" - Contractor shall incorporate Engineer's comments into the submittal before release to manufacturer. The Contractor shall send a letter to the Engineer acknowledging the comments and their incorporation into the Shop Drawing. E. "Amend And Resubmit" - Contractor shall resubmit the Shop Drawing to the Engineer. The resubmittal shall incorporate the Engineer's comments highlighted on the Shop Drawing. F. "Rejected" - Contractor shall correct, revise and resubmit Shop Drawing for review by Engineer. G. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer. H. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the drawings to constitute a change to the Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to the Engineer. I. When the Shop Drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer. J. No partial submittals will be reviewed. Submittals not deemed complete will be stamped "Rejected" and returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items for: 1. Systems. PM W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-5 062217 2. Processes. 3. As indicated in specific Specifications Sections. All drawings, schematics, manufacturer's product data, certifications, and other Shop Drawing submittals required by a system specification shall be submitted at one time as a package to facilitate interface checking. K. Only the Engineer shall utilize the color "red" in marking Shop Drawing submittals. L. Shop drawing and submittal data shall be reviewed by the Engineer for each original submittal and first resubmittal; thereafter review time for subsequent resubmittals shall be charged to the Contractor and the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for services rendered by the Engineer as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Shop Drawing" shall be considered to mean Contractor's plans for materials and equipment which become an integral part of the Project. Shop Drawings shall be complete and detailed and shall consist of fabrication, erection, setting and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, and wiring and control diagrams. Catalogs cuts, catalogs, pamphlets, descriptive literature, and performance and test data shall be considered only as supportive information to required Shop Drawings as defined above. As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass-produced; and "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials, products, or models. Delete information which is not applicable to the Work by striking or cross- hatching. C. Each Shop Drawing shall be submitted with an 8-1/2" by 11" cover sheet which shall include a title block for the submittal. Each Shop Drawing cover sheet shall have a blank area 3-1/2 inches high by 4-1/2 inches wide, located adjacent to the title block. The title block/cover sheet shall display the following: 1. Project Title and Number. 2. Name of project building or structure. 3. Number and title of the Shop Drawing. 4. Date of Shop Drawing or revision. P M W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-6 062217 5. Name of Contractor and subcontractor submitting drawing. 6. Supplier/manufacturer. 7. Separate detailer when pertinent. 8. Specification title and Section number. 9. Applicable Drawing number. D. Data on materials and equipment shall include, without limitation, materials and equipment lists, catalog data sheets, catalog cuts, performance curves, diagrams, verification of conformance with applicable standards or codes, materials of construction, and similar descriptive material. Materials and equipment lists shall give, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, size, finish, and all other pertinent Data. E. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list including the equipment name, and address, and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. F. If drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in his letter of transmittal. If acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations, he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed. G. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required shop drawings. The installation list shall include at least five (5) installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least two (2) years unless specified otherwise in the Specification Section applicable. 1.05 WORKING DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Working Drawings" shall be considered to mean the Contractor's plan for temporary structures such as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, ground water control systems, forming and falsework for underpinning, and for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become an integral part of the Project. B. Copies of working drawings as noted in paragraph 1.05 A. above, shall be submitted to the Engineer where required by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer, PM W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-7 062217 and shall be submitted at least thirty (30) calendar days (unless otherwise specified by the Engineer) in advance of their being required for the Work. C. Working Drawings shall be signed by a registered Professional Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State of Florida, and shall convey, or be accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer, which review will be for general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks to new or existing work are assumed by the Contractor; the Owner and Engineer shall have no responsibility therefor. 1.06 SAMPLES A. The Contractor shall furnish, for the approval of the Engineer, samples required by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in the Work until approved by the Engineer. B. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. 3. A minimum of two (2) samples of each item shall be submitted. C. Each sample shall have a label indicating: 1. Name of Project. 2. Name of Contractor and subcontractor. 3. Material or equipment represented. 4. Place of origin. 5. Name of producer/supplier and brand (if any). 6. Location in Project. 7. Submittal and specification numbers. PMW/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-8 062217 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Samples of finished materials shall have additional marking that will identify them under the finished schedules.) D. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter and a description sheet for each shipment of samples. The description sheet shall contain the information required in Paragraphs 1.06B and C above. He shall enclose a copy of the letter and description sheet with the shipment and send a copy of the letter and description sheet to the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract requirements. E. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the Engineer or stored at the site of the Work. Approved Samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the Work. Materials and equipment incorporated in the Work shall match the approved Samples. Samples which failed testing or were not approved will be returned to the Contractor at his expense, if so requested at time of submission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION P M W/sc/specs/01340 Tt #200-41125-16005 01340-9 062217 SECTION 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Contractor will employ and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 3. The Contractor shall provide Engineer with all test results herein within five (5) days of receipt. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Respective section of the Specifications: Certification of products. 3. Each Specification section listed: Laboratory tests required, and standards for testing. 4. Testing laboratory inspection, sampling and testing is required for, but not limited to the following: a. Excavating, Backfilling, and Compaction. b. Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. The following schedule defines the responsibilities of various tests. PM W/vd/specs/01410 Tt#200-41125-16005 01410-1 051517 Test Notes Paid for By Soil Compaction Pipe Work: every 300 ft. at each lift of Contractor compaction minimum. Beneath Structures: each 500 SF each lift of compaction minimum. Concrete Slump test each delivery and compression test Contractor five cylinders every 50 C.Y. minimum. Pressure Per project manual Specifications Contractor Bacteriological Per FDEP/DOH Specifications 1.02 LABORATORY DUTIES: LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY Contractor A. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specific standards; ASTM, other recognized authorities, and as specified. 2. Determine and report on compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify the Engineer and Contractor of material or operations which do not meet the specifications. D. Promptly submit five (5) copies of reports of inspections and tests to the Engineer including: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and Engineer's job number. 3. Testing Laboratory name and address. 4. Name and signature of inspector. 5. Date of inspection or sampling. 6. Record of temperature and weather. PMW/vd/specs/01410 Tt #200-41125-16005 01410-2 051517 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and Specification section. 9. Location in project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Compliance with Contract Documents or not. E. Perform additional services as required by Owner. F. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or reject any portion of work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel. Provide access to Work and manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. C. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacturer or fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. D. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. PMW/vd/specs/01410 Tt #200-41125-16005 01410-3 051517 4. For storage and curing of test samples. E. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01410 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01410-4 051517 SECTION 01568 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as required by applicable rules and regulations and permit conditions. 2. Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching, netting, and providing interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits. 3. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will ensure that sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits. 4. Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion and sediment control measures during construction or until final controls become effective. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction: Section 02220. 2. Solid Sodding: Section 02822. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Sodding is specified in Section 02822. B. Netting shall be fabricated of material acceptable to the Owner. 2.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Bales shall be clean, seed -free cereal hay type. PMW/vd/specs/01568 Tt#200-41125-16005 01568-1 051517 B. Netting shall be fabricated of material acceptable to the Owner. C. Filter stone shall be crushed stone which conforms to Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Specifications. D. Concrete block shall be hollow, non -load bearing type. E. Concrete shall be exterior grade not Tess than 1 -inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Install and maintain silt dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances as shown on the approved descriptions and working drawings. Hay bales which deteriorate and filter stone which is dislodged shall be replaced. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Should any of the temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the Contractor fail to produce results which comply with the requirements of the State of Florida, the Owner or Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately take whatever steps are necessary to correct the deficiency at his own expense. P M W/vd/specs/01568 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01568-2 051517 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Manufactured and fabricated products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. c. Two (2) or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 2. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or specified. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including five copies of the Engineer. 1. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. PM W/vd/specs/01600 Tt#200-41125-16005 01600-1 051517 C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with progress schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. City employees will not accept deliveries, sign receipts for materials, inspect deliveries, assist in unloading or participate in any activities related to the Contractor receiving materials or equipment. Deliveries shall be scheduled during normal working hours and a representative of the Contractor must be present to receive all shipments. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather -protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this Project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Corroded, damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. B. Store products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather -tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. PM W/vd/specs/01600 Tt #200-41125-16005 01600-2 051517 4. Store loose granular materials in a well -drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel, and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking and spalling to a minimum. E. All materials, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven (7) days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. P M W/vd/specs/01600 Tt #200-41125-16005 01600-3 051517 1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE A. Because of the long period allowed for construction, special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed: 1. Materials shall not be shipped until approved by the Engineer. The intent of this requirement is to avoid unnecessary delivery of unapproved materials and to reduce on-site storage time prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall major equipment or finish products be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Engineer. Materials shipped to the site, or temporarily stored off-site in approved locations, shall be stored in accordance with Paragraph 1.04, herein. 2. All equipment having moving parts such as gears, electric motors, etc. and/or instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled building approved by the Engineer, until such time as the equipment is to be installed. 3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc. unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer by him. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. 5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to insure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least half the load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to insure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for longer than ninety (90) days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the Owner. 7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. PM W/vd/specs/01600 Tt #200-41125-16005 01600-4 051517 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts for certain equipment provided under Divisions 11: Equipment; 13: Special Construction; 15: Mechanical; and 16: Electrical have been specified in the pertinent sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 1.07 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL A. All grease, oil and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three (3) weeks of operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION P M W/vd/specs/01600 Tt #200-41125-16005 01600-5 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01650 START-UP AND DEMONSTRATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer that the Work functions as a complete and operable system under normal and emergency operating conditions. B. Contractor shall provide all materials, personnel, equipment and expendables as needed and as specified to perform the required start-up and demonstration tests. C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 2. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01730. 3. Equipment: Division 11. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 START-UP PLAN A. Submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed start-up plan outlining the schedule and sequence of all tests and start-up activities, including submittal of checkout forms, submittal of demonstration test procedures, start-up, demonstration and testing, submittal of certification of completed demonstration and training. Start-up and commissioning may not begin until the plan is approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COMPONENT TEST AND CHECK-OUT A. Start-up Certification: Prior to system start-up, successfully complete all the testing required of the individual components of the Work. Submit six (6) copies of check out forms for each individual component or piece of equipment, signed by the Contractor or the subcontractor and the manufacturer's representative. All copies of the PM W/vd/specs/01650 Tt#200-41125-16005 01650-1 051517 Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be provided before start-up may begin. These forms shall be completed and submitted before Instruction in Operation to Owner or a request for initiating any final inspections. Insert one (1) copy of this form into the applicable section of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. B. Demonstrate to the Engineer and the Owner's representative, that all temporary jumpers and/or bypasses have been removed and that all of the components are operating under their own controls as designated. C. Coordinate start-up activities with the Owner's operating personnel at the site(s) and with the Engineer prior to commencing system start-up. 3.02 START-UP A. Confirm that all equipment is properly energized, that the valves are set to their normal operating condition and that the flow path through the new Work is unobstructed. B. Slowly fill each hydrostatic structure in the process flow stream with water. C. Initiate start-up and training in accordance with and with the use of the facility operation and maintenance manuals. D. Observe the component operation and make adjustments as necessary to optimize the performance of the Work. E. Coordinate with Owner for any adjustments desired or operational problems requiring debugging. F. Make adjustments as necessary. 3.03 START-UP DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING A. After all Work components have been constructed, field tested, and started up in accordance with the individual Specifications and manufacturer requirements, and after all Check -Out Forms have been completed and submitted, perform the Start -Up Demonstration and Testing. The demonstration period shall be held upon completion of all systems at a starting date to be agreed upon in writing by the Owner or his representative. Prior to beginning the start-up demonstration testing, the Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of operational circumstances for approval by the Engineer. The schedule of operational circumstances shall describe, in detail, the proposed test procedures for each piece of equipment. Provide similar test procedure forms for each piece of equipment or section of the Work to include all particular aspects and features of that equipment or section of the Work and as specified in the Technical Sections of the Specifications. B. The Start -Up Demonstration Testing will be conducted for seven (7) consecutive 24- hour days. The Work must operate successfully during the seven (7) day testing period P M W/vd/specs/01650 Tt #200-41125-16005 01650-2 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 in the manner intended. If the Work does not operate successfully, or if the start-up is interrupted due to other contracts, the problems shall be corrected and the test shall start over from day one. The party causing the interruption shall be subject to the assessment of actual damages due to delay. C. During the start-up demonstration period, operate the Work, instruct designated operating personnel in the function and operation of the Work, and cause various operational circumstances to occur. As a minimum, these circumstances will include average and peak daily flows, random equipment or process failures, alarm conditions, overflows, surcharges, interlocks and bypasses. Demonstrate the essential features of the equipment and its relationship to other equipment. The approved schedule of operational circumstances and demonstration test procedures will be used as the agenda during the Start -Up Demonstration Testing period for all equipment and sections of the Work. Coordination of the demonstration test schedule will be accomplished through the Engineer. D. Acceptability of the Work's performance will be based on the Work performing as specified under these actual and simulated operating conditions and as defined in the Contract Documents. The intent of the start-up demonstration and testing is for the Contractor to demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the Work will function as a complete and operable system under normal, as well as emergency operating conditions, and is ready for final acceptance. E. Demonstrate the essential features of the whole system as it applies to the Work, including the mechanical equipment, piping, structures, finishes, controls, and instrumentation. Use the approved procedures and circumstances to demonstrate the system. Any minor deficiencies found shall be noted and included on a punch list attached to the Certificate of Completed Demonstration. The system shall be demonstrated only once, after completion of start-up tests. If circumstances arise that interrupt the test procedures (such as weather, unforeseen process problems, or problems caused by the Contractor whether or not the problems are the fault of the Contractor, etc.,) then the test shall be terminated and rescheduled to a later date after the problem is corrected. The test shall be run in its entirety if so directed by the Engineer. F. Demonstrate the essential features of all electrical and instrumentation systems including, but not limited to, the following as they apply to the work: 1. Electrical systems controls and equipment. a. Electrical power equipment. b. Motor control devices. c. Relays. d. Special transformers. P M W/vd/specs/01650 Tt #200-41125-16005 01650-3 051517 e. Starting devices. 2. Communications systems. 3. Panelboards. a. Distribution panels. b. Lighting panels. c. Main panels, power panels. d. Switchboard. 4. Wiring devices. a. Face plates. b. Low -voltage controls. c. Outlets: convenience, special purpose. d. Switches: regular, time. G. Upon successful completion of the Start-up, Demonstration and Testing, the Owner's personnel will receive the specified training for each system. Training of the Owner's personnel will not be considered valid unless it takes place using a system that has successfully passed the Start-up, Demonstration and Testing. H. Upon completion of all specified operator training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) copies of the Certificate of Completed Demonstration Form, for each item of equipment or system in the Work, signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor, Engineer, and the Owner. Insert one (1) copy of this form in the applicable section of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Samples of the Check Out Form and Certificate of Completed Demonstration Form are provided at the end of this Section. PMW/vd/specs/01650 Tt #200-41125-16005 01650-4 051517 [] OWNER [] ENGINEER: [] ARCHITECT: [] CONTRACTOR: [] FIELD: [] OTHER: CHECK OUT FORM City of Clearwater Tetra Tech No. Copies CHECK-OUT No. Copies MEMO NO. No. Copies No. Copies No. Copies No. Copies PROJECT DATA CONTRACT DATA NAME: NUMBER: LOCATION: DATE: OWNER: DRAWING NO: OTHER: SPECIFICATION SECTION: Name of equipment checked: Name of manufacturer of equipment: 1. The equipment furnished by us has been checked on the job by us. We have reviewed, where applicable, the performance verification information submitted to us by the Contractor. 2. The equipment is properly installed, except for items noted below.* 3. The equipment is operating satisfactorily, except for items noted below.* 4. The written operating and maintenance information, where applicable, has been presented to the Contractor, and been discussed with him in detail. Five (5) copies of all applicable operating and maintenance information and parts lists have been furnished to him. Checked By: Name of Manufacturer's Rep. Name of General Contractor Address and Phone # of Rep. Authorized Sig./Title/Date Sig./Title/Pers. Making Chk. Name of Subcontractor Date Checked Authorized Sig./Title/Date P M W/vd/specs/01650 Tt#200-41125-16005 01650-5 051517 Manufacturer's Representative Notations: Exceptions noted at time of check were: Manufacturer's Representative to note adequacy of related equipment that directly affects operation, performance or function of equipment checked. (No comment presented herein will indicate adequacy of related systems or equipment): P M W/vd/specs/01650 Tt #200-41125-16005 01650-6 051517 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION FORM [] OWNER City of Clearwater No. Copies CERTIFICATE [] ENGINEER: Tetra Tech No. Copies OF COMPLETED [] ARCHITECT: No. Copies DEMONSTRATION [] CONTRACTOR: No. Copies MEMO NO. [] FIELD: No. Copies [] OTHER: No. Copies PROJECT DATA CONTRACT DATA NAME: NUMBER: LOCATION: DATE: OWNER: DRAWING NO: OTHER: SPECIFICATION SECTION: NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: Submit five (5) copies of all information listed below for checking at least one (1) week before scheduled demonstration of the Work. After all information has been approved by the Engineer, give the Owner a Demonstration of Completed Systems as specified and have the Owner sign five (5) copies of this form. After this has been done, a written request for a final inspection of the system shall be made. MEMORANDUM: This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given a Demonstration of Completed Systems on the work covered under this Specification Section. This conference consisted of the system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipment were explained and demonstrated, and the following items were given to the Owner: (a) Owner's copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual for equipment or systems specified under this Section containing approved submittal sheets on all items, including the following: (1) Maintenance information published by manufacturer on equipment items. (2) Printed warranties by manufacturers of equipment items. (3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor. (4) Check -Out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative. (5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items. (6) Explanation of guarantees and warranties on the system. (b) Prints showing actual "As -Built" conditions. PMW/vd/specs/01650 Tt#200-41125-16005 01650-7 051517 (c) A demonstration of the system in operation and of the maintenance procedures which will be required. By: By: (Name of General Contractor) (Authorized Signature, Title and Date (Name of Subcontractor) (Authorized Signature, Title and Date Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Instruction Prints, Demonstration and Instruction in Operation Received: PM W/vd/specs/01650 Tt #200-41125-16005 (Name of Owner) By: (Authorized Signature/Title/Date END OF SECTION 01650-8 051517 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Final Cleaning: Section 01710. 2. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. 3. Warranties and Bonds: Section 01740. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. The Work will not be substantially complete, and Contractor may not request substantial completion inspection unless the following submittals and work is completed: 1. Project Record Documents are complete and have been submitted and reviewed to the requirements of Section 01720. 2. All areas to be used and occupied are safe, operable in automatic and complete. 3. All building occupancy certificates have been issued by the appropriate building permitting agency. 4. All painting, finishes, fencing, cleanup, final grading, grassing, planting, sidewalk construction, and paving shall have been completed and are ready for inspection. 5. All deficiencies noted on inspection reports or non -conformances are corrected or the correction plan approved. B. When the conditions of paragraph 1.02 A. are met the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer: 1. A written notice that he considers the Work, or portion thereof, is substantially complete, and request an inspection. P M W/sc/specs/01700 Tt #200-41125-16005 01700-1 062217 2. A punch -list of items to be corrected. (Uncompleted work which is not related to the safe, effective, efficient use of the Project may be allowed on the punch - list with the Engineer's approval.) C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. D. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefor. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work and send another written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 3. The Engineer will within reasonable time, re -inspect the Work. The Contractor will be liable for reinspection fees as described in Paragraph 1.04, herein. E. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Schedule a walk-through of the facility to include the Owner. Engineer shall determine the completeness of the punch -list and readiness of the facility for occupancy by the Owner. 2. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion with the tentative punch -list of items to be completed or corrected before final inspection. 3. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in Conditions of the Contract, and when the Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. Any incomplete work allowed on a punch -list must be re -inspected upon completion and any deficiencies found will be added to the punch -list. 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. Prior to Contractor's request for a final inspection the following submittals and work must be complete: 1. Project Record Documents must be approved. 2. All spare parts and maintenance materials must be suitably delivered to the Owner per the requirements of the Technical Sections of the Specifications. P M W/sc/specs/01700 Tt #200-41125-16005 01700-2 062217 3. Contractor to submit evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. B. After satisfying the requirements of Paragraph 1.03 A. and when Contractor considers the Work complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Document requirements have been met. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. All punch -list items have been corrected or completed and the Work is ready for final inspection. C. The Engineer will, within reasonable time, make an inspection to verify the status of completion after receipt of such certification. D. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send another written certification to the Engineer that the Work is complete. 3. The Engineer will, within a reasonable amount of time, re -inspect the Work and the Contractor shall be liable for reinspection fees as described in Paragraph 1.04, herein. E. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Contractor may make closeout submittals. 1.04 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should the Engineer perform re -inspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 1. Contractor will compensate the Owner for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor. P M W/sc/specs/01700 Tt #200-41125-16005 01700-3 062217 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranties and Bonds: To requirements of Section 01740. B. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: To requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions. C. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous change orders or written amendments. b. Allowances. c. Unit prices. d. Deductions for uncorrected work. e. Penalties and bonuses. f. Deductions for liquidated damages. g. Deductions for reinspection payments. h. Other adjustments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Agreement between City and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) PM W/sc/specs/01700 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01700-4 062217 SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Execute cleaning, during progress of the Work and at completion of the Work. 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti -pollution laws. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations or personal activities. B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically, or as directed by the Owner, and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. P M W/vd/specs/01710 Tt #200-41125-16005 01710-1 051517 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. The Contractor shall employ construction techniques that minimize the production and distribution of dust. B. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as - needed basis until painting is finished. C. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly -coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Prior to final completion, or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean. P M W/vd/specs/01710 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01710-2 051517 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Maintain at the site for the Owner one (I) record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications of the Contract. 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples. 7. Field test records. 8. Construction photographs. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples: Section 01340. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format with section numbers as provided herein. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible, condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. P M W/vd/specs/01720 Tt#200-41125-16005 01720-1 051517 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer or the Owner. E. As a prerequisite for monthly Progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit the currently updated "Record Documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. Payment may be withheld if record documents are not satisfactorily maintained. 1.03 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the Engineer. 1.04 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" with a rubber stamp having one (1) inch high letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings: Legibly and clearly mark, to scale, each drawing to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. All underground piping with elevations and dimensions. Changes to piping location. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows, etc. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and shop drawings. PMW/vd/specs/01720 Tt #200-41125-16005 01720-2 051517 D. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number of Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. E. Shop Drawings (after final review and approval): Provide six (6) sets of record shop drawings, for each process equipment, piping, electrical system and instrumentation system (see Section 01340). 1.05 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED END OF SECTION PM W/vd/specs/01720 Tt#200-41125-16005 01720-3 051517 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. a. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. General Requirements: Division 1. 2. Equipment: Division 11. 3. Special Construction: Division 13. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. PMW/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 01730-1 051517 B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 14 inches x 17 inches. 5. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of projects and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide identified tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 7. Provide electronic versions of each submittal in PDF format with bookmarks for each section. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality, three D -ring type binders with durable and cleanable white plastic covers. Binders shall be presentation type with clear vinyl covers on front, back and spine. Binders shall include two sheet lifters and two, horizontal inside pockets. 2. Maximum D -ring width: 2 inches. 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. PMW/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 01730-2 051517 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor, manufacturer and installer name, addresses and telephone numbers. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement equipment including name, address and telephone number. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Operation and maintenance information as herein specified. 4. Record shop drawings as submitted and approved with all corrections made for each product. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. P M W/vd/specs/01730 Tt#200-41125-16005 01730-3 051517 b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written test, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instruction of each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit six (6) copies of complete manual in final form and six (6) electronic copies in PDF format with bookmarks for each section. B. Content: for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special manufacturing products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. PM W/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 01730-4 051517 C. Content, for moisture protection and weather -exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit six (6) copies of complete manual in final form and six (6) electronic copies (PDF format with bookmarks for each section). B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Summary of information listed on equipment and motor data plates. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. P M W/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 01730-5 051517 d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. a. As -installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 13. Approved record shop drawings with all corrections made, and a copy of the warranty statement, checkout memo, demonstration test procedures and demonstration test certification. C. Content, for each electric and electronic systems, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories and panelboards. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. P M W/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 01730-6 051517 c. Communications. 3. As installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals within 90 days after Notice to Proceed. B. Submit two (2) copies of completed data in preliminary form no later than 20 days following Engineer's review of the last shop drawing of a product and/or other submittal specified under Section 01340, but no later than delivery of equipment. One (1) copy will be returned with comments to be incorporated into the final copies and the other copy will be retained on-site for use in any early training. P M W/vd/specs/01730 Tt#200-41125-16005 01730-7 051517 C. Submit six (6) copies of approved manual in final form directly to the offices of the Engineer within 10 days after the reviewed copy or last item of the reviewed copy is returned. D. Provide six (6) copies of addenda to the operation and maintenance manuals as applicable and certificates as specified within 30 days after final inspection. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to demonstration test, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. All on-site training shall require both classroom instruction and field instruction. Allow designated Owner's personnel to attend each session for each major system and equipment. A minimum of two (2) days shall be allotted for each session, unless additional time is required in the individual equipment specifications. D. Instructors shall be fully qualified personnel as outlined within the individual equipment specifications. If no specific training specifications are listed with the equipment, the Contractor shall provide the instruction with qualified Contractor personnel. E. The Contractor shall provide a list to the Owner indicating the proposed date, time and instructors that will be present for all training sessions. The Owner will review and approve the training schedule prior to training events and facilitate the classroom training location as needed. F. The instructors shall provide for and prepare lesson scopes and handouts for individuals designated by the Owner that outline the items to be covered. Separate sessions for operation and maintenance instruction shall be provided consecutively. Handouts shall be submitted to the Owner with at least one week's notice prior to the training sessions. G. All instruction sessions shall be recorded with portable DVD recording cameras and DVDs supplied by the Contractor. DVD recording shall be made by the Contractor under the direction of the Owner using DVD compatible recording equipment and shall include audio recording. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) PMW/vd/specs/01730 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01730-8 051517 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Contract Closeout: Section 01700. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: Two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product of work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity or warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, punch sheets for standard three (3) ring binder. P M W/vd/specs/01740 Tt #200-41125-16005 01740-1 051517 a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. C. Binders: Commercial quality, three (3) D -ring type binders with durable and cleanable white plastic covers and maximum D -ring width of two (2) inches. Binders shall be presentation type with clear vinyl covers on front, back, and spine. Binders shall include two sheet lifters and two horizontal inside pockets. 1.04 WARRANTY SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the time of final acceptance by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment warranty for all major equipment. Electrical and which has at least a 1 hp motor or which lists for more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide a one (1) year warranty commencing at the start of the Correction Period, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a two (2) year warranty commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This two (2) year warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one (1) year warranty, starting at the time of Owner's acceptance of the equipment. D. The Owner shall incur no labor or equipment cost during the guarantee period. E. Guarantee shall cover all necessary labor, equipment, materials, and replacement parts resulting from faulty or inadequate equipment design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and materials, leakage, breakage or other failure of all equipment and components furnished by the manufacturer or the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) P M W/vd/specs/01740 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 01740-2 051517 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02050 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the removal of the existing sulfuric acid storage and pumping systems at WTP No. 1 as shown in the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. This section provides for the complete or partial removal and disposal of specified existing structures, foundations, slabs, piping mechanical, electrical, existing (to be abandoned) piping and miscellaneous appurtenances encountered during demolition operations. 3. The sequence of demolition of the existing structures will be in accordance with the approved Demolition and Removal Plan as specified in Paragraph 1.06 of this Section. The Contractor is solely responsible for the demolition sequencing of the work. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for: a. Approximate locations and dimensions of piping and structures are shown in the Contract Drawings demolition plans. ' b. All piping and equipment to be demolished associated with the project shall be demolished and removed according to this Specification. 1 1 1 1 1 1 c. Capping of all subsurface water piping as referenced in the Contract Drawings demolition plan. d. Termination and plugging of all subsurface water piping as referenced in the Contract Drawings demolition plans. e. Termination of all electric in accordance with local codes and NEC. f. Final grading and site restoration. g. Disposal of non -salvageable and excess unacceptable materials as specified below. h. All concrete slabs shall be removed as referenced in the Contract Drawings. J R W/vd/s pecs/s-1/02050 Tt#200-41125-16005 02050-1 051517 5. The Contractor shall examine the various drawings regarding the proposed site, visit the proposed site and determine for himself the extent of the work, the extent of the work affected therein and all conditions under which he is required to perform the various operations. 1.02 PERMITS AND NOTICES A. Permits and Licenses: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and licenses before performing the work and shall furnish a copy of same to the Engineer prior to commencing work. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the permits. B. Notices: If applicable, Contractor shall issue written notices of planned demolition to companies or local authorities owning utility conduit, wires or pipes running to or through the project site. Copies of said notices shall be submitted to the Engineer. C. Utility Services: If applicable, Contractor shall notify utility companies or local authorities furnishing gas, water, electrical, telephone or sewer service to remove equipment owned by them in structures to be demolished and to remove, disconnect, cap or plug their services prior to facilities demolition. D. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and shall submit all necessary notices as related to the demolition of asbestos and lead-based paint as required for performance of work. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth in such permits. 1.03 CONDITIONS OR STRUCTURES A. The Owner and the Engineer assume no responsibility for the actual condition of the structures to be demolished or modified. B. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, variation within the structure may occur prior to the start of demolition work. 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. The Standard Building Codes shall control demolition, modification or alteration of the existing buildings or structures. B. No blasting shall be done on site. The Contractor shall not bring or store any explosives on site. J R W/vd/s pecs/s-1/02050 Tt #200-41125-16005 02050-2 051517 1.05 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Salvageable material shall become the property of the Owner, if the Owner requests any specific item. The Contractor shall dismantle all materials to such a size that it can be readily handled, and deliver any of this salvageable material requested by the Owner to a storage area designated by the Owner. B. The following type of materials are examples of what the Owner desires to keep: 1. Instrumentation. 2. Equipment. 3. Miscellaneous metals and other materials at the discretion of the Owner. C. Any materials that the owner rejects shall become the Contractor's property and must be removed from the site. D. Concrete, concrete block and non -salvageable bricks shall be hauled to a waste disposal site by the Contractor. E. All other material shall be hauled to a waste disposal site by the Contractor. F. The storage, or sale, of removed items on the site will not be allowed. G. The Contractor is responsible for the dewatering of pipelines. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2) copies of the proposed demolition and removal plan for the structures and modifications as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein prior to the start of work. Include in the schedule the coordination of shutoff, capping and continuation of utility service as required. The demolition and removal plan shall include as a minimum, the following: 1. A detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to insure the uninterrupted progress of the Owner's operations, and the expeditious completion of the Contractor's work. 2. Evidence (by signature) of approval of the Owner's Plant Supervisor and the Owner's Inspector of the work plan. B. Before commencing demolition work, all modifications necessary to bypass the affected structure will be completed. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner's personnel to determine the locations of the affected valves and fittings. J R W/vd/s pecs/s-1/02050 Tt #200-41125-16005 02050-3 051517 1.07 TRAFFIC AND ACCESS A. Conduct demolition and modification operation, and the removal of equipment and debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets or walks both on-site and off-site and to ensure minimum interference with occupied or used facilities. B. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to the existing site. C. Do not close or obstruct streets or walks without permission from the Owner and Engineer. Provide alternate traffic routes around closed or obstructed access ways. 1.08 DAMAGE A. Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities or structures within the project site by demolition operations and at no cost to the Owner. 1.09 UTILITIES A. Maintain existing utilities to remain in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized by the Owner and the Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner to shut off utilities serving structures of the existing facilities as required by demolition operations. D. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all necessary arrangements and for performing any necessary work involved in connection with the discontinuance or interruption of all public and private utilities or services under this jurisdiction of utility companies. E. All utilities being abandoned shall be disconnected and terminated at the service mains in conformance with the requirement of the utility companies or the municipality owning or controlling them. 1.10 POLLUTION CONTROL A. For pollution control, use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods as necessary to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest level of air pollution practical for the conditions or work. Comply with the governing regulations. J R W/vd/specs/s-1/02050 Tt #200-41125-16005 02050-4 051517 B. Clean structures and improvements of all dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations as directed by the Engineer. Return areas to conditions existing prior to the start of work. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL A. Protect all existing materials and equipment either in operation or to be salvaged or reused, from damage. B. Cap or plug all lines to be abandoned. Place covers and label all junction boxes, conduits, and wire as abandoned. C. Leave all exposed ends of all pipe and conduit or junction boxes covered and safe. PART 2 — MATERIALS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. The sequence of demolition of the existing structures will be in accordance with the approved Demolition and Removal Plan as specified in Paragraph 1.06 of this Section. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND APPURTENANCES A. Existing equipment, piping, buried and non -buried valving, and appurtenances shall be removed or abandoned in-place as shown or dictated or the Drawings, and/or specified herein. B. All equipment piping and appurtenances shall be cleaned, flushed, and drained. Equipment to be retained by the Owner as specified in Paragraph 1.05 above shall be dismantled sufficiently to permit thorough cleaning and draining. All valves shall be left open. All abandoned piping shall be capped and sleeves and openings remaining after removal of the existing equipment, piping, and appurtenances shall be plugged and sealed as shown on the Drawings, and/or specified herein. END OF SECTION J R W/vd/s Pecs/s-1/02050 Tt #200-41125-16005 02050-5 051517 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of dewatering, excavating, trenching, sheeting/shoring, grading, backfilling, and compacting those soil materials required for the construction of the structures, piping, ditches, utility structures and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Solid Sodding: Section 02822. C. Definitions: 1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material. 2. Optimum Moisture Content: The optimum moisture content shall be determined by ASTM D 1557 specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve. 3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which requires the use of special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery. 4. Suitable: Suitable materials for fills shall be classified as A-1, A-3 or A-2-4 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145 and shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt or muck. Not more than 10 percent (%) by weight of fill material shall pass the No. 200 Sieve. The Contractor shall furnish all additional fill material required. 5. Unsuitable: Unsuitable materials are classified as A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, A-7, and A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145. D. Plan for Earthwork: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to JRW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt#200-41125-16005 02220-1 051517 be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract according to the General Conditions. 2. Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed operations to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall reflect the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. Prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table conditions will be allowed. E. Trench Safety Act: The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Chapter 90-96, CS/CB 2626, laws of Florida). The Contractor shall acknowledge that included in various items of his bid proposal and in the total bid price are costs for complying with the provisions of the Act. Additionally, the Contractor is required to break out the costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUEST IN THIS SECTION SHALL RESULT IN THE BID BEING DECLARED NONRESPONSIVE. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Act shall result in a per item penalty of $1,000 per day that the work is out of compliance. F. Contractor shall locate and protect all existing piping, conduit, structures, and facilities within the area of excavation as required by Section 01005. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. All publications and standard specifications referred to herein are the latest or current issue of that publication or specification as of the specification date. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The requirements for testing and laboratory services is specified in Section 01410: Testing and Testing Laboratory Services. 1.04 FEDERAL AND STATE REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All trench excavations which exceed 4 feet in depth shall comply with the applicable trench safety standards as stated in the OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR S. 1926.650 Subpart P as regulated and administered by the Florida Department of Labor and Employment Security as the "Florida Trench Safety Act." J RW/a b/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-2 051517 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions encountered during construction warrant a change in the footing elevation, or in the depth of removal of unsuitable material from that indicated in the soils report, an adjustment will be made in the contract price, as provided in the General and Special Conditions. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Pre -Construction Survey: 1. Prior to commencing excavation, backfill or dewatering, the Engineer and Contractor shall jointly conduct a survey of those existing structures which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to settlement or distress resulting from excavation or dewatering operations. 2. The Contractor shall monitor the structures surveyed to ascertain evidence of settlement or distress. If settlement or distress becomes evident the Contractor shall be required to repair the structures to the previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Costs shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering, excavation, bedding, filling, compaction and backfilling for the various portions of the work. Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and safety of the methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. All fill material from on and off-site sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2. All fill material shall be unfrozen and free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material. Excess or unsuitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor. B. Common Fill Material: 1. Common fill shall be sand not containing stones, rock, concrete or other rubble larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall have physical properties which allow it to be easily spread and compacted. J R W/a b/s pecs/s-1/022 20 Tt#200-41125-16005 02220-3 051517 2. The Contractor shall utilize as much excavated material as possible for reuse in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications or as directed by the Engineer. 3. The Engineer shall direct the Contractor on the type of material allowed in certain sections of the earthwork operations. C. Structural Fill: Structural fill shall be well graded sand to gravelly sand having the following gradation: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight 1- inch 100 No. 4 75-100 No. 40 15-80 No. 100 0-30 No. 200 0-10 D. Class I Soils1 : Manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 to 1-1/2 inches (6 to 40 mm) in size, including materials having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral, crushed slag, cinders, or crushed shells. Sieve analysis for crushed stone is given below separately. 1. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam or organic matter, conforming with ASTM C33 stone size No. 89 and with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 E. Class II Soi152 : Percent Passing By Weight 100 90-100 20-55 5-30 0-10 0-5 1. GW: Well -graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 2. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 1 Soils defined as Class I soils are not defined in ASTM D2487. 2 In accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 percent pass No. 200 sieve. JRW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-4 051517 3. SW: Well -graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 4. SP: Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. F. Coarse Sand: Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight No. 10 100 No. 20 0-30 No. 40 0-5 G. Other Material: All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clearing and Grubbing: 1. Strip and dispose of topsoil off-site, unless otherwise directed to stockpile the material by the Engineer 3.02 PROTECTION A. Sheeting and Bracing: 1. The Contractor may, at his option, furnish steel sheeting and bracing to support the sides of excavations, to prevent movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent structures, and to protect workers from hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel sheet piling. If the Owner is of the opinion that sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports be installed at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids beside the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly J RW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-5 051517 compacted to fill a void, lean concrete shall be used as backfill at no additional expense to the Owner. 2. The Contractor shall construct sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless deemed otherwise for his method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb. Sheeting and bracing shall withstand all pressure to which the structure or trench will be subjected. Any deformation shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense so as to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. 3. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for structures, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall conform with the design, and certification shall be provided by the Professional Structural Engineer. 4. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to existing structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if necessary, take all precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of sheeting installation. 5. Owner may direct the Contractor in writing to leave in place sheeting at any time, during the progress of the work for the purpose of preventing injury to structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. 6. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to endanger the construction, or other structures, utilities, or property. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by ramming with tools especially adapted for that purpose, or otherwise directed by the Owner. 7. The right of the Owner to order sheeting and bracing left in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on his part to issue such orders, and his failure to exercise his right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground. B. Pumping and Drainage: 1. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove all water entering excavations, and shall keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition until the fills, structures or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels as stipulated in Section 02140. The Contractor shall engage a Professional J R W/a b/s pecs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-6 051517 Geotechnical Engineer registered in the State of Florida, to design the dewatering systems for all structures. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a plan for dewatering systems and recharge systems prior to commencing work. The installed dewatering system shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan, and certification of this shall be provided by the Professional Geotechnical Engineer. The Professional Geotechnical Engineer shall be required to monitor the performance of the dewatering systems during the progress of the work and require such modifications as may be required to assure that the systems are performing satisfactorily. 2. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the bottom of the excavation and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures. Well or sump installations shall be constructed with proper sand filters to prevent intermixing of finer grained soil from the surrounding ground. 3. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped from the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. 4. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent buoyant uplift of any structure during construction. 5. The conveying of dewatered liquids in open ditches or trenches will not be allowed. Permission to use any storm sewers, or drains, for water disposal purposes shall be obtained from the authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and costs for such use shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and he shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean as originally found. Any damage to facilities shall be repaired or restored as directed by the Owner or the authority having jurisdiction, at no cost to the Owner. 6. Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure of this system. 7. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is no longer required; the material and equipment constituting the system, shall be removed by the Contractor. 8. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of fuel, oil, etc. in order to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. J RW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-7 051517 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Excavating for Structures and Utilities: 1. Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended footings. 2. Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, for installing the pipelines, and for all other work required. a. Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation two (2) feet lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the backfill material. b. Excavation for structures constructed or cast -in-place in dewatered or dry excavations shall be carried down to the 2 -feet below the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such that a dry evacuation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete. 3. Immediately document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new subsurface installations, and utilities encountered during the course of construction. 4. Excavation equipment operators and other concerned parties shall be familiar with subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and should anticipate the encounter of unknown obstructions during the course of the work. 5. Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated. 6. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of inadequate dewatering or other construction methods, shall be undercut a minimum of 12" and replaced with FDOT No. 57 Stone as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 7. The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any structure or pipe. Excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor in a legal manner. J R W/a b/s pecs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-8 051517 8. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered by placement. 9. All structure and pipe locations and elevations as required herein must be permanently documented by the Contractor, on the Record Drawings prior to the Engineer's approval of the Application for Payment for that work. 3.04 DRAINAGE A. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering excavations, and keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition. The dewatering method used shall prevent disturbance of earth below grade. B. All water pumped or drained from the excavated area shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without undue interference with other work, without damage to surrounding property, and in accordance with pertinent rules and regulations. C. No construction, including pipe laying, shall be allowed in water. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 12 inches below excavation. No water shall be allowed to come into contact with masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed. The Contractor shall constantly guard against damage due to water and take full responsibility for all damage resulting from his failure to do so. D. The Contractor will be required at his expense to excavate below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Owner determines that adequate drainage has not been provided. 3.05 UNDERCUT A. If the bottom of any excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because of Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due the Contractor's excavation methods, he shall refill to normal grade with fill at his own cost. Fill material and compaction method shall be as directed by the Engineer. 3.06 STABILIZATION A. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact. B. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which becomes mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel. Not more than 1/2 inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe bedding JRW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-9 051517 material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings. C. All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor. 3.07 FILL AND COMPACTION A. Materials: 1. To the maximum extent available, excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavation shall be used for the construction of fills and embankments. 2. Materials used as backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 2 inches in their greatest dimension; brush, stumps, Togs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious materials; and must be acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials be in any backfill, fill or embankment. B. Placement and Compaction: 1. Backfill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread and leveled before compaction. 2. Each layer of material being compacted shall have the best practicable uniform moisture content to ensure satisfactory compaction. The Contractor will be required to add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work the material in each layer to ensure uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or other method acceptable to the Engineer to 95 percent of relative density at optimum moisture content as determined by Modified Proctor Method, ASTM D1557 (latest edition). 3. Whenever a trench passes through a backfill or embankment, material shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. C. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Deviation from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. Backfill operation shall be performed to comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not create a nuisance or safety hazard. 1 R W/a b/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-10 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans or ordered by the Owner. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not more than 8 inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far as practicable, traffic over the work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as to cover the maximum surface area of each layer. F. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other than those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the Engineer. Approval will be considered only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to identify the material used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the method of backfill requested. The Engineer's approval will be in writing. G. Foundation Preparation 1. The existing ground beneath proposed tankage, building foundations and equipment base slabs and slabs on grade shall be removed and the area proof - rolled. Proof -rolling should consist of at least 10 passes of a self-propelled vibratory roller that impacts a dynamic force of not Tess than 40,000 pounds per drum to the soils. To minimize the effects of compaction induced vibrations on adjacent existing structures the compaction operation should be limited to a distance no closer than 25 -feet from the existing structures. Each pass should overlap the preceding pass by 30 percent to insure complete coverage. Backfilled areas shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557 (latest edition) for a depth of not less than 2 -feet below the bottom of the foundations or concrete slabs. Any unsuitable foundation material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. 2. Slabs On Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be removed, backfilled, and compacted to the required grade. The top 2 -feet of concrete slab subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, (latest edition). 3.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION (SEE DRAWINGS FOR DETAIL) A. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. Four hundred (400) feet shall be the maximum length of open trench on any line under construction. All trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface. 1. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover: The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint deflection used in J R W/a b/specs/s-1/02 220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-11 051517 connection therewith shall be in conformity with requirements of the section covering installation of pipe. 2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the contract drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of 42 inches where in paved or graded streets where surface grades are definitely established and 36 inches in other locations. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. B. Limiting Trench Widths: 1. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which will provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, minimum permissible sidewall clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall, expressed in inches, shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Size Sidewall Clearance 60 24 54 21 48 19 36 or smaller 12 2. Stipulated minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum dear distances which will be required. 3. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be permitted only in areas where the increased trench width will not interface with surface features or encroach on right-of-way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one foot above the top of the pipe. C. Mechanical Excavation: 1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, and other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used. 2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of the type, design, and construction, and shall be so operated, that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and that trench alignment is such J R W/a b/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-12 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 that pipe when accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted. D. Pavement Cutting: 1. Cuts in concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and asphalt base pavements shall be no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be started with an asphalt or concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove for the full depth of pavement along each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures. 2. Asphalt pavement and asphalt base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench. 3. Pavement removed for connections to existing lines or structures shall not be greater than necessary for the installation as determined by the Engineer. E. Artificial Foundations in Trenches: Whenever so ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate to such depth below grade as the Engineer may direct and the trench bottom shall be brought to grade with such material as the Engineer may order installed. All piling, concrete, or other foundations made necessary by unstable soil shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Compensation for extra excavation and piling, concrete, or other foundations, except where provided by contract unit prices, shall be made in accordance with the contract provisions for extra work. F. Bell Holes: Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular embedment when the pipe is jointed. 3.09 TESTS A. Testing is specified in Section 01410: Testing and Testing Laboratory Services. 3.10 DRAINAGE A. Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor. J R W/a b/s pecs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-13 051517 Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is completed and the original sections, grades, and contours of ditches or water courses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. 3.11 FINAL GRADING A. After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling completed and settled, all areas on the site of the work which are to be graded shall be brought to grade with the tolerance of +/- 0.1 feet at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours where seeding or sodding is not required or, where sodding is required within three (3) inches of finished grade. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. All surfaces shall be graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise shown, a slope of at least one percent shall be provided. B. After grading and where seeding is required, topsoil shall be evenly spread to a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Topsoil shall be from an Engineer approved source and shall be clear of trash, debris and surface vegetation more than six (6) inches in height. C. Grading and surfacing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.12 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Insofar as needed, suitable excavated materials shall be used in fills and embankments shown on the Drawings. All suitable excess excavated material shall be placed at an on- site stockpile area as directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall segregate different types of excavated materials (i.e. sands, clayey sands) as possible in the stockpile area. All unsuitable materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor offsite in a legal manner. C. The Contractor shall slope and compact the stockpile with a light roller type vehicle to maintain stability. D. The Contractor shall maintain proper soil and erosion control measures. 3.13 SETTLEMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and embankments which may occur within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions. B. The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement within 30 days after notice from the Engineer or Owner. J RW/ab/specs/s-1/02220 Tt #200-41125-16005 02220-14 051517 TABLE 02220-A COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE FOR STRUCTURES Area Beneath structures, foundations, slabs, and pavements. (minimum 5 -foot depth below concrete foundation) Around structures, foundations and slabs (minimum 5 -foot spacing) From cleared existing surface to subgrade for paved and gravel roadway surfaces. Disturbed area requiring solid sodding. Material Structural Fill (Para. 2.01 C) Structural Fill (para. 2.01 C) Common Fill (Para. 2.01 B) Topsoil END OF SECTION Compaction 8 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Fill should not be placed over any in-place soils until those layers have been compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density. 8 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Use light rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors. 12 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified proctor maximum dry density. See Section 02822. J R W/vd/specs/s-1/02200-A Tt #200-41125-16005 02200-A-1 051517 SECTION 02822 SOLID SODDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to prepare lawn bed and install sodding as specified. B. Areas to receive sodded grass lawns shall be as follows: 1. All areas disturbed by the CONTRACTOR's operation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide technical data as provided in Section 01340 for shop drawings on all materials or installation procedures required under this Section. B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program. C. Submit as provided in Section 01720 certifications required for all sodding supplied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOAM A. Loam (topsoil) shall be fertile, natural soil, typical of the locality, free from large stones, roots, sticks, peat, weeds and sod and obtained from naturally well drained areas. It shall not be excessively acidic or alkaline nor contain toxic material harmful to plant growth. Topsoil stockpiled under other Sections of this Division may be used, but the CONTRACTOR shall furnish additional loam at his own expense, if required. 2.02 SOIL CONDITIONERS A. Fertilizer: 1. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State and Federal fertilizer laws. 2. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.02.A and approved by the ENGINEER. For JR W/vd/specs/s-1/02822 Tt #200-41125-16005 02822-1 051517 the purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3% water - insoluble nitrogen. 3. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to the ENGINEER. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. B. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20 available phosphoric acid. C. Lime shall be ground limestone. 2.03 SOD A. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia, Floratam or of like kind where existing sod is removed or disturbed and replaced by CONTRACTOR's operation. Sod shall have firm texture, a compacted growth and good root development, as approved. B. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board specifications, absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind. C. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform dimensions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAWN BED PREPARATION A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris, and ground brought to an even grade as approved. B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 inch depth. C. Loam shall be placed to a minimum depth of 4 inches and shall be lightly compacted. No loam shall be spread in water. D. Lime shall be applied at a rate necessary to achieve a pH of 6 to 7. JRW/vd/specs/s-1/02822 Tt #200-41125-16005 02822-2 051517 E. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1,000 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross-disced into a depth of 4-6 inches. F. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other foreign matter over I -inch in diameter or dimension. The surface shall conform to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water -retaining depressions, the soil friable and of uniformly firm texture. 3.02 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION A. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the sod panels shall at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and moisture. B. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope and with the joints offset relative to upper and lower panels. Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered. C. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub areas. Top dressing with approved, clean weed free sand may be required at no additional cost to the OWNER if deemed necessary by the ENGINEER. D. All areas disturbed by CONTRACTOR's operations within the utility easements, temporary construction easements, and Osceola County Rights -of -Way shall be sodded in accordance with Osceola County Standards. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall produce a dense, well established lawn. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the repair and resodding of all eroded or bare spots until project acceptance. Repair sodding shall be accomplished as in the original work except that fertilizing may be omitted. Sufficient watering shall be done by the CONTRACTOR to maintain adequate moisture for optimum development of the lawn areas. Sodded areas shall receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week. 3.04 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and lawn areas outside the designated areas damaged by CONTRACTOR's operations shall be repaired at once by proper sod bed preparation, fertilizing and resodding, in accordance with these Specifications. J R W/vd/s pecs/s-1/02822 Tt#200-41125-16005 02822-3 051517 3.05 TIMING A. Restoration activities shall begin as soon as possible following trench backfill and compaction but no later than three (3) days after completion of backfill and compaction. J RW/vd/specs/s-1/02822 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 02822-4 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 3 1 1 1 CONCRETE 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Chemical Containment Walls. 2. Equipment Pads. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast -furnace slag; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Water/cement ratio (total gallons of water per cubic yard). 3. Brand, type, and quantity of cement. 4. Type and quantity of aggregates. 5. Type and quantity of admixtures. 6. Type, composition, and quantity of fly ash, slag (GGBFS), or silica fume. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt#200-41125-16005 03300-1 062617 7. Unit weight (wet density). 8. Composition strength based on 28 -day compression test. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturer testing agency. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form -release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Joint -filler strips. 9. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. D. Submit laboratory test reports for concrete mix design, aggregates (particularly deleterious materials in coarse aggregate) and fly ash, slag (GGBFS) 4 weeks before scheduled pouring. E. Field quality -control reports. 1. Submit written reports to Engineer documenting testing and inspection results. 2. Submit mill test reports on reinforcement. 3. Submit materials certificates in lieu of laboratory test reports on other materials. Manufacturer and Contractor shall sign material certificates certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. Submit certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-2 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI -certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI -certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. S1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 1 1 A. Protect adjacent finish materials against spatter during concrete placement. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-3 062617 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B -B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. C. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. D. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn. C. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-4 062617 precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except use Type III where applications require high -early -strength or Type II where required by Engineer for corrosive environments. 2. Use one brand of cement throughout Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F (corrosive environments) with loss on ignition not more than 6 percent. C. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989. D. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. F. Potable Water Structures: For surfaces in contact with potable water, use only materials approved by Department of Public Health of the state that has jurisdiction. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride thyocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-5 062617 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. Water Reducing, Nonchloride Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 6. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. 1. BASF Construction Chemical. 2. ChemMasters, Inc. 3. Dayton Superior. 4. Euclid Chemical Company. 5. Kaufman Products, Inc. 6. L&M Construction Chemical. 7. Lambert Corporation. 8. Metalcrete Industries. 9. Nox-Crete Products Group. 10. Sika Corporation. 11. SpecChem. 12. Symons by Dayton Superior. 13. TK Products Unitex by Dayton Superior. 14. Vexcon Chemicals Inc. 15. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self -expanding cork. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-6 062617 2.08 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.09 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixes for each concrete class and strength by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method is used, use independent testing facilities acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. Testing facility shall not be identical to that used for field quality control testing. B. Fly ash shall be used to partially supplant cement content in Class A concrete, unless noted otherwise. Replacement quantity of cement content by weight shall be not less than 15 percent for Class A concrete. C. For concrete Class A, concrete mix design with fly ash shall be maximum 30 percent of cement content by weight, of the total weight of cementitious materials. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-7 062617 D. Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) shall only be permitted for mass concrete placement and as approved by Engineer. Replacement quantity of cement content weight shall not be less than 35 percent or more than 50 percent. E. Coarse aggregate shall be 1-1/2" top size. F. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete for following classes and properties: 1. Locations for concrete classes are as follows: a. Class A Structural concrete (slabs, walls, columns, beams, equipment bases, and slab toppings 2 inches or greater in thickness). Note: High range water -reducing admixture shall be used for all concrete walls 2. Properties for concrete classes are as follows: Concrete Class A 28 -Day* Compressive Strength (f c), psi 4,000 I Cement Content per cubic yard of concrete, sacks minimum ** 6 Water/Cement Ratio by weight, max. 0.44 Air Content, percent by volume 5+1 Slump at point of place- ment, inches. WR*** 2-4 M R W R 4-6 HRWR**** 6-8 Monofilament Polypropylene, Type F1 NA ** *** 7 -day compressive strength compressive furnace slag. for high -early -strength concrete. 56 -day strength for mass concrete with ground granulated blast For concrete with fly ash, values are total of cement plus fly ash. Slump prior to the addition of mid-range or high -range water reducers. High range water -reducing admixture shall be used for all concrete walls. 3. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes: Mix designs may be adjusted when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, when approved by Engineer, at no additional cost to Owner. Submit laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results to Engineer before using in work. 4. Admixtures: a. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete for placement and workability. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt#200-41125-16005 03300-8 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). c. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in placed concrete having total air content specified. 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. B. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction Toads that might be applied, until structure can support such Toads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth -formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent Toss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-9 062617 F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. Vertical Forms not supporting concrete weight may be removed when concrete has sufficiently set to resist damage from removal operation. B. Time Periods: Forms remain in place as shown in table below. If form removal occurs before time shown in the table, apply curing procedures previously specified. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-10 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minimum Time Forms are to Remain in Place: * Air temperature near form. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 111 3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Field bending of reinforcement: 1. Field bending of plain reinforcement shall be performed using an approved and appropriate sized portable hydraulic device that makes ACI -approved radius bends. No other field bending method shall be permitted. 2. No field bending shall be permitted for epoxy coated reinforcement. 3.05 JOINTS F. Provide isolation joints in slabs -on -ground at points of contact between slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces of column pedestals, foundation walls, and grade beams. G. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-11 062617 Average Air Temperature* During Period Part of Structure 40 - 50 degrees F >50 degrees F Walls, columns and sides of beam (hours) 72 24 * Air temperature near form. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 111 3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Field bending of reinforcement: 1. Field bending of plain reinforcement shall be performed using an approved and appropriate sized portable hydraulic device that makes ACI -approved radius bends. No other field bending method shall be permitted. 2. No field bending shall be permitted for epoxy coated reinforcement. 3.05 JOINTS F. Provide isolation joints in slabs -on -ground at points of contact between slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces of column pedestals, foundation walls, and grade beams. G. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-11 062617 3.06 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Set and build into Work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that are attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of attachment items. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain set elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support screed strips by use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting screeds. C. Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless they are effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum -concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. 1. 3.07 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean re -used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -coating compounds before placing reinforcement. C. Thin form -coating compounds only with acceptable thinning agents, quantity, and under conditions of form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete is placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coat steel forms with non -staining, rust -preventive form oil to protect against rusting. Rust -stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and other embedded or cast -in items. 1. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work. 2. Cooperate with other trades in setting their work. 3. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. ATC/a b/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-12 062617 4. Apply temporary protective covering to lower 2 feet of finished walls where adjacent floor slabs are poured to guard against spattering during slab placement. B. Comply with ACI 304R and as specified in this Section. C. Discharge Concrete at Site within 1-1/2 hours after cement is added to water or aggregates. When air temperature exceeds 85 degrees F, the discharge time shall be less than 45 minutes. The 45 -minute requirement may be waived with the use of a water reducing, retarding admixture and approval of Engineer. D. Provide trip ticket in duplicate for each ready -mixed concrete load delivered, stating truck number, Project name, Contractor and producer, batching time, total yards of concrete and material contained therein. Show ticket to Engineer upon request. Fill in concrete discharge time and turn over to Engineer trip ticket copies at end of each day. E. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers so that no concrete is placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical to its final location to avoid segregation. F. When depositing by chute, provide equipment of size and design to ensure continuously flowing concrete. Provide discharge end of chute with baffle plate to prevent segregation. Position chute so that concrete need not flow more than 5 feet horizontally. G. Do not drop concrete from chute end distances greater than 3 times the deposited layer thickness, nor more than 5 feet. Where distance from chute end to surface of concrete exceeds these distances, use spout and maintain lower end as near to deposit surface as practical. When operations are intermittent, discharge chutes into hoppers. H. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement involves several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Fill bottom of wall space with 2 to 4 inches of cement slurry immediately before depositing concrete in walls. Use cement slurry composed of 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts fine aggregate, and sufficient water (but not to exceed 0.45 parts) for 7 -inch slump mixture. 2. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for concrete consolidation in accordance with ACI recommended practices. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible machine effectiveness. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into concrete layers that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration to time necessary to ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-13 062617 consolidate concrete and complete reinforcement embedment and other embedded items without causing mix segregation. Keep vibrators away from waterstops to prevent displacement. I. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in continuous operations between construction joints until panel or section placement is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces before beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 4. Moisten soil when depositing concrete directly on granular soil. J. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. K. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-14 062617 L. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.09 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed -to -view, and slab surfaces covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power -driven trowels. Begin last troweling when surface produces ringing sound when trowel moves over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. 2. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of floor flatness (FF) of 20 and floor levelness (FL) of 17 in accordance with ASTM E 1155. 3. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-15 062617 B. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as noted. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required finish with Engineer before application. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches ((100 mm)) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor -bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-16 062617 B. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Maintain curing as follows: 1. All concrete unless otherwise noted: 7 days. 2. High -early -strength concrete: 3 days. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete for water -retaining structures by moist curing. Cure concrete for other structures by curing compound, moist curing, moisture -retaining cover curing, or combinations thereof. D. Provide Moist Curing by following methods: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Continuous water -fog spray. 3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to cover concrete surfaces and edges, with 4 inches lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide Moisture -Retaining Cover Curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practical width with sides and ends lapped 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. 2. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Provide Curing Compound as follows: 1. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as last finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain coating continuity and repair damage during curing period. 2. Transparent curing compound shall be used for structural concrete (Class A concrete). White curing compound shall be used for exterior pavements (Class P concrete) and sidewalks (Class B concrete). 3. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces that are covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (ceramic or quarry tile, glue -down carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-17 062617 G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including beam undersides, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. If form removal occurs before curing period is up, continue curing by methods specified above as applicable. H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mi dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form - tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-18 062617 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-19 062617 F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Provide qualified personnel and employ testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to do tests and to submit test reports. E. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump and air -content tests to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143, one each time compression test specimens are made; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, one each time compression test specimens made. 3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below, and when 80 degrees F and above; and each time compression test specimens are made. 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31, four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test set, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens. 5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39, one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cubic yards plus additional set for each 20 cubic yards over and above first 50 cubic yards of each concrete class placed in 1 day; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-20 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. F. Test Results: Report test results in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Compressive strength test reports shall contain Project identification name and number, concrete placement date, concrete testing service name, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and break type for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. G. Acceptance: Concrete strength shall be considered satisfactory if averages of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified 28 -day compressive strength (f'c), and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. H. Failure to Meet Requirements: 1. Should 7 -day compressive strengths shown by test specimens fall below 65 percent of required 28 -day strength (f'c), Engineer will have the right to require changes in proportions for remaining Work. Furthermore, Engineer will have the right to require additional curing, as specified in this Section, on those portions or structures represented by failed test specimens. 2. Should 28 -day compressive strengths (f'c) test results fail to meet required strength, core -boring tests conforming to ASTM Standard C 42 shall be made at Contractor's expense within 60 days of that concrete placement. I. At locations where concrete quality is deemed questionable by Engineer, core -boring tests shall also be made at Contractor's expense. J. Concrete is acceptable if average strength of 3 cores is at least 85 percent and no single core is less than 75 percent of required minimum allowable 28 -day compressive strengths (f'c). If core -boring test results fail to meet strength requirements, Engineer will have right to require strengthening or replacing those portions of structures which failed to develop specified strength. K. Provide additional curing when ordered by Engineer because of failure to meet requirements. It shall be done at Contractor's expense, and no claim for extra compensation for additional curing will be allowed. Additional curing shall extend period of protection. Additional curing is limited to 60 days. L. Additional Tests: Testing service shall make additional in-place concrete tests when test results suggest specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other approved methods. Contractor shall pay for additional tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION ATC/ab/specs/03300 Tt #200-41125-16005 03300-21 062617 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 5 METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Field -installed shear connectors. 3. Grout. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.04 COORDINATION B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt#200-41125-16005 05120-1 051517 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical, high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. C. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct -tension indicators. 3. Tension -control, high-strength, bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. D. Survey of existing conditions. E. Source quality -control reports. F. Field quality -control and special inspection reports. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172). B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-2 051517 C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand Toads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored -load level. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained, where shown. ATC/a b/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-3 051517 2.02 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W -Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles, S -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: as indicated. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. G. Guard Posts: Fabricate guard posts from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap posts with 1/4- inchdminimum thickness steel base plate. See Standard Detail on Drawings. 2.03 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy -hex carbon - steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. Zinc -Coated High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot -dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 2. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible -washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy -coated finish. 3. Location: exterior applications or where supporting members are galvanized. C. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy -hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy - hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-4 051517 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Location: Interior applications or where supporting members are painted. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 2.04 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-5 051517 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop -bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop -welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. ATC/a b/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-6 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete -bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-7 051517 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-8 051517 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. END OF SECTION ATC/ab/specs/05120 Tt #200-41125-16005 05120-9 051517 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09905 PIPING, VALVE, AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of providing an identification system for piping systems and related equipment. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples: Section 01340. 2. High Performance Paints and Coatings: Section 09961. 3. Equipment: Division 11. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: ANSI Standard A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, and other pertinent data in accordance with Section 01340. B. Schedules: 1. Provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, use, and general location. 2. Provide a complete list of materials to be furnished and surfaces on which they will be used. C. Samples: 1. Provide a sample of each type valve tag supplied. 2. Provide a sample of each type of identification tape supplied. 3. Provide manufacturer's color charts for color selection by Engineer. JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-1 051517 1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDING A. Delivery of Materials: Except for locally mixed custom colors, deliver sealed containers with labels legible and intact. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store only acceptable project materials on project site. 2. Store in suitable location. 3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. 2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not to be painted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Aboveground piping shall be identified by self-adhesive pipe markers equal to those manufactured by W. H. Brady Company or equal. 1. Markers shall be of wording and color as identified herein. 2. Lettering shall be: a. 2 1/4 -inches high for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b. 1 1/8 -inches high for pipes Tess than 3 inches diameter. 3. Flow arrows shall be: JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-2 051517 a. 2 1/4 -inches by 6 inches for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b. 1 1/8 -inches by 3 inches for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. C. Buried piping shall be identified by identification tape installed over the centerline of the pipelines. 1. Identification Tape for Steel or Iron Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of inert polyethylene film so as to be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, or other destructive agents found in soil, and shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mils. Tape width shall be 6 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be Terra Tape Standard 250, or approved equal. 2. Identification Tape for Plastic or Non -Magnetic Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of reinforced polyethylene film with a minimum overall thickness of 4 mils and shall have a 0.35 mil thick magnetic metallic foil core. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, and other destructive agents found in soil. Tape width shall be 3 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be TerraTape Sentry Line 1350, or approved equal. 3. Tape background colors and imprints shall be as follows: Imprint Background Color "Caution Sewer Line Buried Below" Green "Caution Electrical Line Buried Below: Red "Caution Water Line Buried Below" Blue "Caution Telephone Line Buried Below" Orange "Caution Gas Line Buried Below" Yellow "Caution Chemical Line Buried Below" Yellow 4. Identification tape shall be "Terra Tape" as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, TX; Allen Systems, Inc., Wheaton, IL; or approved equal. D. Aboveground Valve Identifications: A coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks shall be provided on all valves. 1. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines conducting hot medium (steam, condensate, hot water, etc.) shall be brass or anodized aluminum. Tags for all other valves shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Square tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves. JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt#200-41125-16005 09905-3 051517 2. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the valve service and number. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer. Valve service shall either be by equipment abbreviation if associated with a particular piece of equipment. Valve numbering, if required, shall be as approved by the Engineer and/or Owner. E. Buried valves shall have valve boxes protected by a concrete pad. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 3 -inch diameter, bronze disc embedded in the surface as shown on the Drawings. The bronze disc shall have the following information neatly stamped on it: 1. Size of valve, inches. 2. Type of valve: a. GV - Gate Valve. b. BFV - Butterfly Valve. c. PV - Plug Valve. 2. Valve Service 4. Number of turns to fully open. 6. Direction to open. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT A. General Notes and Guidelines: 1. Pipelines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Owner and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 2. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids, or semi - liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 3. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards shall be Safety Orange. JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-4 051517 4. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 5. All inline equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. 6. All pipe hangers and pipe support floor standards shall be painted, unless specified otherwise due to material of construction. B. All hangers and pipe support floor and accessories stands shall be painted to match their piping. The system shall be painted up to, but not including, the face of flanges or the flexible conduit connected to electrical equipment. Structural members used solely for pipe hangers or supports shall be painted to match their piping. C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to, but not including, the face of flanges or connections on the equipment. D. All insulated surfaces, unless otherwise specified, shall be given one coat of glue sizing, one prime coat and one finish coat. E. System code lettering and arrows shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A 13.1 marked on piping as follows: 1. Legends shall be of the following color for the respective pipe color: Key to Classification of Color of Letters, Predominant Colors For Piping if not otherwise specified Fluoride piping must be colored light blue with a red band. (F) Fire Protection: Red White (D) Dangerous: Yellow Black Orange Black White Black Brown White (S) Safe: Green Black Black White Light Gray Black Dark Gray White Aluminum Black (P) Protective: Blue White JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-5 051517 2. All piping containing or transporting corrosive or hazardous chemicals shall be identified with labels every 10 feet with at least two (2) labels in each room. Otherwise, markers shall be placed no more than 20 feet apart with at least one (1) marker on every straight run and additional markers at turns and where pipe passes through walls. 3. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed adjacent to each marker. 4. On pipes entering and leaving buildings, the destinations shall be included in ID. 3.02 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated or specifically approved, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and finished. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. C. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, the Contractor shall protect all motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. Equipment contaminated by grit in critical areas, such as bearings, gears, seals, etc., shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Identification tape shall be installed for all buried piping in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and as specified herein. B. Identification tape for piping shall be installed at two (2) locations: 1. One (1) foot below finished grade along centerline of pipe, and; 2. Directly on top of the pipe. 3.04 BURIED VALVES A. In paved or concrete areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement or concrete top. In concrete areas, valve boxes shall be embedded. Following paving operations, a 24 inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-6 051517 B. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 0.20 -foot above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. C. The bronze, valve identification disc shall be embedded in the concrete pad. END OF SECTION JCR/vd/specs/09905 Tt #200-41125-16005 09905-7 051517 SECTION 09961 HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 2. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guideline No. 310.2 - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. 3. NACE International (NACE): SP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 4. ANSI / NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. b. PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. c. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. i. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning. j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. k. SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals Waterjetting Prior to Recoating. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-1 062617 SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. m. SP 16, Brush-off Blast cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non -Ferrous Metals. n. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates. o. TU 11, Inspection of Fluorescent Coating Systems. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International). 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Field painting as shown and/or herein required. See specific items not requiring field painting under Work Not Included. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services for furnishing and installing the finishes as indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. C. In general, exposed surfaces of factory and/or shop -primed work that are delivered to Site without a final finish shall be painted. The shop priming and intermediate shop coatings shall not be considered as included in the number of field coats specified under Part 2, Field Painting Systems Article, Finish Paints paragraph in this Section. D. Ferrous metal surfaces, excluding stainless steel surfaces that will be exposed in the completed Work, shall be sandblasted either at the point of fabrication or under this Section prior to placement of primers. Field fabrication, including welds and cuts, shall be sandblasted, primed, and painted as herein specified. E. Ferrous metal items that will be in contact with precast concrete slabs, masonry, etc., shall be finish painted. F. Galvanized steel items that are not included under "Work Not Included," shall be prepared, primed, and finish painted as herein specified. G. Bruises, mars, and/or scratches in the shop painting due to handling, shall be immediately touched up in the field by Contractor prior to any storage or installation. H. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-2 062617 I. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. J. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect - Engineer will select these from standard colors or finishes available. K. Painting of piping includes pipe hangers, valves, and piping accessories, and also includes surfaces that will be in contact with piping supports. ALL PIPING SHALL BE COMPLETELY PAINTED. L. Existing surfaces shall be painted where shown and/or called for. Preparation for repainting and priming shall be as herein specified. M. Altered existing Work or damaged surfaces that are a result of the revisions shall be painted under this item of Work. The finishes shall match the existing adjacent coatings. N. Miscellaneous equipment shipped to Site with factory -applied coatings as follows, shall be painted under this Work as specified: 1. No Factory Finish: Surface preparation, priming, and finish painting. 2. Prime Coat: Surface preparation, touch-up, and finish painting. 3. Intermediate Coat: Surface preparation, touch-up, and finish painting. 4. Pre -finished Equipment: Touch-up as required. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish necessary touch-up paint. 5. Factory finish coats, not matching the approved finish colors, that are provided in lieu of the shop prime specified shall be properly prepared and receive a final field coat to match the adjacent related Work. 0. Painting as called for on Drawings is for guidance only and does not limit the requirements for painting. P. Work Not Included: Unless specifically called for on Drawings or specified in this Section, the following are not included: 1. Nonferrous metals and stainless steel, except copper and brass. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, furred areas, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-3 062617 3. Exterior gratings with a hot -dipped galvanized finish. 4. Manufacturer's name and identification plates, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 5. All interior and exterior sealant and caulking unless adjacent to latex -coated surfaces and approved by Engineer. 6. Interior concrete surfaces of tanks and basins, excluding secondary containment, immersed and exposed not to be painted. 7. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motors, and fan shafts will not require finish painting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used in this section: 1. ASTM D 16, unless otherwise specified. 2. Coverage: total -minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per gallon. 3. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 4. HCI: Hydrochloric Acid. 5. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 6. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. 7. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 8. PDS: Product Data Sheet. 9. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 10. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 11. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 12. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 13. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1 Submittal Procedures. a. Data Sheets: P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 1) For each product, furnish a Product Data Sheet (PDS), the manufacturer's technical data sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable). The PDS form is appended to the end of this section. 2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section. 09961-4 062617 3) Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with Specification. 4) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating applicator. 5) Indiscriminate submittal of only manufacturer's literature is not acceptable. b. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed abrasive material. 2. Samples: a. Proposed Abrasive Materials: Minimum 5 -pound sample for each type. b. Reference Panel: 1) Surface Preparation: a) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4 -inch by 4 -inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast specified herein, prepared to specified requirements. b) Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent deterioration of surface quality. c) Panel to be reference source for inspection upon approval by Engineer. 2) Paint: a) Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is started, prepare minimum 8 -inch by 10 -inch sample with type of paint and application specified on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied. b) Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved. c) Approved samples to be the quality standard for final finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Typewritten schedule of Painting Operations. This schedule shall include for each surface to be painted, the brand name, generic type, solids by volume, application method, the coverage and number of coats in order to achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. 2. Coating manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Division 1, Manufacturers' Field Services. P M W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-5 062617 3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer's certification stating factory applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified. 4. Manufacturer's written verification that submitted material is suitable for the intended use. 5. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide finish coating manufacturer's written confirmation that materials are compatible. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions and special details for applying each type of paint. C. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty in accordance with requirements of Division 1, warranties covering the items included under this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in application of specified products. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. 2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. C. Mockup: 1. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors, finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details. 2. After Engineer approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the Project. D. Pre -application Meeting: 1. Convene a pre -application meeting two [2] weeks before start of application of coating systems. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this PM W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-6 062617 section, including Contractor, Engineer, applicator, and manufacturer's representative. Review the following: a. Environmental requirements. b. Protection of surfaces not scheduled to be coated. c. Surface preparation. d. Application. e. Repair. f. Field quality control. g. Cleaning. h. Protection of coating systems. i. One-year inspection. j. Coordination with other work. E. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. F. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping: 1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the Site, protect coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion. 2. Protect shop painted surfaces during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and use of canvas or nylon slings. B. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-7 062617 3. Manufacturer's stock number, batch number, and date of manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. C. Storage: 1. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by coating manufacturer. 3. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 4. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable. 2. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. 3. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-8 062617 5. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 6. Paint only when the surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Status of Existing Coatings: 1. Perform tests as required to verify condition of existing coatings and substrate conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. B. Minimum of 5 years' verifiable experience in manufacture of specified product. C. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying most of the products specified herein: 1. TNEMEC Company, Inc. 2. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 3. PPG Industries. 4. Carboline. 5. Advanced Polymer Coatings. 2.02 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Abrasives for blasting shall be sharp, washed, salt free, angular, and free from feldspar or other constituents that tend to breakdown and remain on the surface. B. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. PM W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-9 062617 2.03 PAINT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer's highest quality products suitable for intended service. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. 2. Compatibility: Only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. 3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Color Pigments: Pure, non fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. a. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal based on the total non volatile (dry film) of paint by weight. B. Products: Product Definition Acrylic Latex Single -component, 100% acrylic finish as required Block Filler Primer -sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces, acrylic emulsion, cementitious acrylic, or epoxy Coal -Tar Epoxy Amine, polyamide, or phenolic epoxy type, suitable for immersion service Epoxy Filler/Surfacer 100% solids epoxy trowel grade filler and surface, nonshrinking, suitable for application to concrete and masonry Epoxy Nonskid (Aggregated) 100% solids two -component catalyzed epoxy aggregated; aggregate may be packaged separately Epoxy Primer- Ferrous Metal High -build, two component catalyzed epoxy primer. Epoxy Primer- Other Epoxy primer, high -build, as recommended by coating manufacturer for specific galvanized metal, copper, or nonferrous metal alloy to be coated Fusion Bonded Coating 100% solids, thermosetting, fusion bonded, dry powder epoxy, suitable for the intended service Fusion Bonded, TFE Lube or Grease Lube Tetrafluoroethylene, liquid coating, or open gear grease as supplied by McMaster -Carr Supply Corporation, Elmhurst, IL; RL 736 manufactured by Amrep, Inc., Marietta, GA High Build Epoxy High -build, two component catalyzed epoxy, capability of 3 to 5 MDFT per coat P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-10 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Definition Latex Primer Sealer Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior gypsum board and plaster. Capable of providing uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats. Gloss Polyurethane - Two -component, aliphatic acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish Multipolymeric Matrix Coating Heat resistant single component inert multipolymeric matrix coating for high heat applications under insulation. Water Base Epoxy Two -component, polyamide epoxy emulsion, finish as required. Polymer Lining Aluminum oxide based abrasion resistant ambient or low temperature cure protective coating for concrete surfaces, or approved equal, resistant to Hydrofluosilicic Acid 2.04 MIXING A. Multiple -Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple -component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. ' 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 1. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants for reasons of color or other materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site. 2.05 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph, Shop Coating Requirements. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-11 062617 B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work. C. Shop Coating Requirements: 1. When required by equipment Specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation. 2. Where manufacturer's standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie -coat to be used between manufacturer's standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie -coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer's standard coating with field coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of field surface preparation work and coating application work. B. Perform the Work only in presence of Engineer or their representative, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform the Work in Engineer's absence. C. Schedule inspection of cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat in advance with Engineer. D. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect -Architect -Engineer. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. At completion of work of other trades, touch up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Factory Finished Items: 1. Scheduling Inspection with Engineer before repairing damaged factory finished items delivered to Site. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-12 062617 2. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas on factory -finished items as recommended by coating manufacturer. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. If required to match colors, provide full finish coat in field. B. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply. C. Starting of painting work will be construed as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3.03 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering. E. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray. 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition, or as required by this specification, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime as required. Notify Architect -Architect -Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-13 062617 3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning per SSPC SP -1. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. 4. Abrasives for blasting shall be sharp, washed, salt free, angular, and free from feldspar or other constituents that tend to breakdown and remain on the surface. 5. Concrete floors shall be dry as indicated by testing in accordance with ASTM D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. B. Field Abrasive Blasting: 1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed or coated. 2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required. 3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply. C. Metal Surface Preparation: 1. Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications summarized below: P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent. b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose millscale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using nonpower hand tools. c. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using power -assisted hand tools. d. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, 09961-14 062617 slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. f. SP 7, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on surface. g. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides: corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter using power -assisted hand tools capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original surface is pitted. i. SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating: Surface preparation using high- pressure and ultrahigh - pressure water jetting to achieve specified surface cleanliness condition. Surface cleanliness conditions are defined in SSPC SP 12 and are designated WI -1 through WJ-4 for visual surface preparation definitions and SC -1 through SC -3 for nonvisual surface preparation definitions. 2. The words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", and "blast cleaning", or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specification refer to the applicable SSPC Specification. 3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers' recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. 4. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 5. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects. 6. Welds and Adjacent Areas: a. Prepare such that there is: 1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead. 2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any area to be painted. 3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-15 062617 b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead. 7. Pre -blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning. b. Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent dean with suitable solvent and clean cloth. 8. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for particular primer to be used. c. Use only dry blast cleaning methods. d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems. e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. 9. Post -Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth. b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted. D. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare galvanized steel and nonferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP16 and the coating manufacturer's instructions. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-16 062617 2. Test galvanized surfaces for chromate treatments and remove as required by SSPC-SP 16, or other Engineer approved method. 3. Ensure surfaces are dry. E. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 13 and ICRI 310.2. 3. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. Remove residual abrasives, dust, and loose particles by vacuuming or blowing with high pressure air. 4. Abrasive blast clean to remove loose concrete and Iaitance, and provide an ICRI CSP profile as required by paint manufacturer. 5. Secure coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation, if required, for excessive bug holes exposed after blasting. 6. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry Prior to painting. Concrete floors shall be dry as indicated by testing in accordance with ASTM D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method, and, if necessary, ASTM F1869, Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 7. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning off of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. F. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation: 1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system. 2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material. G. Masonry Surface Preparation: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work. PM W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-17 062617 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush-off blasting. c. Water blasting. 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface imperfections that would impair intended finished appearance. 7. Masonry Surfaces to be Clear Coated: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture after cleaning. H. Gypsum Board Surface Preparation: Typically, new gypsum board surfaces need no special preparation before painting. 1. Surface Finish: Dry, free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, or any other contaminants. I. Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC SP 16. J. Existing Painted Surfaces to be Repainted Surface Preparation: 1. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse. 2. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by band or power tool, SP 2 or SP 3. 3. Feather surrounding intact coating. 4. Apply one spot coat of specified primer to bare areas, overlapping prepared existing coating. 5. Apply one full finish coat of specified primer to entire surface. 6. If an aged, plural -component material is to be topcoated, contact coating manufacturer for additional surface preparation requirements. P M W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-18 062617 7. For ductile iron pipe with asphaltic varnish finish not specified to be abrasive blasted, apply coat of tar stop prior to application of cosmetic finish coat. 8. Application of Cosmetic Coat: a. It is assumed that existing coatings have oxidized sufficiently to prevent lifting or peeling when overcoated with paints specified. b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting painting. 9. Perform blasting as required to restore damaged surfaces. Materials, equipment, procedures shall meet requirements of SSPC. L. Shop Primed Surfaces: Prepare shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare as required by other sections of these Specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. 3.05 SURFACE CLEANING A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning: 1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC SP 7. 2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nutshell. 3. Select various surface preparation parameters, such as size and hardness of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage. 4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view. 5. Engineer will review acceptable trial blast cleaned area and use area as a representative sample of surface preparation. 6. Repair or replace surface damaged by blast cleaning. C. Solvent Cleaning: 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 1. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-19 062617 3.06 APPLICATION A. General: 1. The intention of these Specifications is for existing and new interior masonry, interior and exterior wood, and metal and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise. Do not paint exterior concrete surfaces, unless specifically indicated. 2. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces, carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise specified. 3. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle. 4. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint manufacturers' printed recommendations and special details. The more stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 5. Sand wood lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. 7. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking. 8. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation. 9. Water -Resistant Gypsum Board: Use only solvent type paints and coatings. 10. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe penetrations. 11. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. 12. Where more than one coat is applied within a given system, alternate colors to provide a visual reference showing required number of coats have been applied. 13. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 14. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non -specular black paint. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt 1*200-41125-16005 09961-20 062617 15. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 16. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. a. Piping, pipe hangers, supplementary steel and supports (except galvanized surfaces. b. Heat exchangers. c. Tanks. d. Ductwork, insulation. e. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports. f. Accessory items. g. Conduits and fittings (except galvanized surfaces). h. Switchgear. i. Hanger and support (except galvanized surfaces). 17. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. 18. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 19. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Holiday test coated steel in immersion areas in accordance with NACE International RP 0188-90. 20. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-21 062617 B. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloys: 1. Concealed galvanized, copper, and nonferrous metal alloy surfaces (behind building panels or walls) do not require painting, unless specifically indicated herein. 2. Prepare surface and apply primer in accordance with System No. 4 specification. 3. Apply intermediate and finish coats of the coating system appropriate for the exposure. C. Porous Surfaces, Such As Concrete and Masonry: 1. Filler/Surfacer: Use coating manufacturer's recommended product to fill air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects. 2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer and dependent on surface density and type of coating. b. For secondary containment coating, type and composition of primer should be determined by chemical resistive paint manufacturer. 3. Surface Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running water, just prior to application of coating. D. Film Thickness and Coverage: 1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. 2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper coating thickness during application. 3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surfaces: P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. 09961-22 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with Specification. c. Coats are subject to inspection by Engineer and coating manufacturer's representative. 4. Visually inspect concrete, masonry, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. 5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase the hiding. 3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. The Finish Schedule on Architectural Drawings addresses walls, floors and ceilings for various buildings Additional requirements are included in the following schedule which addresses structural steel, prefabricated steel trusses, process equipment, pumps, piping and other items. C. NSF International approval required for coatings used in contact with the water treatment plant process water. D. System No. 1 Exposed Metal-: Exterior: Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning with a surface profile of 2 to 3 MILS. Epoxy Primer- Ferrous Metal 1 coat, 3 to 5 MDFT High Build Epoxy 1 coat, 3 to 5 MDFT Gloss Polyurethane 1 coat, 2 to 4 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: Exposed metal surfaces, new and existing located outside of structures and exposed to weather, and the following specific surfaces: a. Exposed metal surfaces including but not limited to piping, fasteners, and equipment in the chemical feed system. b. Exposed process piping above grade and within structures or vaults. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-23 062617 E. System No. 2 — Buried Concrete (Soil Side) Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SSPC-SP 13 to achieve ICRI CSP as required by manufacturer Coal Tar Epoxy 1 or 2 coats, 16.0 — 24.0 MDFT Total I F. System No. 3 — Chemical Resistant Concrete Floor and Wall / Secondary Containment: 1 Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SSPC-SP 13 to achieve ICRI CSP as required by manufacturer 100% Solids Flake- Filled Epoxy Novolac Manufacturer Recommended Primer — 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT 2 coats —15.0 — 20.0 mils DFT G. System No. 4 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Prime in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Two Coat Acrylic Polyurethane Coal -Tar Epoxy 1 coat, 10 MDFT 1. Use on aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete. H. System No. 5 Exposed FRP, PVC Plastic Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Conduit, Interior and Exterior: Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SSPC-SP1 Two Coat Acrylic Polyurethane 1 coat, 2.0-3.0 MDFT 1 coat, 2.0-3.0 MDFT 1. For PVC or fiberglass piping or electrical systems requiring color coding, and for protection of exposed, exterior plastic components from the elements, and shall include the following: a. PVC and fiberglass piping, fittings, valves, and electrical conduits requiring color coding in accordance with Section 15050: Process and Utility Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories. b. Exposed exterior plastic piping, valve, and fitting components subject to UV degradation and weathering by the elements. 3.08 COLORS A. Provide as shown for equipment and appurtenances and designated herein and shown in Piping Schedule. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-24 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches. C. Equipment Colors: 1. Equipment includes the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits. 2. Paint equipment and piping one color as selected. 3. Paint nonsubmerged portions of equipment the same color as the piping it serves, except as itemized below: a. Dangerous Parts of Equipment and Machinery: OSHA Orange. b. Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red. c. Radiation Hazards: OSHA Purple. d. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout devices, including, but not limited to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines under pressure: OSHA Yellow. D. Pipe Identification Painting: 1. Color code non -submerged metal piping, except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as pipe, except equipment isolation valves. 2. Piping Color Schedule: In accordance with Section 09905. Fluoride piping shall be colored light blue with a red band. 3. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along pipe axis at connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at intervals along piping not greater than 9 feet on center. 4. Pipe Supports: Painted light gray, as approved by Owner. 5. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located inside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as noted or scheduled. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Equipment: 1. Provide magnetic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Corp., Anaheim, CA, Mikrotest. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-25 062617 2. Provide low -voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector to test completed coating systems, 20 mils dry film thickness or less, except zinc primer, high - build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for pinholes, holidays, and discontinuities, as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1. 3. Provide high-voltage spark tester to test completed coating systems in excess of 20 mils dry film thickness. Unit as recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Testing: 1. Thickness and Continuity Testing by Contractor: a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type, dry film thickness gauge, in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of coating. b. Holiday detect coatings 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer and galvanizing, with low voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector in accordance with NACE RP0188. c. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils dry with high voltage spark tester as recommended by coating manufacturer and in accordance with NACE RP0188. d. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest each repaired area. Final tests may also be conducted by Engineer. C. Inspection: Leave staging and lighting in place until Engineer has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by Engineer. D. Unsatisfactory Application: 1. If item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer. 2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer. P M W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-26 062617 E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required. 3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage -repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color -matched appearance. F. The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during period of field painting: 1. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis. G. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non -complying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non -compatible. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. In accordance with Division 1, Manufacturers' Field Services, coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at Site as follows: 1. On first day of application of any coating system. 2. A minimum of two additional Site inspection visits, each for a minimum of 4 hours, in order to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's product. 4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being places into immersion service. P M W/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-27 062617 a. Inspection Reports: Submit written reports to Engineer and Contractor describing inspections made and actions taken to correct nonconforming work. Report nonconforming work not corrected. b. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for surface preparation and application of coating systems. 3.11 CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at end of each day. B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from Site or destroy in a legal manner. C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. D. As soon as painting Work is accepted by Contactor, it shall become its responsibility for protection, final cleaning, and tough -up. Recoat entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, or color. Repair coating defects in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 3.12 ONE-YEAR INSPECTION A. Owner will set date for one-year inspection of coating systems. B. Inspection shall be attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and manufacturer's representative. C. Repair deficiencies in coating systems as determined by Engineer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.13 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, and following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification: 1. Piping Color Schedule — To facilitate identification of piping in Water Treatment Plants and Pumping Stations follow the Ten states Identification System unless otherwise noted. PM W/a b/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-28 062617 2. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) 3. Product Data Sheet (PDS) 3.14 STENCILING A. The Contractor shall supply all materials and labor necessary for stenciling of legends on pipes. The legend shall show the name of the contents. Review by the Architect - Engineer of legends will be required. Names shall be "plainly visible". Arrows showing direction of flow shall also be stenciled on pipes. The legends shall be located not more than 10 feet apart and, in general, at each valve and piece of equipment. The size and location of the legend shall be in general accordance with ANSI A13.1-1981 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". All visible piping 6" in diameter and larger shall be color -coded and stenciled. "Stick -on" labels are not acceptable. 3.15 PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. All visible piping 3/4" and greater and less than 6" which is accessible for maintenance operations shall be color -coded and identified with semi-rigid plastic identification markers equal to SETMARK Pipe Markers as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation, New Haven, Conn.; T & B/Westline, Los Angeles, California; or equal. Direction of flow arrows are to be included on each marker, unless otherwise specified. B. Each marker background is to be appropriately color coded with a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe in conformance with the "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI A 13.1- 1981). C. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. (too small for color bands and legends), brass identification tags 1-1/2" in diameter with depressed 1/4" high black -filled letters above 1/3" blackfilled numbers shall be fastened securely at specified locations. D. All electrical conduits, which are accessible for maintenance operations, shall be identified with semi-rigid identification markers similar to those specified above. E. Each marker background is to be color -coded with a clearly printed legend to identify the conductor. Size of markers and sizes of lettering to generally conform to the "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI A 13.1- 1981). F. Locations for pipe and electrical markers to be as follows: 1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting (except on plumbing fixtures and equipment). 2. Each branch and riser take -off. 3. Each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction. 4. Each pipe passage to underground. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 09961-29 062617 5. All horizontal pipe runs -marked every 25 feet. PMW/ab/specs/09961 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 09961-30 062617 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11218 CHEMICAL TRANSFER PUMPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This Section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, and incidentals required and installation, placing in operation, and field testing of the following equipment: a. One (1) air operated double -diaphragm hydrofluosilicic acid transfer pump. b. One (1) magnetic drive hydrofluosilicic acid transfer pump. The pump system shall be furnished complete with controls and accessories as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The hydrofluosilicic acid transfer pumps shall pump up to 25 weight percent solution from the chemical storage tank to the chemical day tank. 2. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the specific equipment application. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation of all materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the complete pumping units and accessories as specified herein, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. 3. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not, as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Section 01600: Materials and Equipment. 2. Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. 3. Division 13: Instrumentation. 4. Division 15: Mechanical. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt#200-41125-16005 11218-1 051517 5. Division 16: Electrical. C. Description of System 1. Pump materials and design characteristics shall be as specified in Table 11218-A of this Section. 2. All working parts of identical pumps, such as bearings, check valves, shafts, sleeves, etc., shall be of standard dimension built to limit gauges or formed to templates such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may at any time in the future obtain replacement and repair parts for those furnished in the original machines. All parts shall be properly stamped for identification and location in the machines as shown on the operation and maintenance manuals furnished. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The chemical transfer pump manufacturer shall have experience in the design and manufacture of equipment of similar size and capacity and shall present proof of successful operations involving each piece of equipment furnished. All air operated transfer pumps shall be as manufactured by Graco, or approved equal. All magnetic drive transfer pumps shall be manufactured by March Pumps, or approved equal. B. Qualifications 1. To assure unity of responsibility, the accessories shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump manufacturer or supplier. The supplier shall assume complete responsibility for the satisfactory installation and proper operation of the entire pumping system including pump and accessories. 2. The pump covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable, qualified manufacturer having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. The pump furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 3. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein a minimum of five (5) years. C. Standards: The equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with Federal, State, and Local requirements and applicable sections of the latest editions of the following codes and standards: JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-2 051517 1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 3. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals of all materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01340: Submittal Procedures. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, cut -sheets, and applicable data for the pump, including the total weight of the equipment. 2. Manufacturer's certified curves illustrating pump characteristics of head, discharge, and efficiency. Curves shall be submitted on 8 1/2 -inch by 11 -inch sheets, at the largest practical scale. Curves shall be plotted from no flow at shut off head to maximum pump runout head and flow allowed by the manufacturer. 3. The Shop Drawings shall include details of pump assembly installation layouts, procedures, types of materials used in pump construction, details on all pump accessories, and dimensions of major components. Where applicable, and pump are provided as part of a complete package inclusive of controls, control diagrams shall be provided. 4. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 5. A list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied, with the manufacturer's current price for each item. 6. Pumping equipment requiring special tools for maintenance shall be provided with one (1) set of tools labeled, packed with instruction for use, and housed in a metal tool box with lock -end hoop. 7. Complete installation and storage instructions. 8. Complete motor data including rpm at full load, frequency, voltage, full Toad current, code and design letter, efficiency, horsepower, number of phases, time rating, temperature rise, and service factor. B. Prepare the above information as a single package shop drawing submittal. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-3 051517 1.04 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Operating and Maintenance Instruction: For all pumps furnished under this Section, the Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Equipment function. 2. Description. 3. Normal and limiting operating characteristics. 4. Installation instructions (assembly). 5. Operation instructions (normal startup and shutdown procedures, normal operating conditions, and emergency situations). 6. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 7. Troubleshooting guide. 8. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 9. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly, and dimensional diagrams. 10. Performance curves. 11. A factory representative of the pump manufacturer, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided for one (1) day to start-up, test, and instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. With the permission of the Owner, this work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and demonstration test as provided under PART 3 - EXECUTION of this Section. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 1.05 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. All special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished with the equipment by the manufacturer. B. The manufacturer shall recommend and supply all spare parts necessary for the first five (5) years of operation. Spare parts shall be marked with part numbers and packed in suitable containers also marked with the part numbers. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-4 051517 C. All tools and spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified with indelible markings as to their contents. Each container shall be packed with its contents protected for storage. All tools shall be furnished in steel tool boxes. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is complete and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. C. Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be covered and protected. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage, and handling. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a warranty as specified in Section 01740 — Warranties and Bonds. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's correction period for one (1) year after the time of completion and acceptance. The Owner shall incur no labor or equipment cost during the warranty period. B. The warranty shall cover all necessary labor, equipment and replacement parts resulting from faulty or improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and materials, leakage, breakage or other failure of all equipment and components furnished by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Seal -Less Magnetic Drive Pump 1. The pump shall be of standard dimensions, built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt#200-41125-16005 11218-5 051517 2. The pump shall conform to all requirements stipulated in Table 11218-A. 3. Equipment shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. 4. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness, and to be especially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. 5. The base of the pump shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position, precisely leveled, and aligned, so that the complete installation is free from stress and distortion. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor to conform to the recommendations and instruction of the manufacturers. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Base plates shall be fabricated of corrosion resistant material recommended by manufacturer and approved by Engineer. 6. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed, and any other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump. 7. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to the pump motor. 8. The nameplate ratings for the motor shall not be exceeded, nor shall the design factor be reduced when its pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve at maximum speed. B. Seal -Less Air Operated Double -Diaphragm Pump 1. The pump shall be of standard dimensions, built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units. 2. The pump shall conform to all requirements stipulated in Table 11218-A. 3. Equipment shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. 4. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness, and to be especially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-6 051517 adjustment. 5. The base of the pump shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position, precisely leveled, and aligned, so that the complete installation is free from stress and distortion. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor to conform to the recommendations and instruction of the manufacturers. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Base plates shall be fabricated of corrosion resistant material recommended by manufacturer and approved by Engineer. 6. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, and any other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump. 7. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, max outlet fluid pressure rating present, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to the pump motor. 8. The nameplate ratings for the motor shall not be exceeded, nor shall the design factor be reduced when its pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve at maximum speed. 2.02 PUMP MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Seal -Less Magnetic Drive Pump 1 The transfer pump shall be of the seal -less magnetic -coupled centrifugal type suitable for pumping the specified liquids in Table 11218-A. Pump design shall be single -stage, end suction, close -coupled, frame mounted, Teak -proof, seal - less magnetic drive design. 2. The pump shall be constructed of high-quality materials suited for pumping the intended chemical. 3. The pump and motor shall be coupled in such a manner that there is no rotating shaft or seal to wear which would allow the liquid being pumped to leak, providing a Teak -proof sealess coupling. 4. The pump inlet and outlet connections shall be ANSI 150# rated flanges, with the sizes as noted in Table 11218-A. 5. The pump shall have an internal pressure capacity of 50 pounds per square inch (psi) and be capable of pumping liquids with temperatures up to 190 degrees F. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt#200-41125-16005 11218-7 051517 6. Casing: a. Vertically split, with back pull-out arrangement to maintain impeller without disconnection of piping. b. Provide thrust washer and mounting for impeller spindle in casing. c. All wetted parts (casing, impeller, O -rings, bushing, etc.,) shall be constructed of the materials specified herein and suitable for intended application. d. Pump shall be capable of at least a 5 percent head increase at rated conditions by installing a new impeller. 7. Drive: JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Provide pump coupled to motor through a seal -less magnetic drive. Drive to consist of drive magnet, impeller magnet, impeller magnet housing, and motor bracket. b. Provide 0 -ring seal between impeller magnet housing and pump casing. c. Drive magnet shall be completely isolated from pumped fluid. d. Drive magnet to act as clutch to prevent motor overload. e. Motor shall be US Electric, General Electric, Reliance, or U.S. Electric Motors as specified in Section 16150, Motors. f. Motor shall be NEMA Design B, TEFC type. g. Provide corrosion resistant fan. h. Motor shall have cast iron frame and end brackets. i. Provide cast conduit box with gasketed, large diagonal split -type cover. j. Provide non -wicking strong leads. k. Provide heavily plated hex hardware. I. Motor shall be built in accordance with latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and AFBMA standards where applicable. m. Baseplate: Provide foot mounted baseplate suitable for supporting motor and close coupled pump. 11218-8 051517 8. Materials a. Front Housing: Carbon Filled PVDF b. Rear Housing: Carbon Filled PVDF or Ryton c. Impellers: Carbon Filled PVDF d. 0 -Rings: Teflon encapsulated Viton e. Shafting: Ceramic B. Seal -Less Air Operated Double -Diaphragm Pump 1. The transfer pump shall be of the seal -less air operated double diaphragm type suitable for pumping the specified properties of hydrofluosilicic acid in Table 11218-A. 2. The pump shall be constructed of high-quality materials suited for pumping the intended chemical. 3. The pump inlet and outlet connections shall be ANSI 150# rated flanges, with the sizes as noted in Table 11218-A. 4. The pump shall have an internal pressure capacity of 50 pounds per square inch (psi) and be capable of pumping liquids with temperatures up to 150 degrees F. 5. Casing: a. Vertically split to maintain diaphragm. b. All wetted parts (casing, diaphragm, O -rings, ball and seat, etc.) shall be constructed of the materials specified herein and suitable for intended application. 6. Air Regulator a. The Contractor shall provide air to the double diaphragm transfer pumps as shown on the drawings. Air piping must include both a solenoid valve and air regulator as required by the manufacturer. 7. Materials a. Fluid Contact Material: PVDF or Polypropylene b. Center Section: PVDF or Polypropylene JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-9 051517 c. Diaphragm: Elastomer compatible with material being pumped as recommended by manufacturer d. O -Rings: Teflon or Teflon encapsulated Viton e. Shafting: Stainless Steel 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Parts: 16 -gauge, Type 316 stainless steel with die stamped or laser etched equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location. B. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the pump and accessories shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the location shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required lubricants for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for the pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so that there is no change of level or springing of the baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened. D. Adjust pump assembly such that the driving unit is properly aligned, plumb, and level with the driven unit. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. E. After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and the concrete foundation with a poured, non -shrinking grout. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. F. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump flanges. G. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 05510, Miscellaneous Metals. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-10 051517 operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise test runs of the equipment. At the Owner's discretion, these services may be combined with those provided under Paragraph 1.04, OPERATING AND MONITORING INSTRUCTIONS. 3.03 FIELD FINISHING A. Touch up equipment as specified in Section 09961, Painting and Coating. B. Painting is not required for non-metallic surfaces. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field quality control described herein. B. Functional Tests: 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Output: Measured by plant instrumentation or storage volumes. 3. Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for abnormally high temperatures. JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-11 051517 TABLE 11218-A CHEMICAL TRANSFER PUMP SCHEDULE Parameter Magnetic Drive Transfer Pumps Air Operated Double Diaphragm Transfer Pumps Chemical Pumped: Hydrofluosilicic Acid Hydrofluosilicic Acid Solution Strength: 25% 25% Specific Gravity: 1.24 1.24 Design Flow: 5 gpm 5 gpm Design TDH 20 feet 20 feet Motor: Magnetic Drive Air -Operated Suction Type: Flooded Flooded Suction Size : 2 inch 2 inch Discharge Size: 1.5 inch 1.5 inch Front Housing ETFE PVDF or Polypropylene Rear Housing ETFE PVDF or Polypropylene Diaphragm: N/A Compatible with Hydrofluosilicic Acid Impeller ETFE N/A 0 -Rings FPM Teflon or Teflon Encapsulated Viton Shafting: Stainless Steel Stainless Steel END OF SECTION JCR/vd/specs/11218 Tt #200-41125-16005 11218-12 051517 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11241 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete, ready for operation, and field test the chemical feed systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. All chemical feed equipment including chemical metering and chemical transfer pumps, located in Division 11. 2. Chemical storage tanks are included under Division 13. 3. Process instrumentation and controls are included under Division 13. 4. Mechanical piping, valves, pipe hangers, accessories and appurtenances are included under Division 15. 5. Electrical work is included under Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The chemical feed systems specified herein shall be supplied by equipment manufacturers having experience in the design and manufacture of equipment of similar size and capacity and shall present proof of successful operations involving each piece of equipment operating under similar conditions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit to the Engineer for approval, as provided in the Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples, operating and maintenance manuals, systems piping and wiring diagrams, and other descriptive material for all equipment to be furnished under this Section. In addition to the information above, the submittals shall include at least the following items to demonstrate conformance of materials: P M W/sc/specs/11241 Tt #200-41125-16005 11241-1 062217 a. Letter of Certification from the National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF) stating compliance with Standard 61. b. Letter from the Manufacturer verifying chemical compatibility of all products to be used in chemical feed systems. B. Additional Information 1. In the event that it is impossible to conform with certain details of the specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. 1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions 1. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required catalogue cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number and special requirements shall be as specified in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. 2. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. With the Owner's permission, this work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under PART 3 -EXECUTION. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling of products shall be as specified in Section 01600: Materials and Equipment. 1.06 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The manufacturer's written warranty shall be submitted for all major pieces of equipment, as specified in Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover details of construction which may vary in accordance with the exact P M W/sc/specs/11241 Tt #200-41125-16005 11241-2 062217 requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to include the furnishing, shop testing, delivery, installation, supervision, and field testing of all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the chemical feed equipment as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. Also included in these Specifications is the instruction of the regular operating personnel in the care, operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. All necessary accessory equipment and auxiliaries required for the proper functioning of the chemical feed system installation incorporating the highest degree of standards for the specified type of service shall be furnished by the system supplier whether or not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Hydrofluosilicic Acid Feed System 1. Chemical Bulk Storage Tanks: a. The Contractor shall provide one (1) chemical bulk storage tank for each water treatment plant for a total of two (2) storage tanks. The storage tank for WTP No. 1 will be installed in the existing sulfuric acid storage and pumping area. The storage tank and day tank for WTP No. 2 will be installed on the existing bulk storage tank pad located in the center of the containment area. Chemical storage tanks will be installed as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section13216: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks and Acessories. 2. Chemical Day Tanks: a. The Contractor shall provide one (1) chemical day tank for each water treatment plant for a total of two (2) day tanks. The day tank for WTP No. 1 will be installed in the existing sulfuric acid storage and pumping area. The day tank for WTP No. 2 will be installed in the northeastern corner of the existing covered bulk chemical storage area on a new concrete equipment pad. Chemical day tanks will be installed as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 13219: Polyethylene Chemical Storage Tanks and Accessories. 1. Chemical Metering Pumps: a. The Contractor shall provide one (1) dual metering pump skid for each water treatment plant for a total of (4) pumps. Pumps and accessories as shown on the Drawings are to be installed as specified in Section 11245: Chemical Metering Pumps. PMW/sc/specs/11241 Tt #200-41125-16005 11241-3 062217 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Safety Equipment: 1. The Contractor shall supply the following safety equipment for use with the chemical feed systems as listed below. a. Heavy duty coated, industrial, unlined neoprene gauntlet gloves, 18 inch length, equal to Grainger No. 4AD10. Six pairs. b. Neoprene/nylon apron equal to Grainger No. 3RYU7. Six aprons. c. Neoprene boots with skid -resistant soles, steel safety toes, equal to Grainger No. 12W904. Six pairs. d. Polycarbonate face shield meeting ANSI Z87.1-1979 equal to Grainger No. 35UX81. Minimum 8 inch length. Six face shields. e. Polypropylene head, neck, and shoulder cloth equal to 3M Versaflo M 111 - 976. Six head, neck and shoulder cloths. I I I I 1 I I 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the water plant personnel to determine the size of the safety equipment to be provided prior to ordering. B. Chemical Transfer Pumps: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the chemical transfer pumps for the Hydrofluosilicic Acid feed system at each WTP as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 11218: Chemical Transfer Pumps. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. The manufacturer shall provide a recommended spare parts list necessary to maintain the hydrofluosilicic acid feed system in operation for a period of one (1) year. B. Any tools and spare parts furnished by the manufacturer shall be in containers clearly identified with indelible markings as to their contents and referenced to the chemical feed system number below: C. Each container shall be packed with its contents protected for storage. All tools shall be furnished in steel tool boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (NOT APPLICABLE) PMW/sc/specs/11241 Tt #200-41125-16005 11241-4 062217 I I I I 1 I I I I I 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required lubricants for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise test runs of the equipment. B. Upon completion of installation, the manufacturer, in the presence of the Engineer, shall perform a preliminary test (no chemicals) over the full range of each system to insure the functioning of all component parts to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The test shall be over the full range of capacity. The manufacturer shall furnish all labor and equipment. Power shall be supplied by the Contractor. Approval of the preliminary test by the Engineer shall not constitute final acceptance of the equipment furnished. C. After the plant is in operation, a full operating test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and a qualified manufacturer's representative on the system. The manufacturer shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for such tests and shall correct any deficiencies noted by repairing or replacing the defective component and retesting as required until the equipment meets the Specifications and the satisfaction of the Engineer. The manufacturer shall have 30 days to make the changes necessary to meet the Specifications. If after said 30 day period all deficiencies have not been satisfactorily corrected, the Owner may order the manufacturer to remove the equipment from the installation and refund to the Owner all payments made to him. Chemicals for the full operating test will be furnished by the Owner. END OF SECTION P M W/sc/specs/11241 Tt#200-41125-16005 11241-5 062217 SECTION 11245 CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work 1. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, and incidentals required and installation, placing in operation, and field testing of the packaged chemical feed systems, chemical metering pumps, motors, controls, and accessories as specified under Section 11241: Chemical Feed Systems as further specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. Chemical feed pumps shall be furnished as part of a complete, pre -fabricated and pre -assembled skid offered by a reputable chemical metering skid manufacturer. 2. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the specific equipment application. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation of all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the complete pumping units, controls, and accessories as specified herein, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. 3. For all skids there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not, as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Work Drawings, and Samples 2. Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data 3. Section 11241: Chemical Feed Systems. 4. Instruments and control systems are detailed in Division 13 5. Mechanical piping, valves, gauges, pipe hangers, and supports are included in their respective Section of Division 15. 6. Electrical work, except as hereinafter specified, is included in Division 16. P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-1 062617 C. General Design 1. A complete description of the major components and summary of the operation of each of the chemical feed systems is included in Section 11241: Chemical Feed Systems. 2. All of the equipment specified herein shall be in complete conformity with Section 11241: Chemical Feed Systems, and these Specifications. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be new standard equipment for use in liquid chemical feed systems and shall include, but not be limited to, the following items of material and equipment: a. Fabricated skid with all required piping terminating in a single fill and a single discharge connection b. Mechanically actuated diaphragm metering pumps. c. Calibration chambers. d. Pressure relief valves. e. Pulsation dampeners f. Pressure gauges/transmitters. g. Backpressure valves. h. Inlet Strainer i. Pump drive and controls. 3. All working parts of identical pumps and motors, such as bearings, check valves, shafts, sleeves, motors, etc., shall be of standard dimension built to limit gauges or formed to templates such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may at any time in the future obtain replacement and repair parts for those furnished in the original machines. All parts shall be properly stamped for identification and location in the machines as shown on the Operation and Maintenance Manuals furnished. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the motors, controls, and accessories shall be furnished and coordinated by the skid manufacturer or supplier. The supplier shall assume complete responsibility for the satisfactory installation and proper operation of the entire pumping system including pumps, motors, controls, and accessories. The chemical metering pump skids shall be furnished by Guardian Equipment, Inc., or approved equal. The mechanical diaphragm metering pumps shall be the DDA series as manufactured by Grundfos, or approved equal. B. The pumps covered by these Specifications are intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable, qualified manufacturer having long experience in the production of such pumps. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-2 062617 C. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein a minimum of five (5) years. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions, Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples, and these Specifications. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of each individual piece of equipment of each skid. 3. Structural drawings showing the design of the fabricated skids. Show support systems for pumps, piping, valves, and panel. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show sizes of members. Show welding, bolting, or other assembly arrangements. 4. Installation and arrangement drawings showing dimensions and locations of equipment on the fabricated skid. Show locations of pumps, piping, valves, pulsation dampeners, pressure gauges, calibration columns, electrical equipment, pipe and valve supports, and panels. 5. Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of similar units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, linearity, and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets, at as large a scale as is practical. Curves shall be plotted from no flow at zero stroke speed to pump capacity at full speed. 6. Data including principle dimensions, materials and construction, space required, clearances, piping and electrical connections and requirements, controls, type of finish, installation instructions and other pertinent information. 7. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment including the weights of equipment furnished. 8. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts. Include gaskets, packing, diaphragms, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt#200-41125-16005 11245-3 062617 9. Complete motor data. 10. Copies of all factory test results, if specified in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Section of the Specifications. 11. The recommended grades of lubricants along with alternative references to equal products of other manufacturers. 12. Complete wiring diagrams and schematics of each control panel, controllers, control devices and operator's station furnished under this Section. 13. Complete wiring diagrams and schematics of all power and control systems showing wiring requirements between all system components, motors, sensors, control panels, etc., including connections to work of other Sections. 14. Quality Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance demonstrating that all materials of construction that come into direct or indirect contact with the chemicals being pumped are fully compatible for the specified service. b. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance that the factory finish system is identical to the requirements specified herein. c. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. d. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. e. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. f. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. g. Field Performance Test Certificate. B. Additional Information 1. In the event that it is impossible to conform with certain details of the specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. 2. Upon receipt and review of submitted material, provide the required number of certified prints and one reproducible tracing of all Drawings as specified in Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples. PMW/ab/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-4 062617 1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions 1. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number and special requirements shall be as specified in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not shop painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage and handling. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.06 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide full 24 month equipment service/parts warranty as specified in Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete including proper alignment and balancing of the individual units. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially PMW/ab/specs/11245 Tt#200-41125-16005 11245-5 062617 adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. B. All equipment and piping shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Hastelloy C. C. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, model number, rated capacity, speed, and any other pertinent data shall be attached to each item of equipment. D. A separate stainless steel nameplate with the equipment identification number as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings shall be attached to each item of equipment in an easily visible location. The lettering shall be stamped on using 1/4 inch high or larger letters. E. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes, and other pertinent data shall be attached to each motor. F. Engraved laminated nameplates giving the name and function of all selector switches, pushbuttons, alarm lights and control devices shall be securely attached to each panel furnished. G. All electrical materials and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed and shall otherwise be equal to those specified under Division 16: Electrical. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Fabricated Skid 1. Skid shall be fabricated Polypropylene (PP) or Polyethylene (PE). Provide reinforcing gussets inside the superstructure, beneath the deck, to provide increased stiffness. All valves and equipment on the skid will be located so that they are easily accessible from the front of the skid. The pump skid shall provide containment for any spills or Teaks occurring within the skid and provide a drain connection from the containment area. Fasteners shall be Hastelloy C. The skid shall be as manufactured by Guardian Equipment Inc. or approved equal. B. Metering Pumps - Mechanically Actuated Diaphragm 1. Chemical metering pumps shall be Mechanically Actuated Diaphragm, positive displacement, motor driven, metering pump 2. Mechanically actuated pumps shall include an integral variable speed stepper motor. The chemical feed pump shall be driven by a microprocessor controlled stepper motor coupled to a flat PTFE diaphragm via a gear assembly. The drive P M W/a b/specs/ 11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-6 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 assembly shall be a maintenance free design. The drive mechanism and microprocessor shall be housed in a corrosion resistant, plastic UV stabilized enclosure suitable for operation outside. Drive components shall not require external oil lubrication. The liquid end shall have a back -plate with separation chamber with a safety lip seal and drain hole. 3. Ball check valves shall be cartridge type made of ceramic. Suction and discharge valve design shall incorporate double ball arrangement. Direction of flow shall be clearly marked on each check valve to ensure correct installation. All valve components shall be compatible with the materials to be pumped as listed in Table 11245-A. 4. The diaphragm materials shall be compatible with the materials to be pumped as listed in Table 11245-A. The pump shall be capable of a 2 foot suction lift based on water at 70°F. 5. The pump stroke length will always be 100% and the stepper motor and microprocessor control will be used to vary the output of the pump. The pump shall have a steady state flow accuracy of within +/- 1 percent at constant hydraulic conditions over a turndown ratio of at least 1000:1. 6. The pump shall be able to automatically compensate for pressure fluctuations at the injection point so that it can maintain a constant flow rate. 7. Materials of construction for the pumping units shall be compatible with the fluids to be pumped and as listed in Table 11245-A. 8. Motor a. Each mechanically actuated diaphragm pump shall be driven by an integral microprocessor controlled variable speed stepper motor. b. Each pump motor shall be equipped with a power cord and plug for connection to a 120 V outlet. c. The pump controller shall accept an analog 4-20 mA speed pacing signal. The pump controller shall be capable of control through the remote signal or manually at the pump. d. Electronic Stroke Control P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-7 062617 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pressure Relief Valves 1. Pressure relief valves shall be provided on the discharge header of each chemical feed system as shown on the Drawings. Pressure relief valves shall use a diaphragm design and be externally adjustable by means of a screwdriver. All materials of construction shall be compatible with, and fully resistant to corrosion by the liquids being pumped. The size shall match the associated metering pump capacity. B. Backpressure Valves 1. Multi -Function Backpressure valves shall be provided on the discharge headers of the chemical feed systems as shown on the Drawings. The Multi -Function Backpressure valves shall be diaphragm type and adjustable. The Multi -Function Backpressure valves shall be set according to manufacturer's recommendations. All materials of construction shall be compatible with, and fully resistant to corrosion by the liquids being pumped. The size shall match the associated metering pump capacity. C. Pulsation Dampeners 1. Pulsation dampeners shall be provided for installation on the discharge piping of each metering pump as shown in the Drawings. Pulsation dampeners shall provide for a volumetric residual fluctuation of ±4 percent or Tess based upon a single feed pump in operation. The pulsation dampeners shall be equipped with a pressure gauge and charging valve mounted on top of the gas chamber. All materials of construction shall be compatible with and fully resistant to corrosion by the liquids being pumped. Pulsation dampeners shall be supplied by the pump manufacturer. D. Calibration Columns 1. Provide transparent calibration chambers to be mounted on the suction piping of each chemical feed system as shown on the Drawings. The calibration columns shall be supplied with flanges on each end with NPT taps for connection of piping. The flanges shall be gray PVC for acrylic or clear PVC columns and stainless steel or fiberglass with Viton 0 -ring seals for glass columns. Glass columns shall be provided with stainless steel tie rods for structural stability. The calibration columns shall be as manufactured by Griffco, or approved equal. The calibration column shall be sized such that a measurable capacity of the chamber is at least 1 minute discharge of each pump at maximum pumping capacity. PMW/ab/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-8 062617 E. Pressure Gauges: 1. Pressure gauges shall be provided on the discharge header of metering pumps as shown in the Contract Drawings. Each gauge shall have a range of 0 to 100 psi. Gauges shall have a PVC diaphragm seal (CPVC for Sulfuric Acid and stainless steel for Sodium Bisulfide) and shutoff valve. Shutoff valves shall be of the same material as the piping with seals that are resistant to the chemical applications. F. Controls 1. User Interface. Each pump will be provided with a user interface and display that shall be a backlit LCD on the front of the pump. The interface shall allow the pump output to be displayed in gallons per hour. The interface shall also include a turn and push know that can be used to navigate the control menu and operate the pump in manual. The interface will be provided with a lock function to prevent unauthorized changes. 2. Automatic Control. The pump shall be provided with menu selectable control modes including automatic control. The pump shall have a digital input that will control the run status of the pump when the local microprocessor control on the pump is set for automatic control. The external digital control shall be capable of starting and stopping the pump when the local microprocessor control is in automatic. The pump shall also accept an external 4-20 ma analog control signal that will control the pump speed. The pump controls shall allow the maximum pump speed output to be scaled via the local microprocessor control up to the maximum speed of the pump. Each pump shall be provided with a local alarm to indicated loss of pacing signal when the pump is operating in automatic mode. 3. Manual Control. The pump shall be provided with menu selectable control modes including manual control. When the manual control mode is selected the pump output will be controlled with the turn and push knob on the interface on the face of the pump. Pump will include a start and stop key and display the output in gallons or liters per hour. Pump output will be achieved by varying the pump speed while the stroke length is maintained at 100%. 4. Outputs. The pump will be able to measure actual flow through the head to monitor the dosing process and will be provided with 4-20 ma output that is in proportion to the actual pump flow. The pump will be provided with two digital outputs. The first will be for the pump run status and the second will be a common pump fault alarm. The pump supplier will provide all cables required to connect to the pump to provide the analog and digital inputs and outputs of sufficient length to connect to a terminal box on the pump skid. 5. Terminal Box. The pump skid will be provided with a NEMA 4X terminal box(es) in which all analog and digital signal from the pump will be landed and will provide terminal blocks for connection of all external analog and digital wiring. P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt#200-41125-16005 11245-9 062617 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. All special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished with the equipment by the manufacturer. B. The following spare parts shall be furnished for the mechanically actuated metering pumps: 1. Two (2) extra sets of all gaskets, seals, diaphragms, packing, etc. of each different type. 2. One (1) box of fuses of each size furnished. 3. One (1) box of pilot lights. 4. One (1) control power transformer. 5. One (1) container of each type of lubricating or hydraulic oil required. C. The following spare parts shall be furnished for the peristaltic metering pumps: 1. One (1) spare pump head assembly and rotor for each size pump. D. The Manufacturer shall recommend and supply all spare parts in addition to the aforementioned necessary for the first two (2) years of operation. Spare parts shall be marked with parts numbers and packed in suitable containers also marked with the part numbers. E. All tools and spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified with indelible markings as to their contents. Each container shall be packed with its contents protected for storage. All tools shall be furnished in steel tool boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the pumps, drivers, and accessories shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the location shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required lubricants for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PM W/a b/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-10 062617 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise test runs of the equipment. B. Upon completion of installation, the manufacturer, in the presence of the Engineer and Owner, shall perform a preliminary test of the complete chemical feed system as specified under Section 11241: Chemical Feed Systems. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. Contractor shall furnish at his expense the services of a factory -trained service engineer for system start-up, calibration and instruction briefings for operating personnel. Service shall be furnished for a minimum of two (2) working days with additional time furnished if required to correct problems or deficiencies. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 1 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 2. 1/2 person -day for prestartup classroom or site training at each water treatment plant site. 3. 1/2 person -day for facility startup at each water treatment plant site. P M W/a b/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-11 062617 TABLE 11245-A FEED PUMP DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Item WTP No. 1 WTP No.2 Type Mechanically Actuated Diaphragm Mechanically Actuated Diaphragm Number of units 1 skid, 2 pumps 1 skid, 2 pumps Design capacity (each) 1.0 gph 1.0 gph Max. operating pressure 232 psi 232 psi Design operating pressure 30 psi 30 psi Power Requirements % hp, 120 V, single phase 1/4 hp, 120 V, single phase Enclosure IP65, Nema 4x IP65, Nema 4X Controls Stroke speed control Flow Proportional, 4-20mA Signal Flow Proportional, 4-20mA Signal Stroke speed adjustment 0-100% 0-100% END OF SECTION PMW/ab/specs/11245 Tt #200-41125-16005 11245-12 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11500 HYDROFLUOSILICIC ACID AIR SCRUBBER SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This specification defines the requirements for a dry chemical Hydrofluosilicic Acid Air Scrubber. B. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services as indicated below for the supply of a complete Hydrofluosilicic Acid Air Scrubber, including media, and appropriate connections for external duct work. 1.02 EXPERIENCE, QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the design, fabrication, and installation and testing of systems that are effective in converting toxic gas to non-toxic solids. The manufacturer shall be Pure Air Filtration, or approved equal. B. Manufacturer shall supply a list of 5 installations of dry scrubbers of similar capacity to the owner with the bid, including description of installation and owner contact/reference information. C. Equipment supplied shall meet all local, state and federal regulations having jurisdiction over the equipment and final use, including but not limited to requirements of the Uniform Fire Code and the Occupation Safety and Health Administration. D. The manufacturer shall provide units to meet the minimum values specified for design, and intent of this specification. The vessel, blower, and media shall function as a system and shall be the product of the manufacturer to achieve standardization in operation, maintenance, spare parts, and the authorized manufacturer's services. 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. Design Hydrofluosilicic Scrubber Flow Rate: 7 cfm (maximum) B. Draft Across the Scrubber (for duct loss): 1-1/2" W. C. C. Max/Min Temperature for scrubber Tank: 200/-40F 1.04 MANUFACTURER SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Shop Drawings of the entire scrubber system and all items and accessories in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 — Contractor Submittals. Indicate media capacity by weight. JCR/vd/specs/11500 Tt #200-41125-16005 11500-1 051517 B. Media Analysis — Confirmation testing shall be performed as described in Section 4.0. C. Catalog and/or other data for all components showing manufacturer, manufacturer's type designation, lists of materials of construction, and confirming conformance to specified design requirements. D. Testing and Inspection - Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall provide written verification to the Owner that the unit has been inspected and tested and found to be free of material or workmanship defects, and functions as intended. E. Structural calculations for the scrubber tank. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Hydrofluosilicic Acid Air Scrubber shall be configured to allow discrete sampling of the media beds to determine the extent of spent media in the direction of airflow, and to allow replacement of the spent media without removing and replacing the entire media column/bed. Discrete beds may be preferred for ease of operations and maintenance. B. The air scrubber shall be capable of eliminating hydrogen fluoride gas from the airstream from the bulk hydrofluosilicic acid storage tank. C. The major components of the scrubber system, starting at the air inlet end, shall include: 1. 18" diameter FRP vessel with deep media bed. 2. Corrosion Resistant Media Support Grids and Media Bed(s). 3. Dry media. 4. Corrosion Resistant Discharge Plenum with circular discharge duct connection. 5. Media bed monitoring rods. D. The scrubber vessel shall be a vertical, PureAir EGS-HF, or approved equal, 18" diameter fabricated of FRP. Media shall be supported by fluorosilicic acid resistant perforated screen. The perforated screen shall be supported along the internal walls of the FRP vessel. E. The resin used shall be suitable for continuous exposure to a wet fluorosilicic acid/hydrogen fluoride gas/air mixture with maximum operating temperature of 200°F. A certified letter of suitability for all resins must be submitted with the bids. A corrosion JCR/vd/specs/11500 Tt #200-41125-16005 11500-2 051517 barrier on the inner surface shall be a resin measuring a minimum of 10-20 millimeters. The resin shall be composed of reinforced non -continuous glass fiber strands applied in two plies of chopped strand mat equivalent to three oz/ft. The inner resin layer shall not exceed 10% + 15% "C" glass by weight. Filament wound laminates shall have an average glass concentration of 50-55% by weight. Hand Layup laminates when used on the vessels and equipment shall be fabricated to meet the physical properties in accordance with PS 15-69 product standard. Press molded or compression mold flanged nozzles will be 150 -Ib and are acceptable up to and including 6 inch nominal size. F. All access doors and hatches shall use closed cell neoprene gasketing to prevent any air leakage. G. All gasket material shall be 1/4" thick by 0.75" wide open cell neoprene foam. H. Service doors and all unit access shall be oriented to suit field conditions or requirements. I. Sample Ports - Each bed shall have one (1) 1" diameter sample port which shall extend into the bed a minimum of twelve inches. The sample probes shall be blocked off with a cap constructed of CPVC. J. Removable Lids - Each media section shall be supplied with a bulk loading access hatch. Access hatches shall be on the top of the unit and complete with quick release, snap acting type positive pressure latches with heavy weight compression gaskets. Bolted hatches are not acceptable. K. Scrubber housing and all components which will hold a fluorosilicic acid release shall be fabricated without caulked, screwed or riveted joints, but rather seamless materials, welded construction, or gasketed joints (gasket material must be compatible with fluorosilicic acid). L. Design and fabrication of the scrubber shall take into consideration the drawings attached to the contract documents. 2.02 MEDIA CONTAINMENT SECTIONS A. If discrete media beds are used, each media bed shall be contained between separate corrosion resistant support grids and perforated sheet material to provide media support while imposing a minimum resistance to air flow. B. Each media bed section is equipped with media bed monitoring rod. The rod provides a visual indication of remaining media life. JCR/vd/specs/11500 Tt #200-41125-16005 11500-3 051517 C. The media containment section(s) shall be designed for bulk placement of new media into the unit through latched access hatches; and removal from the unit by vacuuming or manual handling, through media unload doors. D. The media containment section(s) shall be separated to assure filling and removal of individual beds as required. Specially designed fill chutes shall allow for media settling, but shall preclude bypass of contaminated air. 2.03 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION A. Differential pressure gauge as manufactured by Dwyer Instruments, or approved equal shall be provided to continuously monitor the pressure drop across the media beds. The differential pressure gauge shall be mounted on the vessel, and provide a local read-out of pressure drop through the media stage(s). 2.04 MEDIA A. The Hydrofluosilicic Acid Air Scrubber system shall contain greater than or equal to the minimum amount of scrubber material to eliminate hydrogen fluoride gas from air prior to venting. B. The hydrogen fluoride removing media is tested for conformance with the specifications and removal requirements, and has been installed in at least five prior and similar applications. Test results and qualifications shall be submitted with the bids (see Section 3.01). C. If a separate or subcontract media supplier is utilized, the bids shall include technical qualifications for the media supplier, and the bid shall be submitted as a partnership. D. Media shall have an alumina oxide substrate and be spherical in shape, porous, non- flammable and capable of removing hydrogen fluoride throughout the entire media bed. E. Impregnants shall be applied during pellet formation, such that the impregnate is uniformly distributed throughout the pellet volume. F. Media shall be capable of absorbing and removing hydrogen fluoride throughout the entire pellet volume and shall be totally nonflammable and shall be UL Classified, Class 1. Media with carbon in the substrate will not be acceptable. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 TEST RESULTS A. With the bids, provide test results showing that the media that will be supplied is capable of maintaining a continuous air discharge containing 0 ppm hydrogen fluoride concentration throughout the test. The test is meant to simulate the off gassing and JCR/vd/specs/11500 Tt #200-41125-16005 11500-4 051517 subsequent release of hydrogen fluoride gas. During the course of the test, the same total flow rate of gas is maintained through the bed. 3.02 ANALYTICAL SERVICES AND MEDIA REPLACEMENT A. The manufacturer shall, after start-up, provide a service, free of charge to the owner, to instruct the owner in media sampling; and shall provide appropriate lab analysis to determine the remaining life cycle of the media. B. Such service shall be provided at the manufacturer's expense for a period of ten years. 3.03 PRE -PRODUCTION AND START-UP SERVICES A. Prior to finalizing the shop drawings, the manufacturer shall visit the site and perform a pre -design analysis of the proposed installation facilities to verify that the proposed scrubber can be installed and will work as intended, and to assist the owner with design of the installation drawings. B. Upon completion of the installation and as part of the manufacturer's field services, a total of one 8 hour day shall be provided to instruct the owner's staff on system operation, maintenance, and media sampling. END OF SECTION JCR/vd/specs/11500 Tt#200-41125-16005 11500-5 051517 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 11 1 1 11 SECTION 13216 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC TANKS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This section covers the furnishing and installation of two (2) FRP bulk storage tanks for the bulk storage of hydrofluosilicic acid. 2. Tanks furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the fabricator unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall coordinate the work between the suppliers of equipment to be used with or connected to the membrane cleaning system mixing tanks to ensure that all required provisions for mounting the accessories are included. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. High Performance Paints and Coatings: Section 09961. 2. Chemical Feed Systems: Section 11241. 3. Mechanical - General Requirements: Section 15000. 4. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Governing Standards: Except as modified or supplemented herein, all materials and construction methods shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following standards: 1. ASTM C581, "Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resin Used in Glass Fiber Reinforced Structures". 2. ASTM C582, "Standard Specification for Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion Resistant Equipment". 3. ASTM D3299, "Standard Specification for Filament -Wound Glass -Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical -Resistant Tanks". PM W/ab/specs/13216 Tt#200-41125-16005 13216-1 062617 4. ASTM D4097, "Standard Specification for Contact -Molded Glass -Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical -Resistant Tanks". 5. Florida Building Code. 6. Fabricator's quality Assurance Supervisor: Minimum of 3 years experience in the fabrication of fiberglass structures. 7. Designer: Registered Professional Engineer in Florida. 8. The tanks shall be furnished, coordinated, and tested by one supplier. The system shall be completely shop -assembled, and shop -tested prior to shipment. 9. The tanks shall be ASME RTP -1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the storage tanks, accessories and supports shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples. 2. The data shall include full information on basic materials and test data confirming the chemical resistance of the proposed resins to the intended tank contents. 3. The data shall also indicate the sizes of all major tank components including tank diameter, wall thickness, overall length, nozzle details and locations, supports and brackets, anchor bolt locations and details, and full information and details concerning field assembly and installation. 4. Fabricator's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. Include complete resin system information. 5. Detailed fabrication drawings. 6. Complete design calculations for tanks, supports, and appropriate accessories. 7. Tank capacity chart indicating gallons for each inch of depth and cumulative total from bottom. 8. Fabricator's detailed requirements for tank foundations. 9. Recommended bolt torques for all bolted FRP connections. PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-2 062617 10. Recommendations for tank material selection and fabrication methods for services indicated on the Tank Data Sheets included at the end of the Detailed Specifications. 11. Certified test data on representative samples of standard laminate materials which verify that their physical properties meet the requirements and service conditions specified. Include verification of structural design parameters. 12. Final Configuration of Tank Appurtenances: The final locations of tank appurtenances including, but not limited to, nozzles, manways, pipe supports, anchor lugs, ladder, and handrail will be confirmed by the Engineer during review of Contractor's drawing submittals. B. Samples: Laminate sample representative of production quality of surface finish and visual imperfections. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Fabricator's Certificate of Compliance with fabrication requirements. 2. Qualifications of fabricator's Quality Assurance Supervisor. 3. Copy of the fabricator's Quality Assurance Program. 4. Certification of Factory Testing. Submit factory test reports to the Engineer. 5. Certification that the tank supports, and access nozzles have been coordinated with the actual equipment being furnished. 6. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 7. Fabricator's written/printed installation and tank support instructions. 8. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. D. Contract Closeout submittals: Service records for repairs performed during construction. E. Additional Information 1. In the event that it is impossible to conform with certain details of the specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. P M W/a b/specs/13216 Tt#200-41125-16005 13216-3 062617 F. Operating Instructions 1. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number and special requirements shall be as specified in Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. A factory representative of all major component manufacturers, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. With the Owner's permission, this work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under PART 3 -EXECUTION. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The tanks and components shall be adequately protected during transportation, in storage at the job site, and during subsequent installation and construction activities. Damaged units will be rejected and shall be replaced with new undamaged units. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The tank shall be warranted for 5 years to be free of defects in material and workmanship. B. See Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Acceptable Manufacturers A. The tanks shall be manufactured by an established ASME RTP -1 certified manufactuer for fiberglass reinforced polymer vessels. The manufactured tanks shall be stamped with the official symbol for ASME RTP -1 certified vessels, indicating the fabricators full compliance to the design code and standards. The tanks shall be as manufactured by Diamond Fiberglass, Belco Manufacturing Company, Augusta Fiberglass, or Engineer Approved Equal. PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-4 062617 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basic materials shall be as follows: Resin Bisphenol-A polyester or vinyl ester Resins suitable for use with the specified chemicals. Reinforcement Glass fiber with a suitable coupling agent. Surfacing Mat Burlington Formed Fabrics "Nexus Veil", Nicofibers "Surmat 100", or equal. Plastic Laminate In conformity with the applicable governing standards. Exposed Metal ANSI Type 316 stainless steel, in services other than sodium hypochlorite. Hastelloy-C in sodium hypochlorite service. Exposed Assembly and ANSI Type 316 stainless steel. in services other than Bolts, Nuts, and Washers sodium hypochlorite. Hastelloy-C in sodium hypochlorite service. Protected Metal Carbon steel, ASTM A36, with fiberglass reinforced plastic coating. B. Performance and Design Requirements 1. Design Criteria: a. Each tank shall be designed to withstand the hydrostatic head which would result with the tank and fill line surcharged with the liquid chemical to 6 inches above the top of the tank. b. The tanks shall conform to the following requirements as listed in Table 13216-A. c. Each exterior located tank shall be designed in accordance with the applicable design standards referenced herein. Design calculations shall be provided for each tank and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10 2014 Florida Building Code Risk Category: IV Ultimate Design Wind Speed (mph): Vuit=152 Wind Exposure Category: C PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-5 062617 C. Fabrication and Manufacture 1. Vertical Tanks: a. Vertical tanks shall be of the vertical type with flat outer bottoms for mounting on a concrete base as indicated on the drawings integrally molded to the tank. Each tank shall contain an internal sloped floor to enhance draining. b. FRP tanks shall be equipped with an 17 -inch manway. Access manway shall be provided with gasket fully resistant to the chemicals stored and a fastening system to allow the manway to be secured to provide an air tight seal. Each tank shall be provided with a suitable overflow connection and a flanged connection. 2. Horizontal Tanks: a. Horizontal tanks shall be constructed for mounting on saddles as indicated on the Drawings. Each tank shall be provided with a 24 -inch manway and all fittings as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. b. Tanks shall be of the horizontal type, materials for the design, fabrication and inspection shall comply with Section VIII of the ASME boiler and pressure vessel code for unfired pressure vessels. The tank shall be ASME code and stamped for the maximum working pressure of the tank and be hydraulically tested at the test pressure specified in Table 13216-A. c. Contractor shall furnish and install an ASME approved safety relief valve and vacuum relief valve. Safety relief valve shall be heavy duty, high capacity air/gas release valve, 300 psig working pressure, single piece construction, top guided disc, wave spring retained disc guide, manual open lift lever, 2 -inch male threaded NPT inlet and 2 -inch NPT female outlet, built in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. Safety relief valve capacity and factory adjusted settings shall be the responsibility of the tank manufacturer. Vacuum relief valve shall be one piece bronze body construction, 2 -inch male NPT inlet, 2 - inch female NPT outlet. Vacuum relief valve capacity and factory adjusted settings shall be the responsibility of the tank manufacturer. Safety and vacuum relief valve shall be as manufactured by Conbraco, or Engineer approved equal. 2. Manufacture PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. The tanks shall be hand lay-up, spray -up, or filament wound construction in accordance with the applicable governing standard. All 13216-6 062617 tank shells shall be shop fabricated in a controlled environment by the manufacturer and no vertical seams shall be allowed. The finished laminate shall be constructed using a single generic type of thermoset resin throughout and shall not contain colorants, dyes, fillers, or pigments unless otherwise specified. Ultraviolet absorber shall be added to the resin used in the fabrication of tanks indicated on the drawings or specified to be suitable for installation in exposed, exterior locations. After installation and testing, the tanks shall be painted as specified in Section 09961: High Performance Paints and Coatings, to shield the chemical contents from Tight. b. The inner surface layer of the mixing tanks shall consist of two resin rich layers reinforced with surfacing mat and having a total combined thickness of not less than 110 mils. c. Bracketed flat surfaces shall be provided on each tank for the installation of a nameplate, and a certification plate. d. A Minimum of three lifting lugs shall be provided on each tank as required for handling and installation. e. All finished tanks shall be factory air tested to a pressure of 10 psi for a duration of one hour. Any leaks detected during the testing shall be repaired by the manufacturer and the tank retested until no detectable leakage is observed. 3. Concrete Bases: a. The concrete bases for the tanks shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete and shall be level and smooth to the tolerances recommended by the tank fabricator . Concrete bases shall be coated in accordance with Section 09961. Concrete saddles shall be provided with a suitable thickness and durometer neoprene pad to allow for tank expansion and contraction. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories shall be provided on each tank as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 1. Flanged Nozzles: a. Nozzles for connecting piping and accessories shall be provided on each tank at the locations and of the sizes indicated on the drawings or specified herein. PM W/a b/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-7 062617 b. Each nozzle shall be flanged, with flange diameter and drilling conforming to ANSI B16.5, Class 150. Nozzles shall extend at least 4 inches from outside face of tank to face of flange. c. The level gauge mounting flange shall be above the maximum liquid level recommended by the level sensor manufacturer. The length of the nozzle shall be as recommended by the level sensor manufacturer. The center line of the nozzle shall be at least 24 inches from the tank sidewall, fill nozzle, and other obstructions. d. Flanged nozzles shall be fabricated of the same material as the tank and shall be gusseted to the tank or otherwise reinforced in accordance with the governing standard. e. Each tank shall be provided with the following flanged nozzles: Nozzle Size, Location Quantity Connection Inches on Tank Hvrdofluosilicic Acid Bulk Storage Tanks 1 Fill 2 Top 1 Overflow 3 Side @ Top 2 Magnetic Level Indicator 2 Side @ Top —1 Side @ Bottom — 1 1 Pump Suction/Drain 2 Side near Bottom 1 Manway 17 Top 1 Level Indicator Transmiter 2 Top 1 Vent 4 Top 2. Overflow and Drains: Each tank shall be provided with an overflow and drain line of the size recommended by the manufacturer to provide means for draining the tank and to prevent spills in the event of an overflow. 3. Vents: The tanks shall be provided with a vent as shown on the Drawings to prevent drawing a vacuum inside the tank during pumping or draining. Outside the vent shall be equipped with an insect screen of material compatible with the chemical stored. The vent system shall include an air scrubber in accordance with Section 11500. 4. Nameplates: Each tank shall be provided with a nameplate to identify the use of the tank. The nameplates shall be of orange phenolic material with black engraved lettering one inch high and shall be mounted on the tank at a location acceptable to the Engineer. PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-8 062617 5. Certification Plates: A stainless steel certification plate shall be installed below each storage tank nameplate. The following data shall be included on the certification plate: a. Name of tank fabricator. b. Date of manufacture. c. Product to be stored d. Maximum allowable concentration, specific gravity and temperature of the specified chemical solution that can be stored safely. e. Mechanical properties of the laminate. f. Resin designation. g. Equipment identification number as listed herein. 6. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for all tanks weighing over 100 pounds. 7. Anchor Bolts: Type 316, stainless steel bolts, sized by fabricator and at least 1/2 -inch in diameter, or as shown and as specified in Division 5. 8. Anchor Lugs: Anchor Tugs shall be provided and shall be designed to withstand all specified wind Toad conditions. No less than 8 anchor lugs shall be provided. Details of anchors shall be shown on fabrication Drawings. Anchor lugs shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.04 SPARE PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection of all products fabricated to this Specification is required prior to shipment unless specifically waived in writing by the Engineer. This shall include: 1. Visual inspection to the requirements of ASTM C582-87 and ASTM D2563-87. 2. Barcol Hardness measurements per ASTM D2583-87. 3. Acetone sensitivity test for all internal secondary bonds. 4. Glass content by ignition loss on three cutouts per ASTM D2584. 5. Hydrostatic Leak Test: a. Perform on each tank. PM W/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-9 062617 b. Fill to top nozzle; allow to stand for 2 hours with no visible leakage. B. Repairs authorized by the Engineer shall be reinspected before final acceptance unless specifically waived. C. Identify and retain all cutouts. Engineer may select certain cutouts for testing for physical properties of the laminate. D. Factory Test Reports: Certify, by signature, results of the following: a. Inspections. b. Results of hydrostatic testing. c. Test reports of physical properties of standard laminates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The tanks shall be installed at the locations as indicated on the drawings. The tanks shall be installed in accordance with the fabricator's recommendations, the requirements of the applicable governing standard, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and made ready for the installation of piping and other appurtenances as indicated on the drawings and specified under other sections. Grouting under the tank, if recommended by the tank fabricator, shall be done with nonshrinking grout. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. After completion of installation, the tanks shall be filled with water to the top access manhole opening and allowed to stand full for a period of not Tess than 48 hours. During testing, flanged connections may be plugged by the installation of temporary blind flanges on the outside of the tank but shall not be blocked or plugged on the inside. All leaks or indications of leaks shall be repaired by the fabricator and made completely watertight. A leaking tank, upon repair, shall be retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. When installation has been completed and all connections have been made, all tank surfaces, interior and exterior, shall be thoroughly cleaned as recommended by the fabricator and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Abrasive cleaning agents shall not be PMW/ab/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 13216-10 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 used. The tank and wetted accessories shall be completely dried before being placed into service. B. Provide fabricator's representative at site in accordance with Section 01650: Start -Up for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation and start-up assistance for specified component, subsystem, equipment, or system. C. Manufacturer's Authorized Representative: Present at Work site designated by the Contractor for the minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded. 1. Services to include but may not be limited to: a. One (1) person -day for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of installation for each type of tank. 2. Furnish assistance, inspection, and certification services at such times as requested by the Contractor. TABLE 13216-A FIBERGLASS REINFORCED TANKS Tank Name Hydrofluosilicic Acid Bulk Storage Orientation Chemical Vertical Hydrofluosilicic Acid, 23% Number of Units 2 Nominal Capacity, measured to invert of overflow pipe, gal 500 Max diameter, feet 4 Max Height/Length (sidewall), feet 6 Tank Location Exterior Max Concentration by weight ------------------------------------- Max specific gravity 23% --------- ------------------- 1.24 Max temp., degrees F 105 Min temp., tank contents, degrees F Ambient P M W/a b/specs/13216 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13216-11 062617 SECTION 13219 POLYETHYLENE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish and install polyethylene chemical day tanks required for proper operation of each chemical feed system at each water treatment plant. 2. Tanks furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the fabricator unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall coordinate the work between the suppliers of equipment to be used with or connected to the storage tanks to ensure that all required provisions for mounting the accessories are included. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Other sections directly related to work covered in this section include the following: 1. Chemical Feed Systems: Section 11241. 2. Mechanical - General Requirements: Section 15000. 3. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The tank manufacturer shall have a record of at least ten (10) installations during the previous five (5) years for the tank sizes indicated. The manufacturer must be capable of furnishing reference contact information of locations which can be visibly inspected. B. Factory Testing 1. Material Testing: Material taken from each tank shall be tested for the following: JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt#200-41125-16005 13219-1 051517 Parameter Test Standard Value Impact ASTM D1998 120 ft -Ib, min Gel, minimum ASTM D1998 60% 2. Following fabrication, the tanks, including factory applied inlet and outlet fittings, shall be hydraulically tested with water. The factory test shall compensate for the difference in specific gravity between the test water and chemical stored to simulate actual maximum operating pressures. Test methods may include adding a 2.5 psi air pad to a filled tank or filling the tank with standpipes, raising the maximum water surface approximately 5 feet higher than the normal maximum tank level. The test duration shall be 24 hours. Following successful testing, the tank shall be emptied and dried prior to shipment. 3. An affidavit signed by the tank manufacturer shall be furnished indicating that the factory tests have been performed and the indicated conditions have been met. This affidavit shall be furnished prior to acceptance of the tank at the job site. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings 1. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the storage tanks and accessories shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples. 2. The data shall include full information on basic materials and test data confirming the chemical resistance of the proposed materials to the intended tank contents. 3. The data shall also indicate the sizes of all major tank components, including tank diameter, wall thickness, overall length, nozzle details and locations, anchor bolt locations and details, support stands and full information and details concerning field assembly and installation. B. Additional Information 1. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of the specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. 2 Approved Materials: All materials that come into contact with the chemicals used to treat the finished water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 13219-2 051517 products approved for use in contact with chemicals used in with potable water treatment. C. Operating Instructions 1. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number and special requirements shall be as specified in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. 2. A factory representative of all major component manufacturers, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. With the Owner's permission, this work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under PART 3 - EXECUTION. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The tanks and components shall be adequately protected during transportation, in storage at the job site, and during subsequent installation and construction activities. Damaged units will be rejected and shall be replaced with undamaged units. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The tank shall be warranted for 5 years to be free of defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Acceptable Manufacturers A. The chemical day tanks shall be as manufactured Snyder Industries or Poly Processing. Chemical tanks for the project shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 13219-3 051517 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basic materials shall be as follows: Tank Shell and Covers Nozzles High density cross-linked polyethylene construction with UV inhibitor. All tanks must conform to NSF Standard 61. Bulkhead fittings of PVC OR CPVC to match connecting piping are allowed for tank overflow nozzles and all nozzles on the top of the tank. Integrally molded nozzles shall be used for nozzles below the top of the tank. Exposed Bolts, Nuts, Hastelloy C Washers and Hardware B. Performance and Design Requirements 1. Conditions of Service: Each tank will normally be used to store the specified chemical at atmospheric pressure. The tanks shall be designed for the storage of the following liquid chemicals: Chemical Hydrofluosilicic Acid Location Chemical Storage and Feed Area Max. Concentration 23 Percent by weight Max. Specific Gravity Max. Temp., Degrees F Min. Temp. Tank Contents, Degrees F JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 1.24 105 Ambient 13219-4 051517 2. Design Criteria: a. Each tank shall be designed to withstand the hydrostatic head which would result with the tank and fill line surcharged with the stored liquid chemical to 6 inches above the top of the tank. b. The tanks shall conform to the following requirements: Tank Type Vertical Min. Nominal Capacity measured to overflow 30 gallons Max. diameter, 23 inches Min. tank height 26 inches c. Each tank shall be designed in accordance with the applicable wind loading design standards as referenced herein. Design calculation shall be provided for each tank and shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. Wind loads ASCE 7-10 2010 Florida Building Code Risk Category 111 Ultimate Design Wind Speed (mph) Veit=152 Wind Exposure Category C C. Fabrication and Manufacture 1. Hydrofluosilicic Acid Day Tank a. The tanks shall be self-supporting of vertical, cylindrical, with seamless construction. Day tanks shall be a flat bottom vertical tank for mounting on a concrete pad. The tanks shall be translucent with visible content level and white or cream in color. The tanks shall have capacities, dimensions and 12" threaded manway. Access manway shall be provided with gasket fully resistant to the chemicals stored and a fastening system to allow the manway to be secured to provide an air tight seal. 2. Testing a. Testing of all tanks shall be in accordance with subsections 1.02 B and 3.03 of this specification. JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 13219-5 051517 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories shall be provided on each tank as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Nozzles: JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Nozzles for connecting piping and accessories shall be provided on each tank at the locations and of the sizes indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. b. Each nozzle for connecting piping and accessories 2 -inch in diameter and larger shall be flanged, with flange diameter and drilling conforming to ANSI B16.5, Class 150. Nozzles shall extend at least 3 inches from outside face of tank to face of flange. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be full face; 1/8 inch thick of suitable elastomeric material to resist the attack of the chemical being stored. c. Nozzles for connecting piping and accessories Tess than 2 -inches in diameter shall be female NPT extending at least 2 inches from the outside face of the tank. Bulkhead fittings may be used in lieu of nozzles for connections to the top of the tanks. d. The level gauge mounting flange on the top of the day tank shall be above the maximum liquid level recommended by the level sensor manufacturer. The length of the nozzle shall be as recommended by the level sensor manufacturer. e. Each tank shall be provided with the following nozzles with the orientation as shown on the Drawings: Nozzle Size, Location Quantity Connection Inches on Tank Hydrofluosilicic Acid Day Tank 1 Fill 1 Top 1 Overflow 1 Side @ Top 1 Drain 1 Side @ Bottom 1 Feed Pump Suction 1 Side @ Bottom 1 Return Vent 1 Top 1 Level Indicator Transmitter 2 Top 13219-6 051517 3. Vents: The tanks shall be provided with a vent as shown on the Drawings to prevent drawing a vacuum inside the tank during pumping or draining. Outside the vent shall be equipped with an insect screen of material compatible with the chemical stored. 4. Liquid Level Indicating Systems: A liquid level indicating system for each chemical day tank is covered in Division 13. The tank manufacturer shall coordinate mounting of the level sensor with the instrumentation supplier. 5. Nameplates: Each tank shall be provided with a nameplate to identify the chemical stored. The nameplates shall be of orange phenolic material with black engraved lettering one inch high and shall be mounted on the tank at a location acceptable to the Engineer. The chemical designation to be engraved on the nameplate shall be as specified herein. 6. Certification Plates: A stainless steel certification plate shall be installed below each storage tank nameplate. The following data shall be included on the certification plate: a. Name of tank fabricator. b. Date of manufacture. c. Product to be stored. d. Maximum allowable concentration, specific gravity and temperature of the specified chemical solution that can be stored safely. e. Equipment identification number shown listed herein. 7. Gaskets for nozzles and tank cover flanges shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer and be of an elastomeric material compatible with the chemical to be stored. 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not applicable) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's product quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (Not applicable) JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 13219-7 051517 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The tanks shall be installed at the locations as indicated on the drawings. The tanks shall be installed in accordance with the fabricator's recommendations, the requirements of the applicable governing standard, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and made ready for the installation of piping and other appurtenances as indicated on the drawings and specified under other sections. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. After completion of installation, the tanks shall be filled with water to the top overflow opening and allowed to stand full for a period of not less than 48 hours. During testing, flanged or threaded connections may be plugged by the installation of temporary blind flanges or threaded plugs on the outside of the tank but shall not be blocked or plugged on the inside. All leaks or indications of Teaks shall be repaired by the fabricator and made completely watertight. A leaking tank, upon repair, shall be retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B Cleaning: When installation has been completed and all connections have been made, all tank surfaces, interior and exterior, shall be thoroughly cleaned as recommended by the fabricator and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Abrasive cleaning agents shall not be used. The tank and wetted accessories shall be completely dried before being placed into service. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. A representative of the manufacturer shall certify in writing that the tank has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Certification shall be submitted. JCR/vd/specs/13219 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13219-8 051517 SECTION 13410 BASIC INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General administrative and procedural requirements for instrumentation installations. Administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand on requirements specified in Division 1. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for each product specified. 2. Wiring diagrams, both elementary and schematic, differentiating between manufacturer installed and field -installed wiring. 3. Digital Systems: Provide the following: a. Digital equipment layouts of input and output racks showing complete module model number and addressing assignment. Layouts of port pin assignment, connection schematic indicating cable types and port addresses. 4. Software Programs: One fully annotated printed copy of program prior to factory test. In addition, provide required number of copies of latest revisions of program at time of acceptance by OWNER. Submittal of printouts, listings, and screen images shall be supplied on paper (hard copy). With concurrence of OWNER and ENGINEER, machine readable magnetic copies may be supplied in addition to printed copies as a matter of convenience. Format of magnetic media shall be as mutually agreed with OWNER. 5. Programmable Logic Controllers: Submits lists of input and output assignments, data file structures used, and internal data points. Show points used to communicate with between PLCs and the operator interface and data collection segments. Include complete, fully annotated ladder logic diagrams complete with cross-reference listings. 6. Operator Interface and Supervisory Control: Submit "screen dump" images of each proposed operator interface screen. Describe color schema, mouse button use, function key controls and communication protocol with PLCs. Provide a JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt#200-41125-16005 13410-1 062117 flow diagram showing screen navigation. Show sample event and alarm log outputs. 7. Data Collection: Submit details of data structures, communications protocols, data exchange formats, sampling intervals, and file storage space management. Provide "screen dump" images of historical trending. 8. Data Management and Reporting: Includes process data management, laboratory management, and reporting. Submit data definitions, customization of base software, data entry screens, menus, and report formats. Describe data entry, collection, and reporting scenarios. Describe data file storage management including backup and archive operations. B. Record Drawings: At Project closeout, submit record drawings of installed products, in accordance with requirements of Section 01700. 1. Where Drawings are drafted by computer equipment, CONTRACTOR shall furnish files on a disk. These Drawings shall include changes made by Field Orders, Change Orders, Addenda, and errors discovered during start-up and acceptance. 2. Drawings shall include terminal numbers at each wiring termination and piping termination. A complete system diagram shall be included. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01730, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section. 1. Instructions shall be short, easy -to -understand directions specifically written for this Project describing various possible methods of operating equipment. Instructions shall include procedures for tests required, adjustments to be made, and safety precautions to be taken with equipment. These documents are to be submitted to ENGINEER's office. 2. Provide 1 complete set of manufacturer's documentation covering programmable equipment supplied. Include hardware manuals and prints as manufacturer normally ships with programmable equipment. JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Include complete software manuals for operating system, as well as manuals for any other software. Written instructions for the operations and maintenance of software shall be provided. The instructions shall be short, easy -to -understand directions specifically written for this Project describing various possible methods of operating software. b. Include program listings, point/address lists, cross-reference listings, images of screens, data entry forms, and sample reports. 13410-2 062117 c. Manuals shall include instructions for program users and instructions for maintenance programmers. D. Warranty: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01740, warranties covering the items included under this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. National Electric Code. 2. Applicable State and local requirements. 3. UL listing and labeling shall be adhered to. C. Items covered by this Section are designated as undelivered specifically manufactured equipment for which associated progress payments will be made in accordance with this Specification. D. Equipment that does not have a UL, FM, CSA, or other listed testing laboratory label shall be furnished with a notarized letter signed by the supplier stating that equipment furnished has been manufactured in accordance with National Electric Code and OSHA requirements. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide permits and licenses, observe and abide by applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and rules of State, territory or political subdivision thereof, wherein the Work is done. CONTRACTOR shall pay fees for permits, inspections, licenses, and certifications when such fees are required. F. To ensure timely performance and conformance with Specifications, Project meetings shall be held at OWNER's facility once every 3 months during course of Project. Cost of such meetings shall be included. G. Calibration Equipment and Testing Apparatus: Equipment supplier shall have available test and calibration equipment for factory panel tests, installation, start-up, service contract, and maintenance or troubleshooting purposes. 1. The equipment required for these tests is as follows: a. One - Digital Multimeter with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.1 percent. b. One - Signal calibrator for analog signals. JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt#200-41125-16005 13410-3 062117 c. One - Programming terminal with software to configure programmable equipment. H. Component Requirements: For the purposes of uniformity and conformance to industry standards, signal transmission modes shall be either electronic 4-20 mA DC or pneumatic 3-15 psi only. No other signal characteristics are acceptable, except for remote temperature detector (RTD) and thermocouple (TC) sensing circuits; 4-20 mA DC signals shall be such that devices may be wired in parallel for 1-5 volt DC as required. 1-5 volt DC mode shall be employed only within control panel enclosures. I. Responsibility and Coordination: Drawings and Specifications are intended to include details of a complete equipment installation for purposes specified. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for details which may be necessary to properly install, adjust, and place in operation complete installation. Any error on Drawings or in Specifications which prevents proper operation of supplied system shall be shown correct at time of Shop Drawing submittal for approval or brought to attention of ENGINEER with or prior to submittal. J. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for costs incurred to correct aforementioned errors brought to ENGINEER's attention. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for additional costs which may result from unauthorized deviations from Specifications. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufactured material shall be adequately packed to prevent damage during shipping, handling, storage, and erection. Material shipped to Site shall be packed in a container properly marked for identification. Blocks and padding shall be used to prevent movement. B. CONTRACTOR shall inspect the material prior to removing it from carrier. If damage is observed, CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify carrier so that a claim can be made. If no such notice is given, material shall be assumed to be in undamaged condition; any subsequent damage that occurs to the equipment shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Repair and replacement of damaged parts will be done at no expense to OWNER. C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage charges resulting from handling of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS A. References made in these Specifications to specific manufacturer's products are intended to serve as a guide to type, construction, and materials. Listing of a JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 13410-4 062117 manufacturer does not imply acceptance by ENGINEER of a manufacturer's particular product, product line, or latest product revision if it does not meet Specifications. B. Equipment Supplier: Equipment specified under Sections 13413 through 13899 and shown on Drawings shall be designed as a system, fabricated or purchased, shipped to Site, and started up by one of the qualified and approved equipment suppliers listed under this Section. Intent is for unit responsibility. 1. Equipment supplier shall not assign any of its rights or delegate any of its obligations under these Sections without prior written acceptance by ENGINEER. 2. Direct purchase of any items in these Sections by CONTRACTOR is not in compliance with this Specification and will not be permitted. 3. When a Service Contract is included, it shall be performed by factory -trained personnel employed by equipment supplier. Equipment supplier shall assign a qualified Engineer employed by the supplier as Project Engineer/Project Manager. a. Project Engineer/Project Manager's name shall be forwarded to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER within 30 days after receipt of a purchase order by equipment supplier. b. Project Engineer/Project Manager shall be focal point for design, fabrication, Contract communications, and shall be responsible for start-up and acceptance. Project Engineer/Project Manager shall be at factory test at Site for start-up and at the Site during entire acceptance procedure. Only qualified and approved equipment suppliers shall be accepted as meeting this Specification. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transmitted electronic signals to equipment of other vendors and between control panels shall be a separate isolated -floating output for each item of equipment and shall conform to ISA Standard S50.1. B. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1, 4, 4X, or 7 as indicated on Drawings. Intrinsically safe systems, as approved by Factory Mutual, shall be furnished when called for. C. No external power connections shall be allowed unless specifically called for in Specification. Where an external power source is called for, unit shall accept 120 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent power. D. Current -to -current converters shall be used as power boosters to provide sufficient signal power as required. It is equipment supplier's responsibility to determine under what circumstances and locations power boosters are required, provide them, and integrate them into the instrumentation system to make system function properly. JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 13410-5 062117 E. Separate power supplies shall be totally enclosed with solderless terminals for connections. They shall be short circuit current limiting type that will automatically resume regulation after removal of short circuit. They shall operate from 120 volt AC, plus or minus 10 percent power. Regulated voltage shall be fixed. Units with internal trim potentiometers will be accepted. 1. Pneumatic instruments shall have an input and output range of 3-15 psig. Units shall require a 20 psi supply. Provide an air set for each pneumatic unit or for each 20 psi manifold. Bubbler air sets, regulators, valves, etc., must be factory assembled on a subplate as specified and detailed. 2. Instruments shall be panel -mounted or enclosed for wall mounting as shown on Drawings. F. Size and style of instruments are defined in Specifications. Pneumatic panel -mounted units shall match in appearance similar electronic components. G. Charts and scales are shown on Drawings. Standard scales shall not be accepted without ENGINEER's approval if it differs from those shown. Ratio station scales and other scales shall be graduated such that major graduations fall on whole numbers (i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 5, 10, 15, etc.) and minor graduations fall on 0.1 or 0.2 intervals (i.e., 1.1, 1.2 or 11, 12, etc.). If two scales are called for on ratio stations, each scale shall be indexed to meet Specification. Drawing of each scale for ratio stations shall be submitted with Shop Drawings for approval. H. Solid-state output switches, where used, shall be overvoltage transient protected and not be damaged by dl/dT or dv/dt for their design application under this Contract. I. Instruments shall be equipped with permanently attached identification tag. Tag shall be included on field- and panel -mounted devices. Tags shall include ENGINEER's tag identification and manufacturer's tag identification if different from ENGINEER's. 1. Tags shall be either stamped metal or laminated phenolic with white letters engraved on a black background. Field -mounted devices shall have tags fastened with screws. Devices mounted in panels will be tagged inside panel on subplates or on device itself where it can be easily read. J. Finish on instruments and accessories shall provide protection against corrosion by elements in environment in which they are to be installed. Both the interior and exterior of enclosures shall be finished. Extra paint of each color used on material shall be provided by manufacturer for touch-up purposes. K. Provide equipment identification nameplates complying with Section 16075. Nameplates shall contain ENGINEER's item designation and, for indicators and transmitters, design range and units of device shown. JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 13410-6 062117 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Control and monitoring system control panels and computer equipment, if any, shall be tested at the factory and, witnessed by ENGINEER prior to shipment to Site. ENGINEER shall be given 4 weeks notice before factory test date. Factory test shall include checking for conformity to Specifications, fabrication, and nomenclature. Control and monitoring system logic and terminals shall be checked line by line and function by function in total for conformity of Drawings. B. Conduct preliminary testing prior to factory checkout by executing programs supplied for this Project. Exercise inputs to test logic for correct function and proper response of outputs. Verify correct interface with programs. Verify correct communications. C. Equipment supplier shall have test equipment available at the factory. A full set of annotated logic programs and wiring diagrams with the latest revisions shall be made available to ENGINEER at factory for checking purposes. Drawings shall include wire numbers and terminal numbers. D. Control panels and programmable equipment shall not be shipped to Site until logic conforms to Contract requirements, physical changes required by testing are made, and tags conform to factory test corrections. Equipment delivered to Site without factory test or corrections will be returned to factory at CONTRACTOR's expense. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of equipment manufacturer as approved by ENGINEER. B. Install equipment as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. C. Elements that are supported by plumbing or piping, or that have only plumbing or piping connections shall be installed under those Sections. D. Plumbing, piping, or pneumatic signal connections to elements requiring such connections shall be made under those Sections. Control panels shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 Sections, with piping connections to control panels installed under Division 15 Sections. E. Drawings are not intended to show every detail of construction or location of piping, ductwork, or equipment. Where proper operation or construction makes it necessary or JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 13410-7 062117 advisable to change location of piping, instrumentation equipment, air ducts, or other equipment, CONTRACTOR shall so inform ENGINEER for his approval and permission. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Calibrate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ranges or set points indicated on Drawings. B. Installation and Start-up: Equipment supplier shall have an established service facility from which qualified technical service personnel and parts may be dispatched upon call. Such a service facility shall be no more than 6 hours travel time from Site. 1. Equipment supplier shall provide an experienced, factory -trained, competent, and authorized service representative for a minimum of 3 times at Site, including once during installation and start-up and once during acceptance to inspect, check, and calibrate any part of system. Supplier's service representative shall revisit Site for 8 hours per day as often as necessary after installation until trouble is corrected and equipment has passed acceptance test and is operating satisfactorily to ENGINEER. 2. Third trip is after equipment has been accepted and shall be used to instruct OWNER's personnel in aspects of operation and maintenance, such as fuse locations, use of controls, instruction manuals, etc. Third trip shall be for duration of two, 8 -hour days at OWNER's facility. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Upon completion of installation and calibration, demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new or repaired units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. JCR/sc/specs/13410 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13410-8 062117 SECTION 13413 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Product and installation requirements for the following: 1. Fiber-optic (FO) Cables. 2. Fiber-optic Connectors, Couplers, and Patch Panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 2. Product certificates, signed by the communication system manufacturers, certifying that the cables are suitable for the connected equipment as described in "Quality Assurance" Article below. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Connected Equipment Manufacturer Certifications: Where cables specified in this Section are used to provide signal paths for systems specified in other sections of these Specifications, or for systems furnished under other contracts, obtain review of the cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers. C. UL Compliance: For cables that may be run in plenum ceilings or other air -handling spaces, provide cables tested for compliance with applicable requirements of UL Standard 910, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables Used in Air -Handling Spaces." In addition, provide FO cables that have passed the UL VW -1 flame test. D. EIA/TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of EIA Standards, EIA -440, - 455, -458, -475, -509, —568-b.3, and 598-a pertaining to optical fiber cable and system JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt#200-41125-16005 13413-1 062117 component construction and installation. EIA/TIA-455-61, FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR. E. Fiber Optics Experience: CONTRACTOR must be able to prove to the satisfaction of OWNER that it has significant experience in the installation of fiber -optics cable systems. Installation must include installation of fiber -optics cable, fiber termination, knowledge of interconnect equipment, and a thorough knowledge of testing procedures. F. Labeling: Handwritten labels are not acceptable. All labels shall be machine printed on clear or opaque tape, stenciled onto adhesive labels, or type written onto adhesive labels. The font shall be at least 1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible. The text shall be of a color contrasting with the label such that is may be easily read. If labeling tape is utilized, the font color shall contrast with the background. Patch panels shall exhibit workstation numbers or some type of location identifier, in sequential order, for all workstations or devices attached. Each fiber -optics cable segment shall be labeled at each end with its respective identifier. G. Fiber -Optics Interconnect Equipment (Patch Panels): Interconnect equipment shall be used in all fiber cable installations. Patch panels shall be mounted in the equipment racks or panel mounted. Interconnect equipment mounted in racks shall be affixed to the rack by at least 4 screws. All fiber -optics interconnect devices shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. H. Patch Cords: Patch cords shall be provided for each fiber-optic port on the patch panel. Patch cords shall meet or exceed technical specifications of all installed fiber-optic cable. Patch cord connectors shall be matched with patch panel connector type and network fiber module connector type as required. 1.04 COMMISSIONING A. Subsequent to hook-ups of FO system to signal sources and destination equipment, operate systems to demonstrate proper functioning. Replace malfunctioning FO cabling system items with new materials, and then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. FO Cables: JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt #200-41125-16005 13413-2 062117 a. Corning Infinicor SX+ Optical Fiber, or Equal, for multi -mode applications. b. Corning NexCor Optical Fiber, or Equal, for single -mode applications. 2. FO Connectors and Couplers: a. AMP Netcon. b. AT&T Network Systems. c. Corning. d. Honeywell, Inc. e. ITT Corp. f. Thomas and Betts Corp. 3. FO Patch Panels: a. Panduit. b. Volition. 2.02 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEMS A. Fabricate system using manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information and in sizes, types, and performance characteristics as indicated. B. FO Cables: Factory fabricated, single channel, all dielectric, low Toss glass type, fiber- optic multimode graded -index cables with the following operational and construction features: 1. Multi -mode Fibers: a. Cable Type shall be Corning ALTOS One Indoor/Outdoor Tight -Buffered Cable. b. Number of Fibers: 6 minimum or as listed on Drawings. c. Core Diameter: 50 microns or as listed on Drawings. d. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns or as listed on Drawings. e. Fiber Category: style 0M2 or 0M3. f. Subunit Size: 2.0 mm or as listed on Drawings. JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt #200-41125-16005 13413-3 062117 g. Maximum Attenuation: Less than 2.5 dB/km at 850 nm and less than 1 dB/km at 1300 nm. h. Minimum Bandwidth: Greater than 1000 MHz -km. i. Minimum Bend Radius (Unloaded): 10 cm (3.1 in). j. Operating Temperature Range: -20 to +70 degrees C. 2. Single -mode Fibers: a. Cable Type shall be Corning FREEDM One Indoor/Outdoor Tight - Buffered Cable. b. Number of Fibers: 6 minimum or as listed on Drawings. c. Core Diameter: 9 microns or as listed on Drawings. d. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns or as listed on Drawings. e. Subunit Size: 2.0 mm or as listed on Drawings. f. Maximum Attenuation: Less than 0.5 dB/1,350 nm. g. Minimum Bandwidth: Greater than 1000 MHz -km. h. Minimum Bend Radius (Unloaded): 10 cm (3.1 in). i. Operating Temperature range: -20 to +70 degrees C. C. FO Connectors: Stainless steel, fiber-optic cable connectors, capable of terminating FO glass cables with diameters from 8 through 1,000 microns. Fabricate connectors with optical fiber, self -centering, axial alignment mechanisms. Select ST or SC style connectors as required or shown on Drawings. Connectors shall have an insertion loss of 0.5dB or better. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions with the Installer present for compliance with requirements, and other conditions affecting the performance of optical fiber cabling system. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt #200-41125-16005 13413-4 062117 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fiber-optic cables and associated equipment and devices in accordance with industry standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fiber-optic cable without damage to fibers, cladding, or jacket. Ensure that media manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded. Do not, at any time, bend cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. C. Install FO cables simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate cable materials. Do not use soap. Use a pulling means, including fish tape, rope, and basket -weave grips, that will not damage media or raceway. D. No splices are allowed, except at indicated splice points. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Provide grounding connections for other system components as required by manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 APPLICATIONS A. Install optical fiber cabling for project applications as detailed on drawings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Testing shall be done by CONTRACTOR with at least 5 years of experience in testing fiber-optic cabling systems. CONTRACTOR shall test each fiber strand. OWNER reserves the right to have representation present during all or a portion of the testing process. CONTRACTOR must notify OWNER 5 days prior to commencement of testing. If OWNER elects to be present during testing, test results will only be acceptable when conducted in the presence of OWNER. Any fiber-optic cable left non -terminated at the discretion of OWNER, shall be tested using an adequate light source to determine that all installed strands are not damaged. B. Fiber -Optics Cable: Each fiber strand shall undergo bi-directional testing for signal attenuation losses using power meter and light source. Testing shall also include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) at both 850 and 1,300 nanometers for all installed fiber strands. 1. Recommended Test Equipment: a. Multimode: Siecor OM -100F and OS -100D or equivalent power meter and Tight source. b. Multimode: Siecor OTDRPIus with appropriate modules for testing. JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt #200-41125-16005 13413-5 062117 2. Tests: a. Multi -mode: Bi-directional signal attenuation at 850 and 1,300 nm. b. Single -mode: Bi-directional signal attenuation at 850 and 1,300 nm. 3. Test Criteria: Signal loss of less than 10 dB through entire fiber path, including cable, couplers and jumpers. C. Documentation (Fiber Optic): CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation to include test results and as -built Drawings. Fiber Test Results: The results of the fiber testing shall be entered into the form "Fiber Attenuation Tests Results." Handwritten results are acceptable provided the test is neat and legible. Copies of test results are not acceptable. Only original signed copies will be acceptable. 1. Each cable installed shall undergo complete testing in accordance with TIA/EIA TSB -67 to guarantee performance to this standard. 2. All required documentation shall be submitted within 30 days at conclusion of the project to OWNER. 3. Test Criteria: Pass rate to conform to latest TIA/EIA Standards that incorporate Zink performance testing through entire path, including cable, couplers, and jumpers. D. Acceptance: Acceptance of the Data Communications System, by OWNER, shall be based on the results of testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean optical fiber cabling and components of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. JCR/sc/specs/13413 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13413-6 062117 SECTION 13423 LEVEL MEASUREMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Sonic level transmitter. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 13410, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Sonic Level Transmitter: a. Delta Controls Corp. b. Environmental Monitoring. c. Pulsar, Inc. d. Milltronics. 2.02 SONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. Sonic level device shall be microprocessor -based and include sensing head, control cabinet, and cable between head and control cabinet. B. Length of cable shall be sufficient for application shown. C. Sensor shall automatically compensate for ambient temperature changes. D. CONTRACTOR, equipment supplier, and manufacturer shall examine Drawings for each installation to determine equipment supplied will work in each application. JCR/sc/specs/13423 Tt#200-41125-16005 13423-1 062117 E. Drawings shall contain a typical installation detail and show location of sensors. F. Equipment supplier must ensure beam angle of sensor shall not have interference from walls, pipes, or other objects at each location. Shop Drawings shall be specific about model numbers at each location, and detail sketches showing mounting height, zero dimensions, span dimensions, and beam angle data for each location. G. Any device that will not function reliably to specifications in its application shall be replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. H. Sonic sensor head shall be intrinsically safe for NEMA 7 areas (explosion -proof). Sensor head shall be epoxy -coated metal, encapsulated or mylar for corrosion resistance. Sensor head and reflector shall contain a thermostatically controlled heater for outdoor application for manufacturers that require sensor head heater for operation down to - 20 degrees F. Sonic frequency shall be less than 45 kHz. Frequencies above this range will not be accepted. J. Control cabinet shall be supplied rated NEMA 4 or as shown on Drawings. Control cabinet shall contain a receiver processor, a full -hinged front door, a control cabinet thermostat controlled heater for -20 degrees F operation, and local digital indicator configured in engineering units. K. Connections to controller and sonic sensor shall be with well -marked terminal blocks. L. Field adjustments shall be made through membrane keypads. Units requiring the use of an oscilloscope will not be accepted. M. Operational Data: 1. Temperature: Sensor to operate within specifications over -20 degrees F to 150 degrees F. Controller shall operate from 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F without heater, and -20 degrees F with a heater. 2. Pulse Rate: 1.5 pps minimum sensing rate. 3. Operating Frequency: Less than 45 kHz. 4. Reflection Blocking: Adjustable receiver blanking to operate only on first pulse received. 5. Cable Length: Sensor and controller may be separated up to 500 feet. 6. AGC: Automatic gain control to maximize signal to noise ratio. JCR/sc/specs/13423 Tt #200-41125-16005 13423-2 062117 7. System Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.0 percent of full scale over the complete temperature range. 8. Power Supply: 120 volt AC plus or minus 10 percent at 60 hertz with power consumption of 100 watts maximum exclusive of controller heaters. 9. Output: 4-20 mA output linear with level into 0-700 ohms. Output shall be isolated, floating to prevent system ground loops when used with other control loops that have an established common at a remote location. Output time constant shall be adjustable through keypad from 1 to 10 seconds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination, Installation, Field Quality Control, Demonstration: In accordance with Section 13410. END OF SECTION JCR/sc/specs/13423 Tt #200-41125-16005 13423-3 062117 SECTION 13424 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Pressure switch. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 13410, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Pressure Switch: a. Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 836T. b. Mercoid Corp., Series D. c. Square D, Class 9012. d. United Electric Controls Co., Series 100 or 400. 2.02 PRESSURE SWITCH A. Pressure switches shall be rated 3 amp at 120 volt AC with SPDT or DPDT contacts as shown on Drawings. B. Pressure switches shall have an adjustable differential. The pressure range shall be 0-75 psi. C. Proper ranges and NEMA 12, 4 or 7 housing requirements shall be as shown on Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall obtain the proper device for each application. JCR/sc/specs/13424 Tt#200-41125-16005 13424-1 062117 D. If there is insufficient data on Drawings to determine range, overpressure, differential, and number of poles on switch, CONTRACTOR shall obtain information from ENGINEER. E. Shop Drawing shall show switch model number, range, differential, overpressure, contact data, and ENGINEER's number for each device. F. Single -pole switches and a relay will not be accepted as a substitute for 2 -pole switches. Two single -pole switches individually set will not be accepted as a substitute for 2 -pole switches. G. Pressure switch parameters vary greatly with manufacturers. If, in the judgment of ENGINEER, pressure switch submitted is operating at limits of range, overpressure, or differential, it will not be accepted if another manufacturer has a more appropriate device for application. H. The process connection will be equipped with a diaphragm seal to protect the switch from the process fluid as specified in Section 15100 2.02 L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination, Installation, Field Quality Control, Demonstration: In accordance with Section 13410. JCR/sc/specs/13424 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13424-2 062117 SECTION 13491 SPARE PARTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Instrumentation system spare parts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 13410, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Spare Parts List: Submit a list of recommended spare parts for the equipment provided as part of the instrumentation system. 1.03 DELIVERY A. Deliver spare parts to OWNER prior to final acceptance of instrumentation system and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPARE PARTS A. Equipment spare parts as required for 1 year shall be provided and stored at Site by CONTRACTOR. B. Spares consumed during construction shall be replaced at no cost to OWNER until equipment is accepted as defined in Specification. C. Provide the following: 1. One spare relay of each type used, including time -delay relays. D. Provide the following: 1. On systems employing PLCs, provide 1 spare circuit card of each type used in delivered equipment. Circuit cards shall include the following (matching units in service): a. Analog input card. JCR/sc/specs/13491 Tt #200-41125-16005 13491-1 062117 b. Analog output card. c. Discrete input card. d. Discrete output card. 2. Provide a box of fuses for each size and type used. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) JCR/sc/specs/13491 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 13491-2 062117 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MECHANICAL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 15 SECTION 15044 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section specifies the leakage testing requirements for plant piping. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere (not applicable) C. General Design (not applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Pressures: At a minimum, all pipe shall be tested at 1.5 times the normal working pressure of the pipe. 1. Normal working pressure: 30 psi 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings (Not Applicable) B. Additional Information: 1. Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information that follows: a. Testing dates. b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. c. Test type. d. Method of isolation. e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be tested. 2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Report. P M W/a b/specs/15044 Tt #200-41125-16005 15044-1 062617 4. Testing Records: a. Provide a record of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include: 1) Date of test. 2) Identification of pipeline tested or retested. 3) Identification of pipeline material. 4) Identification of pipe specification. 5) Test fluid. 6) Test pressure. 7) Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made. 8) Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications. 9) Signature of Owner's representative witnessing pipe test. b. Submit five (5) copies of the test records to the Engineer's representative upon completion of the testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Testing fluid shall be clean water for all piping except air service and shall be of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping system for all hydrostatic tests. Air piping shall be tested using compressed air. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide pressure gauges, necessary bracing and restraint, test plugs, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, and meters to perform the hydrostatic and pneumatic testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Pipes shall be in place and anchored before commencing pressure testing. B. Conduct hydrostatic and pneumatic tests on exposed and aboveground piping after the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters. C. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes. P M W/a b/specs/15044 Tt #200-41125-16005 15044-2 062617 D. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove caps or flanges and connect to the existing piping. E. Conduct hydrostatic tests on buried pipe after the trench has been completely backfilled. The pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for inspection for an initial leakage test. Perform the final test, however, after completely backfilling and compacting the trench. F. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping with grooved -end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, blind flanges, or as acceptable to ENGINEER. G. Items that do not require testing include: Piping between wet wells and wetwell isolation valves, equipment seal drains, tank overflows to atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents. H. Gravity Piping: 1. Perform testing after service connections, manholes, and backfilling have been completed between stations to be tested. 2. Determine groundwater level at time of testing by exploratory holes or other method acceptable to ENGINEER. Pressure Test: 1. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Owner or Engineer and also, to the satisfaction of any local or state inspector having jurisdiction. a. Provide not less than three (3) days notice to the Owner, Engineer, and the authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the tests. b. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Engineer shall be retested in part or in whole as directed by the Engineer. c. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work progresses, but no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested. 2. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation. 3. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or on account of the tests. PMW/ab/specs/15044 Tt#200-41125-16005 15044-3 062617 3.02 INSTALLATION (Not Applicable) 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Hydrostatic Testing of Aboveground or Exposed Piping: The maximum filling velocity shall be 0.25 feet per second, applied over full area of pipe. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of four (4) hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves, and connections for Teaks. The piping system shall show no leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until no leakage is obtained. B. Hydrostatic Testing of Buried Piping: 1. Test after backfilling has been completed. Expel air from piping system during filling. 2. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or encasement, do not make the pressure test until at least 10 days after the concrete has been poured. When testing mortar -lined piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb water before conducting the pressure test. 3. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum duration of four (4) hours. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the pressure during the four hours. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage rate is defined by the formula. L = SD(P)i 2 133,200 in which: L = allowable leakage (gallons/hour) during the test period. S = length of pipe, in feet D = diameter of the pipe (inches) P = specified test pressure (psig) 3. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed. C. Pneumatic Test for Pressure Piping: 1. Do not perform on PVC or CPVC pipe. 2. Fluid: Oil -free, dry air. PM W/ab/specs/15044 Tt #200-41125-16005 15044-4 062617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Procedure: a. Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible Teaks. Apply soap bubble mixture to joints and connections, examine for leakage. b. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are corrected. c. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure. Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached. d. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of 10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap bubble examination for leakage. e. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 4. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage. 5. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process. D. Hydrostatic Test for Gravity Piping: 1. Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2 gallon of water leakage under specified conditions. 2. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallon per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to minimum head specified. 3. Gravity Sanitary and Roof Drain Piping: Test with 15 feet of water to include highest horizontal vent in filled piping. Where vertical drain and vent systems exceed 15 feet in height, test systems in 15 -foot vertical sections as piping is installed. 4. Exfiltration Test: a. Hydrostatic Head: 1) At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater level in section being tested. P M W/a b/specs/15044 Tt #200-41125-16005 15044-5 062617 2) No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in test section, including service connections. 5. Infiltration Test: a. Groundwater Level: At least 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in test section, including service connections. 6. Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a pressure test. 7. Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest as specified. E. Test Pressure: 1. At a minimum, all pipe shall be tested at 1.5 times the normal working pressure of the pipe. a. Normal working pressure: 30 psi 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (NOT APPLICABLE) P M W/a b/specs/15044 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 15044-6 062617 SECTION 15070 SCHEDULE 80 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install and test in the locations as shown on the Drawings, the Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride piping, fittings and appurtenances specified herein. 2. Schedule 80 PVC piping shall be used on all small diameter PVC piping systems (3 inches and smaller in diameter) which includes, but are not limited to, chemical solutions, potable and non -potable water, and sample water. 3. All plastic pipe and fittings shall conform to this specification section whether provided as a part of an equipment "package" or purchased separately by the contractor. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System: Section 09905. 2. High Performance Paints and Coatings: Section 09961. 3. PVC Double Wall Containment Piping: Section 15076. 4. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090. 5. Valves and Appurtences: Section 15100. 6. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Section 15126. 7. Couplings and Connectors: Section 15129. C. General Design: 1. Schedule 80 PVC piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. All plastic pipe and fittings shall conform to this specification section whether provided as a part of an equipment "package" or purchased separately by the Contractor. P M W/vd/specs/15070 Tt#200-41125-16005 15070-1 051517 2. All small diameter pipe, 3 -inch diameter and smaller, shall be made of polyvinyl chloride unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings or in other sections of the specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plastic pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. The equipment shall be manufactured by Spears, IPEX, or an Engineer approved equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340. All products within this specification shall be combined into a single submittal which shall include at least the following: a. Dimensioning and the technical specification for all piping, fittings, and appurtenances to be furnished. b. Letter of Certification from the National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF) stating compliance with Standard 14 and Standard 61. c. Letter from the Manufacturer verifying chemical compatibility of all products to be used in chemical feed systems. B. Additional Information: 1. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified herein, along with the manufacturer's Certificates of Inspection, descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, installation instructions and related information. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high. B. When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for more than 30 days, exposure to direct sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air P M W/vd/specs/15070 Tt #200-41125-16005 15070-2 051517 circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources or hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter. C. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated, or the finished water, or the chemicals used for potable water treatment shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. Manufacturers shall submit an affidavit with the shop drawings indicating approval by the EPA or NSF for the materials used in products that come into contact with the water and chemicals used to treat the water, in accordance with Rule 62-555.320(3) Florida Administrative Code. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. PVC Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be made of polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 80 pipe, conforming to ASTM D1785. Schedule 80 pipe shall have solvent welded joints. Threaded connections are permissible when connecting to valves or other equipment where solvent weld connections are not an option. Connection of PVC female threads to metal male threads are not allowable. B. Fittings: 1. Fittings for Schedule 80 pipe 4 inches and smaller in diameter shall be socket type, solvent welded in conformance with ASTM D 2467. When permitted, threaded joints shall be in conformance with ASTM D 2464. Solvent welded and P M W/vd/specs/15070 Tt #200-41125-16005 15070-3 051517 threaded joints shall be watertight. Chlorine solution lines shall have solvent welded fittings. 2. Fittings for Schedule 80 pipe greater than 4 inches in diameter shall be socket type, solvent welded in conformance with ASTM D 2467. Fittings shall be a 1 - piece injection molded design. Use of low pressure fabricated PVC fittings will not be permitted. C. Solvent Cement: 1. PVC solvent cement shall be in compliance with ASTM D 2564. 2. Solvent cement shall be specified by compatibility based on pipe service and size. Large diameter joints shall be solvent welded with slow setting solvent cement. 3. Manufacturer to provide certification with submittal. 4. All PVC chemical feed piping joints are to be solvent welded using CPVC solvent cement. D. Flanges: 1. Slip-on flanges shall be provided to connect to flanged valves, fittings, or equipment. Flanges shall match the connecting flanges on the adjacent fitting, valve or piece of equipment and must meet the test pressure of the piping system as specified in Section 15044. 2. Flange hardware (bolts, nuts, and washers) for PVC flanges shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593 and F594, respectively. The length such that, after installation, bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch beyond the outer face of the nut. Flat Washers shall be of the same material as the bolts. 3. Flange gaskets shall be EPDM for water service. For chemical feed piping systems, the gasket material shall be selected by the gasket manufacturer based on the chemical concentrations as specified in Section 15090: Chemical Feed System Piping. 2.03 ACCESSORIES (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. All special tools, solvents, lubricants, and cements required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. P M W/vd/specs/15070 Tt #200-41125-16005 15070-4 051517 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for project. 'PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install PVC pipe where shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. B. Joints for Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded, flanged, or threaded. All joints shall be made watertight. All pipe cutting, threading and jointing procedures for solvent welded and threaded PVC pipe joints shall be in strict accordance with the pipe and fittings manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Thread lubricant for threaded joints shall be Teflon tape only. In making solvent welded connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth, if necessary and apply solvent cement of proper grade. C. Installation of valves and fittings shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Particular care shall be taken not to over -stress threaded connections at sleeves. In making solvent weld connections the solvent shall not be spilled on valves or allowed to run from joints. D. All piping shall have sufficient number of unions to allow convenient removal and shall be as approved by the Engineer. E. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify their locations from approved piping layout Drawings and the structural Drawings. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 15126. F. Field Painting: 1. Pipe normally exposed to view shall be painted and marked as specified in Section 09905: Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System. G. Jointing: 1. Clean each pipe length, coupling and fitting of all debris and dirt before installation. PM W/vd/specs/15070 Tt#200-41125-16005 15070-5 051517 2. Do not use pipe length if there are any cuts, abrasions, or defects on the surface of the pipe. 3. Provide and use coupling pullers for joining the pipe when required. 4. Shove home each length of pipe against the pipe previously laid and hold securely in position. 5. Do not pull or cramp joints. H. Fabrication: 1. Cutting: a. Use a hand saw or pipe cutter with blades (not rollers). b. Examine all cut ends for possible cracks caused by cutting. 2. Connecting: a. Solvent weld connections are recommended by the manufacturer. b. Connect pipe and fittings only when temperature is above the minimum recommended by the manufacturer. c. Threaded adapters shall be connected only with plastic male into metal female. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All PVC piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested and flushed in accordance with the requirements in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (NOT APPLICABLE) P M W/vd/specs/15070 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 15070-6 051517 SECTION 15076 DOUBLE WALL CONTAINMENT PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install and test the double wall containment piping, fittings and appurtenances specified herein. Double wall containment piping systems are required for all hydrofluosilicic acid lines. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. High Performance Paints and Coatings: Section 09961. 2. Piping, Valve, and Equipment Identification System: Section 09905. 3. Pressure Testing of Piping: Section 15044. 4. Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Section 15070. 5. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090 6. Valves and Appurtenances: Section 15100. 7. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Section 15126. C. General Design: 1. Double wall containment piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. All plastic pipe and fittings shall conform to this specification section whether provided as a part of an equipment "package" or purchased separately by the Contractor. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All double wall containment piping, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. 1CR/sc/specs/15076 Tt#200-41125-16005 15076-1 062317 B. Solvent welder shall be qualified in accordance with Chapter VII of the ASME B31.3-93 Code, Part 9, Paragraph A328. C. Double wall containment pipe shall be as manufactured by Asahi, Ipex Guardian, or Engineer approved equal. The manufacturer should have at least five years experience and proven product reliability. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340 and shall include dimensioning and the technical specification for all piping to be furnished. B. Additional Information: 1. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified herein, along with the manufacturer's Certificates of Inspection, descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, installation instructions and related information. C. Operating Instructions (Not Applicable) 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Double wall containment pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high. B. When it is necessary to store double wall containment pipe for more than 30 days, exposure to direct sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. Double wall containment pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources or hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter. C. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. JCR/sc/specs/15076 Tt #200-41125-16005 15076-2 062317 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All double wall containment piping system components shall be pre-engineered, factory fabricated, tested, and assembled such that field assembly is minimized to primarily that of straight joints. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Carrier Pipe: 1. Unless specified otherwise, pipe shall be made of either polyvinyl chloride or chlorinated polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 80 pipe, conforming to ASTM D1784 depending on the service. Pipe material shall match the pipe material called out in Section 15070 for each chemical service. Schedule 80 pipe shall have solvent welded socket type joints. Supply straight sections in 20 -foot or random lengths. B. Containment Pipe 1. Pipe shall be made of polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D1784. Two-piece clamshell style containment fittings shall not be allowed. C. Fittings: 1. Fittings for Schedule 80 pipe shall be socket type, solvent welded in conformance with ASTM D2464 or D2467. Solvent welded joints shall be watertight. D. Solvent Cement: 1. CPVC solvent cement shall be in compliance with ASTM D2564. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Leak Monitor Stations: 1. Leak monitor stations shall consist of an outer wall outlet with manual drain valve on the pipe invert to manually monitor the integrity of the primary pipe system. Locate leak monitoring station at collection system low points. JCR/sc/specs/15076 Tt#200-41125-16005 15076-3 062317 B. Vent Stations: 1. Vent stations shall consist of an outer wall outlet with manual drain valve and vent line on the pipe invert to vent pressurized vapors which build in the annular space between the primary and secondary pipe walls. Locate vents at collection system high points. C. Centering Devices: 1. Centering and support carrier pipe within the containment pipe with centering devices. Locate not less than every 9 feet or within 24 inches of the termination of the containment pipe on all fabricated pieces. 2. Install centering devices such that leak detection cable (if specified) will be unrestricted and such that the system maintains free drainage. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. All special tools, solvents, lubricants, and cements required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (Not Applicable) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install double wall containment pipe where shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. B. Joints for double wall containment pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded or threaded. All joints shall be made watertight. All pipe cutting, threading and jointing procedures for solvent welded pipe joints shall be in strict accordance with the pipe and fittings manufacturer's printed installation instructions. In making solvent welded connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth, if necessary and apply solvent cement of proper grade. C. Installation of valves and fittings shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Particular care shall be taken not to over -stress threaded connections at sleeves. In making solvent weld connections the solvent shall not be spilled on valves or allowed to run from joints. JCR/sc/specs/15076 Tt #200-41125-16005 15076-4 062317 D. All piping shall have sufficient number of unions to allow convenient removal and shall be as approved by the Engineer. E. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify their locations from approved piping layout Drawings and the structural Drawings. F. All valves and equipment shall be supported independently from the pipe. Anchor valves such that the turning moment resulting from their operation will not be transmitted to the pipe. G. Field Painting: 1. Pipe normally exposed to view shall be painted and marked as specified in Section 09905: Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All PVC and CPVC carrier piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested and flushed in accordance with the requirements in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. B. Secondary containment piping shall be tested with low-pressure air at 5 psig for 24 hours in accordance with the requirements in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. C. Following installation and testing: 1. Flush clean the carrier and containment piping system. 2. Purge the annular space of moisture with clean, dry air. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide manufacturer's representative to provide recommended installation training and instructions for system tests, and containment pipe joint closure. Manufacturer's instructional DVD shall be provided to the installing contractor for training and future reference. Manufacturer's representative shall complete a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. Inspection and examination practices shall be according to ASME B31.3-93 for normal fluid service. END OF SECTION JCR/sc/specs/15076 Tt #200-41125-16005 15076-5 062317 SECTION 15090 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope or Work: 1. This section covers furnishing and installation of piping and piping accessories and chemical feed systems for the hyrdofluosilicic acid feed system. 2. Piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances. 3. Material furnished and work performed under this Section shall be coordinated with material and equipment furnished and installed in Section 11241, Chemical Feed System. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Other sections directly related to work covered in this section include the following: 1. Piping, Valve, and Equipment Identification System: Section 09905. 2. High PerFormance Paints and Coatings: Section 09961. 3. Division 15. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. PVC Pipe: As specified in Section 15070. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the following items furnished under this section shall be submitted in accordance with: 1. Expansion joints PVC pipe. P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt #200-41125-16005 15090-1 051517 2. Flange gaskets. 3. PVC chemical service pipe and fittings. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Pipe supports. 1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pipe and fittings shall be handled and stored in a manner which will ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded calipers, and nylon or similar fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated pipe shall be stored off the ground on wide padded skids. Whenever the storage period on the job exceeds 30 days, plastic coated pipe shall be covered or otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight. 1.06 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL (Not Applicable) 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: 1. Materials for polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall be as specified in Section 15070; Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 2. Joints and jointings shall be as specified in Section 15070; Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. B. Fabrication and Manufacture: 1. A union shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded end valve unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping at locations adjacent to devices or equipment which P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt #200-41125-16005 15090-2 051517 may require removal in the future and at locations required by the drawings or specifications. 2. Taps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of pumping units shall be provided with a nipple and a shutoff gauge cock. 3. Pipe hangers and supports shall be provided as specified in Section 15126; Hangers and Supports. F. Options: 1. At the option of the Contractor, threaded joints in piping other than plastic or stainless steel may be made up with teflon thread tape, thread sealer, or a suitable joint compound. Thread tape and joint compound or sealers shall not be used in threaded joints which are to be seal welded. 2.03 ACCESSORIES (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.04 SPARE PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All fittings, couplings, specials, and other exterior surfaces of buried steel piping not protected with plastic coating shall be tape wrapped in the field. All surfaces to be tape wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. Tape wrapping shall be two ply (half lap) application or as required to provide a total installed tape thickness of not Tess than 60 mils. Joints in plastic coated pipe shall be cleaned, primed, and tape wrapped after installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the drawings or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Pipe shall be cut from measurements taken at the site and not from the drawings. All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping to provide P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt #200-41125-16005 15090-3 051517 throughout for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact with building construction so as not to transmit noise resulting from expansion. 3. Stuffing box leakage from water sealed pumps shall be piped to the nearest point of drainage collection. 4. Buried PVC piping shall be "snaked" in the trench and shall be kept as cool as possible during installation. PVC pipe shall be kept shaded and shall be covered with backfill immediately after installation and testing. 5. All piping shall be installed so that lines are readily accessible for cleaning. At changes in direction in all chemical piping, tees shall be provided with extra openings plugged to facilitate cleaning. Teflon thread tape or teflon thread sealer shall be applied to the threads of all plugs so that they can be easily removed. At each point where hose or reinforced plastic tubing is connected to rigid piping, a quick disconnect coupling shall be provided. B. Pipe Joints: Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the requirements which follows. 1. Threaded: a. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI 82.1, NPT, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to remove all burrs. b. Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. 2. Solvent Welded: All joint preparation, cutting and jointing operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the set time recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure testing of solvent welded piping systems shall not be performed until the applicable curing time, set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed. 3. Flanged: Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but not so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. 4. Welded: Welding shall conform to the specifications and recommendations contained in the "Code for Pressure Piping", ANSI B31.1. P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt U200-41125-16005 15090-4 051517 C. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Piping passing through or below concrete or masonry shall be installed through sleeves installed before the concrete is placed or when masonry is laid. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all pipes passing through or below walls or slabs shall be sealed watertight with special rubber gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements. 3. Buried pipe sleeves enclosing chemical -piping shall be sloped to the open end as indicated on the drawings to allow observation of leakage of the chemical piping. The upper end of each sleeve shall be sealed watertight. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All shop applied plastic coatings and tape wrap on pipe or fittings shall be inspected for holidays and other defects after receipt of the pipe or fitting on the job and immediately before installation. All field applied tape wrap on pipe, pipe joints, fittings, and valves shall be inspected for holidays and other defects following completion of wrapping. Inspection of plastic coatings before installation of the pipe or fitting in the sleeve shall be made where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the coating may have been damaged during assembly. Holidays and defects disclosed by inspection shall be repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the coating or tape wrap manufacturer, as applicable. B. Pressure and Leakage Testing: 1. All specified tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor in the presence, and to the satisfaction of, the Engineer. Each piping system shall be tested in accordance with Section 15044 and at a minimum, must experience no loss of pressure for at least one hour. 2. Compressed air or pressure gas shall not be used to test plastic piping unless specifically recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 3. Leakage may be determined by Toss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method acceptable to the Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. 4. Drainage and venting systems shall be tested by filling with water to the level of the highest vent stack. Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Each system shall hold the water for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level. P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt#200-41125-16005 15090-5 051517 5. All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices, shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor and at such time as directed by the Engineer. 6. All joints in piping shall be tight and free from leaks. All joints which are found to leak by observation or during any specified test shall be repaired and tests repeated. C. Cleaning: 1. The inside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, before being placed in service. 2. Lines which have been flushed with water shall be air dried with compressed air immediately following drainage. P M W/vd/specs/15090 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 15090-6 051517 SECTION 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install complete and ready for operation all valves and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings as specified herein. 2. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Ball Valves b. Pressure Relief Valves c. Backpressure Valves d. Check Valves e. Air Operated Shut -Off Valves f. Solenoid Valves g. Valve Operators h. Air Release Valves i. Strainers j. Unions k. Diaphragm Seals B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Piping is included in the respective Sections of Division 15. 2. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Process Piping: Section 15126. 3. Couplings and Connectors: Section 15129. P M W/a b/specs/15100 Tt#200-41125-16004 15100-1 062617 4. Electrical: Division 16. 5. Instrumentation: Division 13. C. General Design: 1. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of water, air, chemicals, etc., depending on the applications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well-established reputable firms who are fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer within 30 days after execution of the contract a schedule of valves to be furnished. The valve schedule shall include valve tags organized by process with the valve manufacturer, supplier, and the date of delivery to the site. B. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 and the General Requirements. In addition, valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that valve design and materials of construction are suitable for the intended service. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificate of Compliance for: a. Electric operators; full compliance with AWWA C540. 2. Tests and inspection data. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled, shipped and stored in accordance with Section 01600: Material and Equipment. PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-2 062617 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's correction period for 1 year after the time of completion and acceptance. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. Provide one (1) replacement set of valve stem packing or seals as applicable for every five valves supplied. No less than one (1) set shall be provided for each type and model of valve supplied. B. Provide one (1) full set of gaskets as applicable for each valve supplied. C. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance shall be supplied with the equipment. D. Provide one (1) handheld actuator programming device for every five (5) electric motor actuators supplied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Valves shall include operator, actuator, extension stem, worm and gear operator, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories as required for a complete and operable installation. B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and all equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer. C. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body. D. Unless specified otherwise, all hardware on the valve and actuator including bolts, washers, and nuts shall be at a minimum Type 316 stainless steel. E. Factory Finishing: 1. Epoxy Lining and Coating: a. NSF approved and in accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise specified. P M W/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-3 062617 b. Either two-part liquid material or heat -activated (fusion) material except only heat -activated material if specified as "fusion" or "fusion bonded" epoxy. c. Minimum 7 -mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances. 2. Exposed Valves: a. In accordance with Section 09961: High Performance Paints and Coatings. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Approved Materials: 1. Brass and bronze valve components and accessories that have surfaces in contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum. 2. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: a. B61, B62, B98 (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139 (Alloy UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, B194, and 8127. B. Ball Valve 1. Valve: Ball valves shall be manufactured of Grade I, Type I, PVC with Teflon seats. Seals shall be Viton with acidic and oxidizing process services. Valve shall be provided with double unions and ball blocking feature. 2. Operator: Handle. 3. Pressure: 150 psi @ 73°F. 4. Plast -O -Matic True Blue, Asahi/America Type 21 Ball Valve, or approved equal. C. Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Valve: Pressure relief valve shall be of the angle pattern design and manufactured of Grade 1, Type 1, PVC with a Teflon shaft and Viton seals. Valve shall be provided with threaded -end connections. Bolts, nuts, locks, and fasteners will be 316 stainless steel. There will be no metal parts in contact with the process fluid. 2. Operator: Adjusting screw. PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-4 062617 3. Pressure: Maximum inlet pressure: 150 psi Set pressure for chemical service: 60 psi Set pressure for transfer pump: 5 psi 4. Plast -O -Matic, Blacoh, Simtech, or approved equal. D. Backpressure Valves: 1. Valve: The back pressure sustaining valve shall throttle to maintain a pre-set pressure on the upstream side of the valve. If upstream pressure drops below valve setting, the valve will close. Turning clockwise on the sustaining pilot handwheel will increase the setting and turning counterclockwise will decrease the setting. Backpressure valve shall be of the in-line pattern design and manufactured of PVC with Teflon wetted diaphragm, zinc plated steel spring, and HDPE adjusting screw. Valve shall be supplied with 316 stainless steel hardware. 2. Operator: Adjusting screw. 3. Pressure: Maximum inlet pressure: 150 psi Set point for chemical service: 30 psi 4. Plast -O -Matic, Blacoh, Simtech, or approved equal. E. Check Valves: 1. Ball Check Valve a. Ball check valve shall be manufactured PVC body with FKM seals, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation with equal effectiveness. Valves shall be provided with double true unions. The maximum opening pressure shall be less than 0.3 psi and the maximum sealing pressure shall be 1 psi. The spring shall be stainless steel coated with ETFE. b. Pressure: 150 psi @ 70°F for %2"- 2" 100 psi @ 70°F for 3" and 4" c. Manufacturer: Asahi/America or Hayward True Check, or approved equal. d. Service: Chemical Feed Line PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-5 062617 2. Wafer Check Valve a. Wafer check valve with spring shall be PVC body with FKM seals and designed for vertical installation. b. Pressure: 150 psi @ 70°F c. Manufacturer: Asahi/America, or approved equal. d. Service: Chemical Bulk Tank Vent F. Air Operated Shut -Off Valves 1. Compact globe style shut-off valve with PVC body with FKM seals. Valve shall close automatically via spring when air is shut off to valve. The valve shall be full open with 50 psi air pressure. There will be no metal parts in contact with the process fluid. 2. Pressure: 150 psi @ 77°F 3. Manufacturer: Plast -O -Matic Model BSR, or approved equal. 4. Service: Chemical Feed Line G. Solenoid Valves 1. 3 -way normally closed 120 V solenoid valve with Stainless Steel body. Valve shall set normally closed condition to close off air flow to the air operated chemical transfer pump and air operated shut off valve, while allowing the pump and valve to return to atmospheric pressure. When energized, the solenoid valve will close off the branch that is open to atmosphere and allow air to be directed to the pump and valve. 2. Pressure: 150 psi @ 70°F 3. Asco Red Hat, or approved equal. 4. Service: Air H. Valve Operators: 1. General: PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 a. Size all operators to operate the valve at 150% of the valve's full -rated pressure. 15100-6 062617 b. Valve operators, handwheels or levers shall open by turning counter- clockwise. c. Non -buried (exposed) valve operators shall be furnished with chainwheel operators, geared operators, extension stems, floor stands, and other elements to permit operation from the normal operating level. Valves located in process piping trenches, vaults, clearwells, wetwells, sumps and similar confined spaces shall be furnished with all necessary appurtenances to allow valve operation from the finished floor or above -grade level. 2. Manual Operators: a. Manual operators include handwheel, chainwheel, lever and handle type operators. When the maximum force to operate a valve under full operating head exceeds 40 pounds, gear reduction operators shall be provided. b. Lever Operator: 1) Lever shall be fabricated steel. They shall include a set screw and grease lubricated. 2) Operator shall be capable of being locked in any position and shall be provided within adjustable memory stop. c. Handwheel: 1) Gate operators shall be selected so that no more than 40 pounds (Ib) effort on the operator will be required to open or close a gate. Gate operators shall be located at a maximum height of 42 -inches above the structure. When the normal yoke elevation is above 42 -inches above structure, the geared lift shall be coupled to a 90 degree bevel gear box by means of a floating shaft and lovejoy couplings. This gearbox shall be mounted on the edge of the self-contained yoke. All shafts and couplings shall be Type 304 stainless steel and aligned to acceptable coupling tolerance. All cast iron gearbox housings shall be epoxy coated in accordance with Section 09961: High Performance Paints and Coatings. 2) All operators shall be geared and shall have a weatherproof cast iron housing or pedestal with a bronze operating nut. An effective gear ratio of at least 2:1 is required. 3) Operator shall include position indicator and self-locking feature to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-7 062617 PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 4) Gear operators shall be totally enclosed and lubricated. Operators shall be grease lubricated and provided with grease fittings. 5) Handwheel operators supplied with floorstands and benchstands shall be self-locking at any position of stem travel. Cranks and handwheels shall be cast iron and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Cranks shall be no less than 12 -inches long and shall be keyed to the operating nut. Handwheels shall not have a diameter greater than 30 -inches. 6) Self-locking gear shall be a one-piece design of gear bronze material (ASTM B 427), accurately machine cut. The sector gear shall be hardened alloy steel (ASTM A 322), grade G41500 or ASTM -A 148, Grade 105-85, with thread ground and polished. The reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. c. Chainwheel: 1) Where valve location is not accessible from a standing position at a walkway or slab floor, Chainwheel operators shall be provided. Gearboxes shall be as specified for handwheel operators above, only with a chainwheel and chain guide assem bly. 2) Chain shall be type 304 stainless steel for ferrous valves, and type 316 stainless steel for stainless steel and thermoplastic valves and for valves located in chemical or corrosive process areas. d. Buried Operators: 1) Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall have a 2 -inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 -inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation for forked key. All moving parts of the valve and operators shall be enclosed in a housing to prevent contact with the soil. 2) Buried service operators for quarter -turn valves shall be designed to withstand 450 foot-pounds of input torque at the fully open or fully closed positions without damage to the valve or operator and shall be grease packed and gasketed to withstand a submersion in water to 10 psi. 3) Valves shall be installed with extension stems, as required, and valve boxes. 15100-8 062617 Air Release Valve: 1. Valve: Automatic Air Release Valve for low pressure process systems shall be a single chamber design, directly operated by the flow medium. The top shall be 316 stainless steel or PVC, the bottom housing shall be PVC and the diaphragm shall be Teflon. 2. Pressure: 1" NPT connections - 250 psi at 140°F. 3. A.R.I. Model S-050 LP, equal model by Hayward, or Engineer approved equal. J. Strainers: 1. Strainers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and shall be of the "Y" type. Strainers for water service shall have bronze bodies with a removable bronze screen. K. Nonmetallic Unions: 1. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds malleable iron, zinc -coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be flange pattern, 125 -pound class, zinc -coated. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of the best quality fiber, plastic, or leather. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. L. Diaphragm Seals: 1. Diaphragm seals shall be installed on pressure gauge connections to protect pressure gauges and switches used to monitor pressures from excessive pressures. The diaphragm shall be "thread attached" to both piping and pressure switches. The top housing, bottom housing and diaphragm shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, except that the bottom housing of all diaphragm seals connected to PVC or CPVC lines shall be constructed of matching material. 2. Diaphragm seals shall have a flushing connection and be Type TH by Mansfield and Green, equal product manufactured by Trerice or Marshalltown, Instruments, or approved equal. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 1. Valve boxes for Buried Service Valves: a. Valve boxes shall be three-piece sliding type cast iron with extension shafts. Units shall be Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. P M W/a b/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-9 062617 b. Extension pipe shall be cast iron cut to fit finished grade. Coat buried cast iron pieces with coal tar epoxy. 2. Extension Stems for Buried Valve Operators: a. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than four feet below grade, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point of six inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. b. Extension stems shall be steel and shall be complete with a two-inch operating nut. c. Where the location of the valve is such that it is located directly below another pipe, install the gear reducing operator on the side of the valve with the operating nut in the vertical position to provide easy access to the operator. 3. Valve Tags: a. Each valve operator shall be provided with a 1 -1/2 -inch minimum diameter stainless steel tag. Each tag shall bear the valve number shown on the Drawings. The tags shall be attached to the operator with stainless steel key rings so that ring and tag cannot be removed. The numbers and letters shall be of block type, with 1/4 -inch high numbers and letters stamped thereon. 2.04 MONITORING AND CONTROL A. The supplier of equipment under this section is responsible for coordinating with the I&C System Supplier to ensure that its equipment is compatible with and provides all necessary ancillary and accessory equipment to accept control signals provided by the SCADA system and provide monitoring and feedback signals to the SCADA system that are specified in Section 13410: Basic Instrumentation Requirements. 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All exterior surfaces of iron body valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. P M W/a b/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-10 062617 B. For valves installed underground or in valve vaults, all exterior ferrous parts or valve and actuator shall be coated at the factory with a thermally bonded epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision, or with coal tar epoxy. Coal tar epoxy shall be applied in two 8 mil dry film thickness coats for a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 16 mils. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other part of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy. The coal tar epoxy shall be Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M, Americoat No. 78, or approved equal. C. For above -ground service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated as follows: 1. Prior to shipment from the factory, valves shall be coated with a thermally bonded epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision, or shall be shop painted with one coat, 1.5 mils dry film thickness, of a combination lead and chromate primer with rust -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. 2. Following installation in the field, valves shall be painted with one coat, 1.5 mils dry film thickness, of a combination lead and chromate primer with rust - inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Valves shall be finish painted with two coats, 1.5 mils dry film thickness each coat, of a medium to long oil alkyd resin coating. Field applied coatings shall be as manufactured by the Carboline or an equal approved by the Engineer. The color of the finish coats shall be in accordance with the piping color code in the painting schedule. D. All exterior surfaces of stainless steel valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and surface contaminants. Stainless steel castings shall be of a smooth, bright, pit -free appearance. Fabricated stainless steel valve bodies shall be pickled and passivated following the fabrication process to remove surface contaminants. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on their location and the Contractor shall PMW/ab/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-11 062617 be responsible for the proper location of these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the respective pipe sections in Division 15. E. Flanged joints shall be made with bolts, nuts and washers as specified in the respective pipe sections in Division 15. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats of bituminous paint comparable to Inertol No. 66 Special Heavy. F. Pressure gauges shall not be installed until after the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner. G. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed for each buried valve as shown on the Drawings. The valve box shall be centered accurately over the operating nut and the entire assembly shall be plumb. The tops of valve boxes shall be adjusted to the proper elevation as specified below and as shown on the Drawings. 1. In paved areas, top of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement. Following paving operations, a 30 -inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 30 -inch square by 6 -inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 2. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be at least 0.20 foot above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 30 -inch square by 6 -inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 3. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 2 -inch diameter, bronze disc embedded in the surface as shown on the Drawings. The bronze disc shall have the following information neatly stamped on it: the size of the valve; the number of turns to open; the direction to open; and the year of installation. H. Valve Orientation: 1. Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet or Tess above finished floor, unless otherwise shown. 2. Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above finish floor, unless otherwise shown. P M W/a b/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-12 062617 3. If no plug valve seat position is shown, locate as follows: a. Horizontal Flow: The flow shall produce an "unseating" pressure, and the plug shall open into the top half of valve. b. Vertical Flow: Install seat in the highest portion of the valve. I. Install a line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch, or the in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters, for isolation during maintenance. J. Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. Install access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access. K. Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in floor box. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to hydrostatic pressure test for 4 hours at full working pressure. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested as approved by the Engineer. Prior to testing, the gravity pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during tests. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. One (1) person -day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. One (1) person -day for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate or Proper Installation and pre -startup classroom or site training. B. See Section 01650: Start -Up and Demonstration. END OF SECTION P M W/a b/specs/15100 Tt #200-41125-16004 15100-13 062617 SECTION 15126 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install pipe hangers, supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts including all metallic hanging and supporting devices for supporting exposed piping. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Concrete is included in Division 3. 2. Painting is included in Section 09961. 3. Pipe and fittings are included in respective sections of Division 15. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design where possible and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for pipe supports shall be five (5) times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being supported. B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit to the Engineer for approval, as provided in Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples, shop drawings of all items to be furnished under this Section. PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-1 051517 2. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, handled and stored in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with Section 01600: Materials and Equipment. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves, and fittings and to support and cure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe, and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be approved prior to installation. B. The Contractor shall select and design all piping support systems within the specified spans and component requirements. Structural design and selection of support system components shall withstand the dead Toads imposed by the weight of the pipes filled with water, plus any insulation. Commercial pipe supports and hangers shall have a minimum safety factor of 5. C. No attempt has been made to show all required pipe supports in all locations, either on the Drawings or in the details. The absence of pipe supports and details on any drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them throughout the plant. D. All support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts and other devices used to anchor the support onto a concrete base, roof, wall or structural steel works, shall be of the proper size, strength and spacing to withstand the shear and pullout Toads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. E. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of meeting the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP -58. F. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 except that the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet unless otherwise specified herein. PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-2 051517 G. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by ITT Grinnel Co., Inc., Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal. Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific manufacturer is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product, and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item comparable in type, style, quality, design and performance will be considered for approval. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Metal Pipe: 1. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by steel rods from galvanized concrete inserts, beam clamps, or ceiling mounting bolts as follows: a. Hangers Pipe Size, Inches Grinnel Fig. No. Less than 1/2 138R 1/2 through 1 97C 1-1/4 through 4 104 6 through 12 590 14 through 30 171 b. Hanger rods shall be rolled steel machine threaded with Toad ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the following minimum diameters: Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In. Less than 2-1/2 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 1/2 4 5/8 6 3/4 8 to 12 7/8 14 to 18 1 c. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam clamps, for rod sizes 1/2 -inch through 3/4 -inch shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8 -inch through 1-1/4 inches shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. No. 228, or equal. d. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be; continuous metal inserts designed to be used in ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers, or ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers and shall be as manufactured by Unistrut Corp., Wayne, Michigan; PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt#200-41125-16005 15126-3 051517 Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., Laconia, New Hampshire; Richmond or equal and shall be as follows: 1) Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable and/or as shown on the Drawings and shall be used for hanger rod sizes up to and including 3/4 -inch diameter. Inserts to be used where supports are parallel to the main slab reinforcement shall be Series P3200 by Unistrut Corp., Fig 1480 Type 2 by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal. Inserts to be used where supports are perpendicular to the main slab reinforcement shall be Series P3300 by Unistrut Corp., Fig. 1480 Type I by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. or equal. 2) Spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable and shall be used for hanger sizes up to and including 7/8 -inch diameter. Inserts shall be Fig. 650 by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. for hanger rod sizes 1/2 -inch through and including 3/4 -inch, and Fig. 266 by Carpenter and Patterson Inc., for 7/8 -inch hanger rods. 3) Ceiling mounting bolts shall be used where applicable andbe for hanger rod sizes I -inch through and including 1-1/4 inches and shall be Fig. 104M as manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal. e. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as required and where applied, shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. No. 230. 2. Wall or column supported pipes shall be supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnel Fig. 194, 195 and 199 as required, for pipe sizes up to and including 20 -inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. a. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be supported by an anchor chair and U -bolt assembly supported by the bracket for pipes 4 inches and larger and by a U -bolt for pipes smaller than 4 inches. Anchor chairs shall be equal to Carpenter Patterson Fig. No. 127. U -bolts shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. No. 120 and 137. b. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above. 3. Floor supported pipes 3 -inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by either cast -in-place concrete supports or adjustable pipe saddle supports as directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-4 051517 lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where later displacement of pipes is not probable. a. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with temporary supports. Concrete piers shall conform accurately to the bottom 1/3 to 1/2 of the pipe. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete support shall have I -inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to the concrete with cast -in-place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, maximum support height shall be five (5) feet. b. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. c. Each adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the corresponding size 150 pound companion flanges or slip-on welding flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel pipe construction. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. No. 264. Where used under base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle. 4. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: a. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction by pipe supports as previously specified herein. b. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet, pipes shall be supported by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests at all points required to insure a rigid installation. c. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnel Fig. 262. 5. Anchor bolts shall be equal to Kwik -Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota, or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado. 6. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be furnished with galvanized finish. P M W/vd/specs/15126 Tt#200-41125-16005 15126-5 051517 B. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Plastic Pipe: 1. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously specified herein. 2. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber hose. Tray width shall be approximately 6 -inch for single runs of rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc. required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners equal to Globe Model M -CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or approved equal. Spacing between damps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. 3. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact with plastic pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. C. Pipe Supports for Small Diameter PVC and Steel Pipe: 1. Small diameter Schedule 80 PVC piping 3 -inches in diameter and smaller, and steel piping 2 -inches in diameter and smaller shall be supported with "SUSPORT" system arrangements as manufactured by Universal Suspension Systems Inc. of Gillette, New Jersey or an equal approved by the Engineer. Clamping halves for the pipe support shall be manufactured of molded polypropylene and shall support and fit closely for 360° around the pipe. To support piping carrying non -corrosive fluids or gases and located in noncorrosive, indoor environments, all hardware for the "SUSPORT" system shall be nickel chrome plated carbon steel. To support piping carrying corrosive fluids or gases, piping located in corrosive environments or piping located outdoors, all hardware for the system shall be manufactured of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. In some cases, to adequately support small diameter PVC or steel piping, a metal frame support structure may be required for support of the "SUSPORT" system specified above. Where required, metal frame support structures shall be constructed using channels, fittings, brackets, hardware and other accessories as manufactured by B -Line Systems, Inc. of Highland, Illinois, or an equal approved by the Engineer. If located in indoor, non -corrosive environments, the materials for the frame structure shall be carbon steel with an epoxy coating applied by a cathodic, electro -deposition process which is PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-6 051517 equal to "Dura -a -Green" by B -Line Systems, Inc. For corrosive or outdoor environments, the materials for the frame structure be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Hardware used to construct the frame support structure shall be cadmium plated for carbon steel supports or Type 316 stainless steel for stainless steel supports. 3. Pipe supports for small diameter PVC and steel piling shall be located wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to adequately support the pipe, however, they shall have a maximum spacing as specified below for straight pipe runs. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. The following table is based on spacing requirements for Schedule 80 PVC or Standard Weight (Schedule 40) steel pipe carrying a fluid with a Specific Gravity of 1.0 at a temperature not exceeding 120°F. Support spacing for PVC or steel piping carrying fluids with Specific Gravities or temperatures exceeding those stated above shall be approved by the Engineer. Nominal Pipe Support Spacing, Feet Diameter, Inches PVC Pipe Steel Pipe 1/2" 3.5 4.5 3/4" 4.0 5.0 1" 4.5 5.5 1-1/4" 5.0 6.5 1-1/2" 5.0 7.5 2" 5.5 8.0 2-1/2" 5.5 3" 6.0 2.03 ACCESSORIES (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.04 SPARE PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from all mill -scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer. PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt#200-41125-16005 15126-7 051517 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy Primer or approved equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rustinhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa., or equal. C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be applied as specified in Section 09961: High Performance Paints and Coatings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations, and all probable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the Engineer. C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10 feet, 0 -inches with minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 2. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at least 15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps brackets or wall rests, and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. E. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in pipe support selection and installation. F. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. G. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. P M W/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-8 051517 H. Standard Pipe Supports: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes: Adjustable swivel -ring, splint -ring, or clevis hangers. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger systems. c. Furnish galvanized steel protection shield and oversized hangers for all insulated pipe. d. Furnish precut sections of rigid insulation with vapor barrier at hangers for all insulated pipe. 2. Horizontal Piping Supported From Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets or wall clips attached to wall with anchors. Clips attached to wall mounted framing also acceptable. b. Stacked Piping: 1) Wall mounted framing system and clips acceptable for piping smaller than 3 -inch minimal diameter. 2) Piping clamps which resist axial movement of pipe through support not acceptable. c. Wall mounted piping clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported From Floors: a. Stanchion Type: 1) Pedestal type; adjustable with stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. 2) Use yoke saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18 inches or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. 3) Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring flanges, adjacent to equipment or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation. b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: P M W/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 15126-9 051517 1) Use for piping smaller than 3 -inch nominal diameter running along floors and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports. 2) Attach channel framing to floors with anchor bolts. 3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps. c. Concrete Cradles: Use for piping larger than 3 -inch along floor and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type. 4. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall brackets and base elbow or riser clamps on floor penetrations. 5. Standard Attachments: a. To Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts. b. To Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. c. To Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not Tess than 2-1/2 inches thick. d. To Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with anchor bolts. 6. Existing Walls and Ceilings: Install as specified for new construction, unless shown otherwise. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (NOT APPLICABLE) PMW/vd/specs/15126 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 15126-10 051517 SECTION 15129 COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install couplings and connectors of the type(s) and size(s) in the location(s) shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Pipe supports shall be placed where shown on the Drawings. The Contractor may install additional pipe supports and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing their location, the pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted and approved by the Engineer. Thrust protection shall be adequate to sustain the force developed by 150% of the design operating pressures specified. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Pressure Testing of Piping: Section 15044. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Minimum pressure rating equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be installed. B. Couplings and connectors, other than those specified herein, are subject to the Engineer's approval. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. 2. Submit manufacturer's catalog data on couplings and connectors. Show manufacturer's model or figure number for each type of coupling or joint for each type of pipe material for which couplings are used. 3. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques to which the coupling bolts shall be tightened for the flexible Basketed sleeve -type compression pipe couplings. 4. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show dimensions. P M W/vd/specs/15129 Tt#200-41125-16005 15129-1 051517 5. Show number, size and material of construction of the rods and Tugs for each thrust harness on the project. B. Additional Information (NOT APPLICABLE) C. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (NOT APPLICABLE) 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled, shipped and stored in accordance with Section 01600: Materials and Equipment. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All couplings and connectors shall be restrained. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All Couplings and Connectors: 1. Gasket Materials: Composition suitable for exposure to the liquids to be contained within the pipes as defined within the Contract Specifications. 2. Diameters to properly fit the specified types of pipes on which couplings and connectors are to be installed. B. Sleeve -Type Couplings (when applicable): 1. Exposed couplings (when applicable): a. Steel middle ring. b. Two steel or ductile iron follower rings. c. Two wedge -section gaskets. d. Wedge style restraints. e. Sufficient steel bolts to properly compress the gaskets. PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt #200-41125-16005 15129-2 051517 f. Acceptable manufacturers. 1) Smith - Blair, Inc. - 470 Series Pipe -Lok. 2) Or equal. 2. Buried Couplings (when applicable): a. Steel middle ring. b. Two steel or ductile iron follower rings. c. Two wedge -section gaskets. d. Wedge style restraints. e. Bolts and nuts for buried couplings, shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8 for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8 for nuts. Bolts and nuts greater than 1 1/8 inches shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B, with cadmium plating, ASTM A 165, Type NS. f. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Smith - Blair, Inc. - 470 Series Pipe -Lok. 2) Or equal. C. Split Type (Grooved End) Couplings (when applicable): 1. Constructed from malleable or ductile iron. 2. For use with grooved or shouldered end pipe with minimum wall thickness as required so as not to weaken pipe. 3. Cast in two segments for 3/4 -inch through 14 -inch pipe sizes, four segments for 15 -inch through 24 -inch pipe sizes, and six segments for pipe sizes over 24 -inch. 4. Coating: Enamel 5. Bolts: Carbon steel 6. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company of America, Style 77 b. Gustin-Bacon Co. c. Or equal. PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt #200-41125-16005 15129-3 051517 D. Flanged Adapters (when applicable): 1. For joining plain end or grooved end 2. Adapters shall conform in size and steel and/or cast iron flanges 125 required for connections. pipe to flanged pipes and fittings. bolt hole placement to ANSI standards for or 150 pound standard unless otherwise 3. Exposed Sleeve Type (Ferrous Piping): a. Constructed from steel. b. Coating: Enamel. c. Bolts: Carbon steel. d. Wedge style restraints. e. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Smith -Blair Inc. — 911 or 920 Series Flange -Lok. 2) Or equal. 4. Exposed Sleeve Type (Stainless Steel Piping): a. Construction: Fabricated from Type 316L stainless steel w/ANSI flanges to match the connecting piping. b. Finish: Pickled & Passivated or Electropolished to match connected stainless steel piping. c. Bolts: Type 316 Stainless Steel as specified within Section 15066: Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings. d. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Dresser Manufacturing Co. - Style 128-W with lock pins thrust restraint and other options as detailed above. 2) Or Engineer approved equal. 5. Buried Sleeve Type: a. Constructed from cast iron b. Bolts and nuts for buried sleeves P M W/vd/specs/15129 Tt #200-41125-16005 for shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8 for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 15129-4 051517 8 for nuts and washers. Bolts and nuts greater than 1 1/8 inches shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B, with cadmium plating, ASTM A 165, Type NS c. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Dresser Manufacturing Co. - Style 127 locking type for cast iron, ductile iron, asbestos cement and steel pipes with diameters of 3 inches through 12 inches. 2) Or equal. 6. Split Type (Ferrous Piping): a. Constructed from malleable or ductile iron. b. For use with grooved or shouldered end pipe. c. Coating: Enamel d. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Victaulic Company of America - Style 741 for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 12 inches 2) Victaulic Company of America - Style 742 for pipe diameters of 14 inches through 16 inches. 3) Or equal. 7. Split Type (Stainless Steel Piping): a. Construction: Cast Type 316 Stainless Steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF -8M w/ EPDM gasket material. b. For use with grooved or shouldered end pipe c. Finish: Smooth Electropolished d. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Victaulic Company of America - Style 775 for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 12 inches with pressures Tess than 300 psi. 2) Piedmont Pacific Corporation - Style K for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 8 inches with pressures less than 200 psi, Style B for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 4 inches with pressures less than 300 psi. PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt#200-41125-16005 15129-5 051517 E. Flexible Expansion Joints: 1 Flexible expansion joints shall be of the molded wide single arch design manufactured of neoprene rubber with polyester and steel reinforcement. Neoprene body shall be supplied with a Hypalon coating. Joints shall be flanged suitable for 150 psi water working pressure and in accordance with ANSI B16.1 dimensions and bolting patterns. Flanged ends shall be furnished with galvanized, split ductile iron retaining rings. 2. Provide limit restraint bolts on all lines. Expansion joints 6 inches and larger in size shall have a minimum of four limit restraint bolts. Restraint bolts and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Minimum performance for flexible expansion joints shall be as follows: Axial Lateral Angular Axial Compression Elongation Deflection Deflection Size (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Degrees 2 7/8 1/2 1 30 4 7/8 1/2 1 30 6 7/8 1/2 1 25 8 1-3/8 3/4 1 25 10 1-3/8 3/4 1 20 12 1-3/8 3/4 1 20 4. Flexible expansion joints shall be Maxi -Joint as manufactured by General Rubber Corporation, Style 1101, Metrasphere as manufactured by the Metraflex Company, Style R Neoprene Body, or an equal approved by the Engineer. F. Transition Couplings: Transition couplings for connecting different pipes having different outside diameters shall be steel: Dresser Style 62 or 162, Rockwell Series 413, Baker Series 212 or 240, or equal. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Harnesses: Tie bolts or studs shall be as shown in the following table. Bolt or stud material shall conform to ASTM B 193, Grade B7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 194, Grade 2H. Lug material shall conform to ASTM A 36, ASTM A 283, Grade B, C, or D, or ASTM A 285, Grade C. Lug dimensions shall be as shown in AWWA Manual M11, Table 19.7. PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt #200-41125-16005 15129-6 051517 TIE BOLTS OR STUD REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS Tie Bolt or Stud Minimum Requirements 150 psi 300 psi Nominal Pipe No. Bolts Size No. Bolts or Size Size (Inches) or Studs (Inches) Studs (Inches) 2 2 5/8 2 5/8 3 2 5/8 2 5/8 4 2 5/8 2 4/8 6 2 5/8 2 5/8 8 2 5/8 2 5/8 10 2 5/8 2 5/8 12 2 3/4 2 7/8 14 2 3/4 2 1 16 2 7/8 2 1-1/4 18 2 1 2 1-3/8 20 2 1 2 1-1/2 24 4 1 4 1-1/4 30 4 1-1/8 4 1-1/2 36 4 1-1/4 4 1-3/4 42 4 1-1/2 6 1-5/8 48 6 1-3/8 6 1-7/8 54 6 1-1/2 6 2-1/4 60 6 1-5/8 8 2 66 6 1-3/4 8 2-1/4 72 6 1-7/8 10 2-1/4 84 6 2-1/4 12 2-1/4 96 8 2-1/4 14 2-1/4 2. Select number and size of bolts based on the test pressure shown in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. For test pressures Tess than or equal to 150 psi, use the 150 -psi design in the table above. For test pressures between 150 and 300 psi, use the 300 -psi design in the table above. 3. Provide washer for each lug. Washer material shall be the same as the nuts. Minimum washer thickness shall be 1/8 -inch. B. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanges located indoors and in enclosed vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. 2. Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges, flanges in open vaults and structures, and flanges located outdoors above ground shall be Type 316 PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt#200-41125-16005 15129-7 051517 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. Bolts and nuts greater than 1 1/8 -inches shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B., with cadmium plating, ASTM A 165, Type NS. 3. Bolts used in flange insulation kits shall conform to ASTM B 193, Grade B7. Nuts shall comply with ASTM A 194, Grade 2H. 4. Provide washers for each unit. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts. 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not Applicable) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (Not Applicable) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Sleeve Type Couplings (when applicable): 1. Thoroughly clean pipe ends for a distance of 8 inches from the ends prior to installing couplings, and use soapy water as a gasket lubricant. 2. Slip a follower ring and gasket (in that order) over each pipe and place the middle ring centered over the joint. 3. Insert the other length into the middle ring the proper distance. 4. Press the gaskets and followers evenly and firmly into the middle ring flares. 5. Insert the bolts, finger tighten and progressively tighten diametrically opposite nuts uniformly around the adapter with a torque wrench applying the torque recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Insert and tighten the tapered threaded lock pins. 7. Insert the nuts and bolts for the flange, finger tighten and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the torque recommended by the manufacturer. PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt #200-41125-16005 15129-8 051517 B. Split Type Flange Adapters (when applicable): Install in the same manner as Split Type Couplings. C. Buried Couplings, Adapters and Connectors (when applicable): Thoroughly coat all exterior surfaces, including nuts and bolts, after assembly and inspection by the Engineer with a heavy -bodied bituminous mastic as approved by the Engineer. D. Install thrust rods, supports, and other provisions to properly support pipe weight and axial equipment loads. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Hydrostatically test flexible pipe couplings, and joints, in place with the pipe being tested. Test in accordance with Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. 1 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 1 PMW/vd/specs/15129 Tt#200-41125-16005 15129-9 051517 i SECTION 15130 PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section includes materials and installation of pressure gauges and accessories. B. General Design: Minimum pressure rating shall be equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be installed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of three (3) years' experience in the manufacture of pressure gauges. B. Manufacturers: Gauges and tools shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Trerice, Winters Gauges, Palmer Gauges, or equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. A. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. B. Materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. C. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with the referenced ANSI standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Gauge Design: Gauges shall comply with ANSI B40.1, Grade 2A. Gauges shall incorporate the following features: 1. Solid or open front with side or rear blowout relief. 2. Pressure tight. 3. 270 degree arc with adjustable pointer. 4. Stem mounted. P M W/vd/specs/15130 Tt #200-41125-16005 15130-1 051517 5. Oil or glycerin filled unless specified otherwise. 6. Size of gauge shall be 4-1/2 inches for all process liquid and 6 inches for process air unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 7. Stem or connection size shall be 3/8 inch minimum. 8. Provide a gauge having a pressure range determined by the greater of the following two criteria: a. Two times the normal operating pressure; and b. One and one-third times the test pressure. 9. Gauges of size smaller than 4-1/2 inches shall conform to ANSI B40.1, Grade A. Otherwise, construction shall be as described above. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials of construction shall be as shown in the following table: Item Material Specification 1. Case Stainless steel AISI 316 2. Bourdon tube Stainless steel AISI 316 3. Windows Glass or Plastic 4. Ring Stainless steel AISI 316 5. Stem Stainless steel AISI 316 6. Dial face Aluminum with clear 6061-T6, baked -on acrylic coating ASTM B 209 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Nipples and Fittings: Nipples for connection gauges to piping shall be Schedule 80S, Grade TP 316 seamless stainless steel, conforming to ASTM A 312. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A 403, Class WP316. Threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Size of pipe nipple shall match the gauge connection size. B. Tools for Gauges: Provide one gauge tool kit, containing a hand jack set, screwdriver, five reamers (minimum), two pin vise holders, wiggler, tweezers, and carrying case. C. Gauge Protectors (for use in process piping containing liquids having solids concentration greater than 1.0 percent): 1. Gauge protector shall consist of three parts: a flexible, impermeable, elastomer cylinder; a captive sensing liquid; and a stainless steel housing. 2. As process liquid flows through the housing, the cylinder shall transmit pressure through the sensing liquid. An attached 4-1/2 inch pressure gauge, as specified PMW/vd/specs/15130 Tt #200-41125-16005 15130-2 051517 previously, shall indicate the pressure. Gauge outlet in the spool or ring shall be threaded, 1/4 inch, per ANSI B2.1. 3. Spools of sizes 1 inch through 4 inches shall be of the isolation -spool type with flanged ends. Spools of sizes 6 through 10 inches shall be of the isolation -ring type, fitting between two adjacent flanges. 4. Determine the flange rating based on the test pressure. For test pressure 200 psi and less, use Class 150 flanges, ANSI B16.5. For test pressures greater than 200 psi, use Class 300 flanges, ANSI 816.4. 5. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Item Housing Material Specification Stainless steel AISI 316 Flexible Buna N. or cylinder Neoprene Sensing liquid Silicone oil 6. Protectors shall be manufactured by Ronningen-Petter, Red Valve, or equal. D. Diaphragm Seals (for use in all processing piping containing liquids, except potable and nonpotable water): 1. Provide diaphragm seals with gauge mountings where shown on the drawings. Material of construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Pressure rating shall be at least that of the pressure gauge to which it is attached. Liquid filling shall be silicone. 2. Gauge and diaphragm seal shall be assembled together at the factory, with the liquid fill included. Provide a Type 316 stainless steel plug or cock in the flush connection. 3. Provide one pint of replacement fill liquid for every ten gauges having diaphragm seals or one pint for the entire project, whichever quantity is greater. E. Pressure Snubbers: Provide pressure snubbers with gauge mountings where shown on the Drawings. Material of construction shall be Type 303 or 316 stainless steel. Inlet and outlet connections shall be 1/2 -inch NPT. PMW/vd/specs/15130 Tt #200-41125-16005 15130-3 051517 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Install gauges before conducting pressure tests. Ream, clean and remove burrs from threaded piping before making up joints. Apply thread lubricant to threaded ends before assembling. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING: A. Compare pressure readings of permanent gauges with Master test gauge. If reading of installed gauges varies by more than ± 5 percent from the Master gauge the installed gauge shall be replaced. B. Provide factory certification of testing and calibration for each Annular Seal or Diaphragm Seal Assembly. Unit shall be tested and calibrated in accordance with practice procedures on test equipment traceable to the National Institute of Standard (NIST). PMW/vd/specs/15130 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 15130-4 051517 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The requirements of this specification shall apply to the new electrical distribution system and to existing loads served by the new electrical distribution. The end result shall be a system with proper arc flash safety labels and personal protective equipment recommendations. B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. IEEE 1584-2002: Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. 2. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 70E: National Electrical Safety Code Chapter 1. b. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code. c. NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 3. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 -CFR, Part 1910, sub part S. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: The results of the arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final summary report. Submit three (3) three-ring binder bound copies of the complete final study reports; reports shall be signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer. The contractor shall ensure proper arc -flash warning labels are applied to all appropriate electrical equipment when the final study has been approved. BW/ab/specs/16015 Tt#200-08466-15004 16015-1 072017 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall furnish all field data as required for the power system studies. The Engineer performing the arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. Contractor shall field verify/collect all other necessary for the studies. B. Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be identical to the equipment and component titles shown on the Drawings. C. Perform studies using digital computer with a software package such as SKM Power*Tools for WindowsTM DAPPERTM, CAPTORTM and ARC FLASHTM, or approved equal. D. Utilize proposed load data for the study obtained from Contract Documents and field survey. Coordinate with local power utility for available fault currents from utility services. E. Provide a comprehensive report document containing the arc flash studies. As a minimum the report structure shall contain the following: 1. Executive Summary. 2. Methodology. 3. One Line Diagram(s). 4. Arc Flash Analysis. 5. Arc Flash PPE recommendations. 2.02 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS A. Perform incident energy calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584-2002 Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations for all equipment analyzed in the short circuit study. Tabular results and recommended labels from SKM ARC FLASHTM are acceptable. B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchgear, motor -control centers, panelboards, variable frequency drives, industrial control panels, motor disconnect switches) where work could be performed on energized parts. BW/ab/specs/16015 Tt #200-08466-15004 16015-2 072017 C. The Arc -Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all 480V equipment and significant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 30 kVA. Arc -Flash Hazard Analysis on low voltage systems 120V and below is not required. D. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2. E. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full -load conditions. F. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary. G. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time should be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 Section B.1.2; reports shall specifically list any variations to clearing time limits selected by the engineer performing the study. H. Furnish recommendations for Personal Protective Equipment, in accordance with OSHA standards, and proper labels to be located on the electrical equipment in accordance with NEC Article 110.16. 2.03 TABULATIONS A. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations. 1. Arcing fault magnitude 2. Device clearing time 3. Duration of arc 4. Arc flash boundary 5. Working distance 6. Incident energy 7. Hazard Risk Category 8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction PART 3 - EXECUTION BW/ab/specs/16015 Tt #200-08466-15004 16015-3 072017 3.01 SAMPLE ARC FLASH LABEL A. Provide and attach all electrical equipment with appropriate Arc Flash label. Arc Flash label shall be weather resistant material. Submit sample arc flash label with report for owner and engineer approval. BW/ab/specs/16015 Tt #200-08466-15004 END OF SECTION 16015-4 072017 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General administrative, procedural requirements, and installation methods for electrical installations specified in Division 16. B. The Drawings are schematic and are not intended to show every detail of construction. 1. In general, conduits/raceways, transitions and offsets shown on Drawings indicate approximate locations in plan and elevation where the systems are intended to be run. 2. CONTRACTOR shall fully coordinate electrical Work with other trades to avoid interferences. 3. In the event of interferences, CONTRACTOR shall request clarification from ENGINEER in writing. C. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections, apply to Work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section of Work. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Submit product data covering the items included under this Section of Work. B. Conforming to Construction Drawings: Submit a complete set of Drawings showing the locations of the piping, ductwork, etc., as actually installed. Such Drawings shall be submitted to ENGINEER on tracing cloth, Mylar, or sepia paper from which blueprints can be obtained. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01600, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section. Include following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-1 062117 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with requirements in Section 01770. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall submit, prior to final payment, Drawings conforming to construction records of systems it has installed. Vendor drawings shall be sized as manufacturers' standard. B. Provide typewritten data sheets on motor control circuits with following information on each branch feeder: Load name, horsepower or KVA (transformer), fuse size, starter size, service factor of motor, motor nameplate currents, power factor correction capacitor size (if used), and thermal overload part number. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. National Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Use products and components labeled by UL. 1.05 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND LICENSES A. CONTRACTOR shall procure all necessary permits and licenses, observe and abide by all applicable laws, codes, regulations, ordinances, and rules of the State, territory, or political subdivision thereof, wherein Work is done, or any other duly constituted public authority, and further agrees to hold OWNER harmless from liability or penalty which might be imposed by reason of an asserted violation of such laws, codes, regulations, ordinances, or other rules. 1. Upon completion of Work, CONTRACTOR shall secure certificates of inspection from the inspector having jurisdiction and shall submit 3 copies of the certificates to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall pay the fees for the permits, inspections, licenses, and certifications when such fees are required. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. Equipment JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-2 062117 shall be packaged to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. Do not install damaged units; replace, and remove damaged units from Site. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Provide electrical materials and equipment enclosures appropriate for areas in which they are installed. Each area will be designated on Drawings with a type of construction such as NEMA 4, 4X, 7 or 9 if it is other than NEMA 12. An area designated by a name and elevation includes space bounded by floor, ceiling, and enclosing walls. 1. Exception: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for indoor or outdoor application where equipment is not manufactured to NEMA specifications (e.g., switchgear, transformers, high voltage capacitors, bus duct, and light fixtures; materials and equipment used in finished areas such as offices, laboratories, etc.). B. Provide nonmetallic electrical materials and equipment enclosures in NEMA 4X areas; watertight NEMA 4 and equipment enclosures for outdoor applications and indoor applications below grade; explosion -proof NEC Class I, Division 1, Group D equipment for NEMA 7 areas; explosion -proof NEC Class II, Division 2, Group F equipment for NEMA 9 areas. C. Supporting devices and sleeves shall be set in poured -in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide maximum headroom possible. E. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by Drawings recognizing that portions of Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to ENGINEER. F. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components where installed exposed in finished spaces. G. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other installations. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt#200-41125-16005 16050-3 062117 H. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section 08310. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.02 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Outdoors, use the following materials: 1. Exposed Conduit: PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Underground Direct Buried Conduit: PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit. 3. Conduit Used to Connect to Vibrating Equipment including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or electric solenoid or motor -driven equipment: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. B. Indoors, use the following wiring materials: 1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment, including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or electric solenoid or motor -operated equipment: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 2. Exposed Conduit: Rigid metal conduit. a. Exceptions: 1) Areas indicated as NEMA 4X, use rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit. 3. Concealed Conduit: Rigid metal conduit unless indicated otherwise. C. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch unless shown otherwise. D. Instrument Signal Conduit Requirements: Shielded signal wires for 4-20 mA type instruments or thermocouple wires assigned to the same control panel may be run in the same conduit. Shielded instrument signal wires, thermocouple wires, and shielded 2 -wire intercom wires may be run in the same conduit. No other wires will be permitted in an instrument signal/2-wire intercom conduit. Conduit shall be RMC or PVC -coated RMC. E. Conduit Thread Paint: Make threaded conduit joints watertight by coating threaded portions with a spray -on or brush -on zinc -bearing paint. Provide paint containing 90 percent minimum by weight of metallic zinc powder in the dried film. Clean field -cut threads of oil using the recommended solvent prior to coating threads. F. Install expansion fittings in all exposed rigid nonmetallic conduit runs of 20 feet or more. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-4 062117 G. Install expansion/deflection fittings where conduit passes a building expansion joint or where conduits are attached to two structures joined by a concrete expansion joint. H. Exposed or Concealed Construction: Install conduit exposed inside buildings except for areas with finished walls (e.g., offices, laboratories, lavatories, locker rooms, etc.) unless otherwise indicated. Concealed Raceways: Raceways embedded in slabs shall be installed in the middle third of the slab thickness where practical and leave at least 1 -inch concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Run 1 -inch and smaller raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. Run larger conduit parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab. Where nonmetallic conduit or fiberglass -reinforced conduit is used, raceways must be converted to PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit before rising above floor. J. Exposed Raceways: Install parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Conduits shall slope away from loads to keep moisture from entering the load. Run parallel or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same centerline so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run, such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases, provide field bends for parallel raceways. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. K. Space raceways, fittings, and boxes 0.25 inch from mounting surface in NEMA 4 and NEMA 7 areas. Spacers shall be one-piece construction of stainless steel, galvanized steel, PVC, ABS, or other noncorrosive material. L. Sleeves: Install in concrete floor slabs except where conduit passes through a housekeeping pad. Install in exterior walls below grade. M. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid metal conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver -operated threaded flush plugs with floor. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-5 062117 N. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum 6 feet for lighting fixtures; maximum 3 feet for all other equipment) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi -recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement, and all motors. Use Iiquidtight flexible conduit in wet locations and rated flexible connections for hazardous locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 0. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. P. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. For intermediate metal conduit, use threaded rigid metal conduit fittings. For PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit, use only factory - coated fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush metal box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. 2. Where conduits enter or leave NEMA 4X areas. 3. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces. 4. Where required by the NEC. R. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. S. Install device boxes at the height above the floor as follows for: T. Receptacles, 18 inches except in NEMA 4 and 4X areas, 4 feet. U. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete masonry. V. Support exposed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-6 062117 fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors. W. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure. X. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed. Y. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways and prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. Cap spare conduit. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. Z. Install pull wires in empty raceways: Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not Tess than 200 -pound tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 3.03 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. B. Keep branch circuit conductor splices to minimum. Splice feeders only where indicated. Use a standard kit. No splices are allowed for instrument and telephone cables except at indicated splice points. C. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material and are UL listed as pressure type connectors. D. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at terminal. E. Terminate power conductors at equipment using pressure-type terminals specifically designed for type of terminations to be made. Terminate no more than 2 conductors JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt#200-41125-16005 16050-7 062117 No. 8 AWG and smaller within the same pressure-type terminal. These 2 conductors shall be no more than 4 wire gauge sizes apart. Terminate no more than 1 conductor larger than No. 8 AWG within any pressure-type terminal. F. Seal wire and cable ends until ready to splice or terminate. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with requirements in Section 01730. In addition, the following requirements apply. 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work, remove and replace Work that is either defective or does not conform to requirements of Drawings. 2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated including, but not limited to, removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by new Work. Protect structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING A. In addition to testing recommended by equipment or material supplier and called for in equipment or material specification, perform the following. B. Motor Testing: Motor insulation shall be tested by using a 500 VDC (minimum) megger and applying test until a constant megohm reading of the following magnitude is obtained: Rmin. = 4 (KV + 1) at 25 degrees C winding temp. Rmin. = IV + 1 at 40 degrees C winding temp. 1. If motors do not meet requirements of megger test, blow hot air through motors to dry out and repeat until test is passed. If desirable, drying can be done by applying an electrical potential to equipment. However, in no case, induced or direct, shall voltage or current exceed continuous rating of equipment being dried. 2. After passing megger test, motors shall be hi -pot tested at 200 percent rated voltage for a minimum of 1 minute. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-8 062117 C. Equipment Testing: The following tests which are applicable for a particular item of equipment shall be performed: 1. Megger bus work phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground. Minimum acceptable steady-state value is 100 megohms. 2. Megger power circuit breakers and circuits supplied phase -to -phase and phase - to -ground (100 megohms minimum). 3. Test current transformer circuits by applying current to secondary wiring at current transformer terminals until contactor trips. 4. Test, time, and set protective relays. Relays shall be timed at various multiples (minimum of 3 points) of the pick-up value to determine agreement with published curves and adjust as necessary to agree with coordination study required settings. Exact tests to be performed vary with type of relay. Manufacturer's instructions for relay shall be complied with. 5. After Work has been completed, demonstrate to OWNER's Representative that entire electrical installation is in proper working order and will perform functions for which it was designed by functional testing. 6. Make any specific tests required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Check-out Procedures. In general, check-out procedures (as listed below) which are applicable for a particular item of equipment shall be performed: 1. Vacuum interior of cubicles and remove foreign material. 2. Wipe clean with a lint -free cloth insulators, bushings, bus supports, etc. 3. Check and adjust time delay, under -voltage devices, phase relay, over -current relays, etc., as required by coordination study or ENGINEER. 4. Fill motor bearings requiring oil. 5. Check and change, as required, thermal overload heater elements to correspond with motor full -load current and service factors of installed motor. 6. Check direction of rotation of motors and reverse connections if necessary. Check rotation with motor mechanically uncoupled where reverse rotation could damage equipment. 7. Equipment with two or more sources of power connected by tie breakers, transfer switches, or generator receptacles shall be checked for rotation from each possible combination of power sources. Power sources must have the same phase sequence for each source throughout entire facility. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 16050-9 062117 8. Check exposed bolted power connections for tightness. 9. Check operation of breakers, contactors, etc., and control and safety interlocks. 10. Check tightness of bolted structural connections. 11. Check leveling and alignment of enclosures. 12. Check operating parts and linkages for lubrication, freedom from binding, vibration, etc. 13. Check tightness and correctness of control connections at terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. 14. Clean auxiliary contacts and exposed relay contacts after vacuuming. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 1605040 062117 SECTION 16060 GROUNDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Electrical grounding and bonding Work as follows: 1. Solidly grounded. B. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding Work in this Section: 1. Grounding electrodes. 2. Raceways. 3. Enclosures. 4. Equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No. 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment," and No. 869, "Electrical Service Equipment," pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Standard 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL listed and labeled for their intended usage. 2. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141, and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. JCR/vd/specs/16060 Tt #200-41125-16005 16060-1 062117 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Materials and Components: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly of materials including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. 2. Conductors: Electrical copper grounding conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply wiring materials and are sized according to NEC. 3. Ground Bus: 0.25 inch by 1 inch minimum copper ground bus where indicated. 4. Grounding Electrodes: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4 -inch diameter by 10 feet. 5. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS A. Connect grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes using exothermic weld process or mechanical compression type connectors. B. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Bond grounding cables to both ends of metal conduit or sleeves through which such cables pass. D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque -tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. JCR/vd/specs/16060 Tt #200-41125-16005 16060-2 062117 E. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths as possible while following building lines to minimize transient voltage rises. Protect exposed cables and straps where subject to mechanical damage. F. Apply corrosion -resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed and are subjected to corrosive action. END OF SECTION JCR/vd/specs/16060 Tt #200-41125-16005 16060-3 062117 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16070 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS I A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third -party certification follow-up services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U -Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. American Electric. c. B -Line Systems, Inc. d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Haydon Corp. g. Kin -Line, Inc. JCR/sc/specs/16070 Tt #200-41125-16005 16070-1 062117 h. Unistrut Diversified Products. 2. Conduit Sealing Bushings: a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. f. Madison Equipment Co. g. L.E. Mason Co. h. O-Z/Gedney. i. Producto Electric Corp. j. Raco, Inc. k. Red Seal Electric Corp. I. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. m. Thomas & Betts Corp. 2.02 COATINGS A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors, in NEMA 4 areas, or embedded in concrete shall be hot -dip galvanized. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C -clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners. Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type indoors, 316 stainless steel outdoors and in NEMA 4X areas. 2. Toggle Bolts: Steel springhead type indoors, 316 stainless steel outdoors and in NEMA 4X areas. JCR/sc/specs/16070 Tt #200-41125-16005 16070-2 062117 3. Hanger Rods: 0.375 -inch diameter minimum, steel indoors, 316 stainless steel outdoors and in NEMA 4X areas. C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory fabricated, watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish. E. U -Channel Systems: 12 gauge or 0.105 -inch -thick steel channels, with 9/16 -inch -diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U -channel and are of same manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Shop- or field -fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U -channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide a waterstop on pipe sleeves. Provide pipe sleeves of 2 standard sizes larger than conduit/pipe passing through it and of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gauge metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3 -inch and smaller: 20 -gauge. b. 4 -inch to 6 -inch: 16 -gauge. c. Over 6 -inch: 14 -gauge. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION JCR/sc/specs/16070 Tt#200-41125-16005 16070-3 062117 SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Identification labeling for cables and conductors. 2. Operational instruction signs. 3. Warning and caution signs. 4. Equipment labels and signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product Data for each type of product specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires and Cables: Self-adhesive, vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width. B. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with pre-printed numbers and letter. C. Aluminum, Wraparound Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014 -inch -thick aluminum sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers. D. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches or 8 inches in length; 1/8 -inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners. JCR/sc/specs/16075 Tt#200-41125-16005 16075-1 062117 E. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Pre-printed aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. F. Exterior Metal -Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, pre-printed cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20 -gauge galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to location. Provide 1/4 -inch grommets in corners for mounting. G. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self -tapping stainless steel screws or Number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. H. Cable Ties: Fungus -inert, self -extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18 inch minimum width, 50 -pound minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 to 350 degrees F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification Work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by Code. B. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the Project secondary electrical system following OWNER's method of phase identification or as follows: Phase 480/277 Volts A Yellow B Brown C Orange Neutral White Ground Green C. Use conductors with color factory applied entire length of conductors except as follows: 1. The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory - coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. JCR/sc/specs/16075 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Apply colored, pressure -sensitive plastic tape in half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1 -inch -wide tape in colors as specified. Do not 16075-2 062117 obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. b. In lieu of pressure -sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. D. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags of aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4 -inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55 -pound test monofilament line or one- piece self-locking nylon cable ties. E. Install wire/cable designation tape markers at termination points, splices, or junctions in each circuit. Circuit designations shall be as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION JCR/sc/specs/16075 Tt#200-41125-16005 16075-3 062117 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Low -Voltage Wire and Cable. 2. Instrument Cable. 3. Multiconductor Control Cable. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Include Shop Drawings of wires, cables, connectors, splice kits, and termination assemblies. B. Reports of field tests prepared as noted in Section 01600. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL. For cables intended for use in air handling space comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 710, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke characteristics of cables used in Air Handling Spaces." B. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard. 1. Standard 82, Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors. C. Labeling: Handwritten labels are not acceptable. All labels shall be machine printed on clear or opaque tape, stenciled onto adhesive labels, or typewritten onto adhesive labels. The font shall be at least 1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible. The text shall be of a color contrasting with the label such that is may be easily read. If labeling tape is utilized, the font color shall contrast with the background. Patch panels shall exhibit workstation numbers or some type of location identifier, in sequential order, for all workstations or devices attached. Each Network cable segment shall be labeled at each end with its respective identifier. JCR/vd/specs/16120 Tt#200-41125-16005 16120-1 062117 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Low -Voltage Wire and Cable: a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. General Cable. c. The Okonite Co. d. Southwire Co. 2. Connectors for Low -Voltage Wires and Cable Conductors: a. AMP. b. O-Z/Gedney Co. c. Square D Company. d. 3M Company. 3. Instrument Cable: a. Belden (Trade Nos. 1120A and 1118A). 2.02 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES A. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors conforming to ASTM Standards for concentric stranding, Class B. Construction of wire and cable shall be single conductor (1/c) unless multiconductor cable is shown by notation in form (x/c) where x indicates the number of separate insulated conductors per cable. B. Conductor Material: Copper. Minimum size power wire shall be No. 12 AWG. C. Insulation: Provide RHW/USE insulation for power conductors used in single- and 3- phase circuits with more than 120 volts to ground. Provide RHW/USE or XHHW insulation for power conductors used in single- and 3-phase circuits with 120 volts or less to ground. 1. Provide RHW or XHHW insulation for grounding conductors installed in raceways. 2. Provide THHN/THWN insulation for control conductors. JCR/vd/specs/16120 Tt #200-41125-16005 16120-2 062117 2.03 CONNECTORS FOR LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide UL listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types, and classes for applications and services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used. 2.04 INSTRUMENT CABLE A. Instrument Cable: 600 volt minimum insulated shielded cable with two or more twisted No. 16 or No. 18AWG stranded copper conductors; PVC, nylon, or polyethylene outer jacket; and 100 percent foil shielding. 2.05 MULTICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE A. Multiconductor Control Cable: Concentrically cabled No. 14 AWG stranded copper conductors with saturated interstitial fillers; overall binder of nylon or similar material; and PVC jacket. Quantity of conductors shall be as indicated on Drawings. Provide Type 2010 individual conductor insulation unless otherwise indicated on Drawings as one of the following: 1. Type ISS: 15 mils polyethylene with 5 mils nylon. 2. Type 2010: 20 mils polyethylene with 10 mils PVC. 3. Type 3015: 30 mils polyethylene with 15 mils PVC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energizing, check installed 480 volt, 3-phase power circuits and higher wires and cables with a 1,000 -volt megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. Minimum acceptable megohm meter reading is 100 megohms held at a constant value for 15 seconds. A certified copy of megohm meter tests shall be submitted to ENGINEER. Test reports shall include ambient temperature and humidity at time of testing. Notify ENGINEER 48 hours prior to test with schedule. B. Reports (non -LAN cable): Testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective items. Testing organization, shall submit written reports to ENGINEER. END OF SECTION JCR/vd/specs/16120 Tt #200-41125-16005 16120-3 062117 SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this Section include the following: 1. Liquidtight flexible conduit. 2. Rigid metal conduit. 3. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 4. PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit. 5. Conduit bodies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for the following products: a. Conduit. b. Conduit bodies. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. 2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA. JCR/sc/specs/16130 Tt #200-41125-16005 16130-1 052117 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Conduit: a. Allied Tube. b. Carlon. c. Johns Manville. d. Occidental Coatings. e. Orangeburg. f. Perma-Cote Industries. g. Republic Steel. h. Robroy Industries. Steelduct Co. j. Triangle Conduit. k. Wheatland Tube. Youngstown Sheet and Tube. 2. Liquidtight Conduit: a. Anamet, Inc. b. Carlon. c. Electric -Flex. d. Thomas and Betts. 3. Conduit Bodies: a. Adalet-PLM. b. American Electric. c. Appleton Electric Co. JCR/sc/specs/16130 Tt #200-41125-16005 16130-2 052117 d. Carlon. e. Crouse -Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc. f. Delta Industrial Products. g. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. h. Kraloy Products Co. i. O-Z/Gedney Co. j. Perma-Cote Industries. k. Robroy Industries. 1. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. 4. Conduit Thread Paint: a. CRC Chemicals, USA. b. Sherwin Williams. c. ZRC Chemical Products Co. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Metal Conduit: ANSI C 80.1, hot -dip galvanized. B. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: ANSI C 80.1 and NEMA RN 1., Type 40, 40 mil nominal coating and thickness. The bond of the PVC to the substrate shall be stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC. C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this raceway. 2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 PVC. B. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. C. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings: UL 1660. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this raceway. JCR/sc/specs/16130 Tt #200-41125-16005 16130-3 052117 2.04 CONDUIT BODIES A. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion -resistant screws. Use cast covers in NEMA 4 areas and stamped steel covers in NEMA 1 and 12 areas. Use nonmetallic covers in NEMA 4X areas. B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies as follows: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit: Use cast or malleable iron conduit bodies with zinc electroplating, aluminum enamel or lacquer finish, and threaded hubs. 2. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: Use hot -dipped galvanized or cadmium -plated cast or malleable iron conduit bodies with threaded hubs factory PVC -coated. Field application of PVC coating to conduit bodies is not acceptable. Secure covers using PVC encapsulated or stainless steel screws. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies conforming to UL 514 B. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) JCR/sc/specs/16130 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 16130-4 052117 SECTION 16135 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other Sections. Types of products specified in this Section include: 1. Outlet and device boxes. 2. Terminal boxes. 3. Bushings. 4. Locknuts. 5. Conduit hubs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Shop Drawings for floor boxes and boxes, enclosures, and cabinets that are to be shop -fabricated, (nonstock items). For shop -fabricated junction and pull boxes, show accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show box types, dimensions, and finishes. 2. Product data for boxes, fittings, cabinets, and enclosures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)." JCR/sc/specs/16135 Tt#200-41125-16005 16135-1 062117 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Outlet Boxes, Concealed Conduit System: a. Adalet-PLM Div., Scott Fetzer Co. b. Appleton Electric, Emerson Electric Co. c. Bell Electric, Square D Company d. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. e. Midland -Ross Corp. f. OZ/Gedney, General Signal Co. g. Pass and Seymour, Inc. h. RACO Div., Harvey Hubbell, Inc. Thomas & Betts Co. 2. Outlet Boxes, Exposed Conduit System: a. Appleton Electric, Type FS/FD. b. Crouse -Hinds, Type FS/FD. 3. Device Boxes, Concealed Conduit Systems: a. Adalet-PLM Div., Scott Fetzer Co. b. Appleton Electric; Emerson Electric Co. c. Bell Electric, Square D Company. d. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. e. Midland -Ross Corp. f. OZ/Gedney, General Signal Co. g. Pass and Seymour, Inc. h. RACO Div., Harvey Hubbell, Inc. JCR/sc/specs/16135 Tt #200-41125-16005 16135-2 062117 i. Thomas & Betts Co 4. Device Boxes, Exposed Conduit System: a. Appleton Electric, Type FS/FD. b. Crouse -Hinds, Type FS/FD. 5. Terminal Boxes: a. AM FCO. b. Boss. c. Hoffman. d. Keystone. e. Hope. 6. Bushings, Knockout Closures, Locknuts, and Connectors: a. Adalet-PLM Div., Scott Fetzer Co. b. AMP, Inc. c. Arrow -Hart Div., Crouse -Hinds Co. d. Appleton Electric Co., Emerson Electric Co. e. Bell Electric; Square D Co. f. Midland -Ross Corp. g. Midwest Electric, Cooper Industries, Inc. h. OZ/Gedney Co., General Signal Co. i. RACO Div., Harvey Hubbell, Inc. j. Thomas & Betts Co., Inc. 2.02 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - GENERAL A. Outlet Boxes: Suitable for the conduit system installation as follows: 1. Exposed Conduit: Provide cast or malleable iron, zinc electroplated outlet boxes finished with aluminum lacquer or enamel. Provide cast metal covers with neoprene gaskets for NEMA 4 areas and stamped steel covers for NEMA 12 and undesignated areas. 1CR/sc/specs/16135 Tt #200-41125-16005 16135-3 062117 a. Exception: Provide non-metallic outlet boxes for NEMA 4X areas. Provide factory PVC -coated boxes where PVC -coated conduit is specified. 2. Concealed Conduit: Provide galvanized coated flat -rolled sheet -steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with cable and conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion - resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. Provide cast metal outlet boxes for exterior outlets. B. Device Boxes: Suitable for the conduit system as follows: 1. Exposed Conduit: Provide cast or malleable iron, zinc electroplated device boxes finished with aluminum lacquer or enamel. Provide exterior mounting Tugs on device boxes. a. Exception: Provide non-metallic outlet boxes for NEMA 4X areas. Provide factory PVC -coated device boxes where PVC -coated conduit is specified. 2. Concealed Conduit: Provide galvanized coated flat -rolled sheet -steel non- gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with cable -size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion -resistant screws for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment type grounding. Provide cast metal device boxes for exterior devices. C. Terminal Boxes: Provide compression lug type terminal strips in each terminal box with a minimum of 20 percent spare terminals. Provide appropriate NEMA enclosure rating for area in which terminal box is installed. D. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. Provide watertight hubs on conduits terminated at sheet steel enclosures in NEMA 4 areas. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) JCR/sc/specs/16135 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 16135-4 062117 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Bryant Electric Co., Division of Hubbell Corporation. 2. Cooper Wiring Devices. 3. Hubbell, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Pass and Seymour, Inc. JCR/sc/specs/16050 Tt#200-41125-16005 16140-1 062117 2.02 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide devices which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide ivory color devices and wall plates except as otherwise indicated. B. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: Provide specification grade or heavy-duty "feed -through" type ground fault circuit interrupter, with integral grounding type NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide units rated Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) KR/sc/specs/16050 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 16140-2 062117 SECTION 16220 MOTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section applies, in general, to all electric or DC motor -driven equipment provided under Divisions 2 through 16 Sections. This Section shall supplement the detailed Equipment Specifications, but in cases of conflict, the Specifications indicated in this Section shall govern. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Submittals for motors shall accompany the specific equipment the motor is to be supplied with. 2. Submit product literature for each motor. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01730, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Codes, Ordinances, and Industrial Standards: The design, testing, assembly, and methods of installation of the wiring materials, electrical equipment, and accessories proposed under this Contract shall conform to the National Electrical Code and to applicable State and local requirements. UL listing and labeling shall be adhered to under this Contract. Any equipment that does not have a UL, FM, CSA, or other listed testing laboratory label, shall be furnished with a notarized letter signed by the supplier stating that the equipment furnished has been manufactured in accordance with the National Electrical Code and OSHA requirements. Any additional cost resulting from any deviation from codes or local requirements shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, motors shall be standard design and construction. Manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 16220-1 062117 1. Motors: a. Marathon Blue Chip Series. b. Siemens, Inc. c. General Electric Co. d. Reliance Electric Co. e. U.S. Electric Motors. B. For motors that are integrally constructed as a piece of equipment, such as appliances, hand tools, etc., and where manufacturer would be required to redesign equipment to meet these general specifications, it is the intent to allow such standard motors to be used, provided they do not exceed 1-1/2 horsepower and are suitable for use on standard power systems. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Shop primers shall be Tnemec "77 Chem -Prime," or equal. B. Rust preventive compound shall be equal to Dearborn Chemical "No-Ox-ID2W," Houghton "Rust Veto 344," or Rust-Oleum "R-9". 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Electrical Motors: Motor design and application shall comply with current ANSI, IEEE, NEMA, and AFBMA standards and with the NEC where applicable. They shall be squirrel cage induction motors rated 60 hertz, continuous duty for use in 40 degrees C ambient temperature. Motors shall comply with NEMA MG1-1993, Rev. 1, Part 31, Definite Purpose Inverter -Fed Motors whether used with variable frequency drives or not. 1. The motors shall be sized within their rated Toads under the specified conditions without utilizing the top 15 percent of the 1.0 or 1.15 service factor. Motor sizing measured at the motor output shaft shall include all loadings on the motor. Motor loadings shall include the maximum or specified Toad condition of the driven equipment plus all drive losses of components, located between the motor and the driven equipment. 2. The motor winding temperature rise shall be NEMA Standard for the class of insulation used at the rated service factor load. 3. The motors shall be capable of handling unfiltered voltage peaks of up to 1600 volts, and rise times of 0.1 micro-seocnds. JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 16220-2 062117 B. All integral horsepower motors shall have oversize conduit boxes with clamp -type grounding terminals inside which are effectively connected to all noncurrent -carrying motor parts. C. Multispeed motors are to be supplied with separate windings for each speed. The cost to change starters for motors supplied with reconnectable windings will be the responsibility of equipment (motor) supplier and must be coordinated with ENGINEER. D. Unless these general specifications are supplanted by the detailed equipment specifications, motors shall be rated and constructed as follows: 1. Below 1/2 Horsepower: Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, single phase, but shall be suitable for use on 208 volt power system. They shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings (antifriction type where high radial or axial thrusts are produced by the driven equipment). Standard motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, totally enclosed air -over, or totally enclosed nonventilated capacitor start type as shown on Equipment Schedule(s) or specified in the equipment specifications. Totally enclosed explosion -proof motors shall be provided where required per equipment specifications section. 2. From 1/2 to 1-1/2 Horsepower: Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts single phase or shall be rated 230/460 volts 3-phase as indicated by Equipment Schedule(s). In either case they shall be suitable for use on 208 volt power systems under their given load conditions. They shall have bearings as in 2.03 F.1. The standard enclosures shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, totally enclosed nonventilated, totally enclosed explosion -proof, or open drip -proof as shown on Equipment Schedule(s) or specified in the equipment specifications. 3. From 2 to 200 Horsepower: Motors shall be rated 230/460 or 460 volt, 3-phase. They shall be grease lubricated, ball bearing, Class B insulated, minimum or as specified. Horizontal motors shall be open drip -proof, totally enclosed fan - cooled or totally enclosed explosion -proof (NEC, Class I, Group D) as shown on Equipment Schedule(s) or specified in the equipment specifications. Vertical motors shall meet NEMA standard open drip -proof specifications as a vertical motor when called for or totally enclosed fan cooled or totally enclosed explosion -proof as shown on Equipment Schedule(s). E. Horizontal and vertical motors may also be weather protected, Type I, and shall have encapsulated or sealed windings. F. Open drip -proof type motors shall have encapsulated or sealed windings when called for on Drawings or Equipment Schedules. G. Special duty and severe environment application shall have motors which are designed specifically to meet the special conditions as specified. H. The following symbols will be employed on Equipment Schedule(s) to indicate the required motor enclosure and construction features: JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt#200-41125-16005 16220-3 062117 1. TE Totally Enclosed, may be nonventilated, fan -cooled or air -over type. 2. TENV Totally Enclosed Nonventilated. 3. TEFC Totally Enclosed Fan -cooled. 4. TEEP Totally Enclosed Explosion -proof, Class I, Div. I, Group D. 5. ODP Open Drip -proof. 6. WPI Weather Protected Type I. 7. E/S Encapsulated or Sealed Windings. 8. All motors with encapsulation or sealed windings shall have a water -tight conduit box. See NEMA Standard MG1 for definition of above terms. J. Motor Efficiency: Where Equipment Schedule(s) indicate that motors shall be designed for high efficiency, they shall meet or exceed the Motor Operating Characteristics shown on High Efficiency Motor Schedule No. 16220.2, appended to this Section. Guaranteed minimum efficiency at full load shall be based on IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Nominal motor efficiencies are average expected values. Manufacturer's motor Shop Drawings shall indicate full compliance with the High Efficiency Motor Schedule No. 16220.2. K. Vertical Motors: The motors shall be induction motors designed for operation on a 3- phase, 60 hertz power system at the voltage indicated on Equipment Schedule(s). Motor housing shall be designed for vertical use and meet the NEMA specifications as a vertically oriented motor. The design, construction and performance characteristics of the motors shall conform to applicable provisions of the latest NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards. They shall perform in accordance with their nameplate rating and be free of any defective material or workmanship. 1. The motors shall have a horsepower rating based on continuous operation (24 hours per day) at full load without exceeding 40 degrees C. The horsepower rating shall be adequate to operate the driven equipment under all normally expected operating conditions without overloading. Minimum full load efficiency shall be 92.5 percent and minimum full load power factor shall be 89 percent. Service factor shall be 1.0. Motor insulation shall be Class B or better. The motor temperature rise shall be NEMA standard for the class of insulation used for the rated service factor load. Motor shaft loading shall not exceed rated horsepower. 2. Motor manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining the speed torque characteristics of the driven equipment. Speed -torque curves showing the torque characteristics of both the motor and the driven equipment on the same JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 16220-4 062117 graph together with WK2 of both the motor and the driven equipment shall be submitted to ENGINEER. This information is to be included with submittal of outline Drawing for approval. 3. Motors shall have passive temperature switches for use in the motor control circuit that will limit the winding temperature as defined by NEMA Standard MG1-12.53 Type 1. The contacts shall be normally open and rated to operate a switchgear control relay in either a 250 volt AC (40 VA) or 125 volt DC (12W) control circuit. 4. Coils shall be form wound, vacuum pressure impregnated and compactly shaped to fill the slots. Vacuum pressure impregnation shall be done by treating the entire stator with a minimum of 2 impregnations after the coils are placed in the slots. Winding and end connections shall be fully sealed against contaminants. The stator complete with winding shall be given additional dips and brakes. Motor end turns shall be adequately braced with nonshrinking material and shall withstand the stress caused by full voltage starting. 5. Motors shall have weather -protected Type 1 enclosures with top discharge air ventilation openings. Openings shall be equipped with easily removable guard screens. Motors shall have air inlet filters and space heaters. 6. Space heaters shall be 120 volt AC single phase in frame Sizes under 8600. Space heaters shall be 480 volt 3-phase in frame Sizes 8600 and larger. Motors with space heaters shall include heater leads in a separate conduit box mounted on the motor frame. The conduit box shall have an access cover. 7. Motors shall have terminal boxes of adequate size for the construction of the stress cones on the incoming cable and any other connections such as surge and power factor correction capacitors and surge arrestors. Terminal leads shall be minimum of 12 inches long and shall be equipped without lugs. Terminal boxes for motor leads shall have the following minimum dimensions: 20 -inch H, 15 -inch W, 10 -inch D. They shall be diagonally split and furnished undrilled for conduit. The boxes shall be gasketed and suitable for mounting in any direction without allowing water to enter. Each motor shall be equipped with a General Electric Co. or Westinghouse "Surge-Pac," or equal, overvoltage protection. A power factor correcting capacitor shall be provided for full load power factor correction of 0.96 minimum. The Surge-Pac and capacitor shall meet the Specifications of Division 16. The terminal box, Surge-Pac, and power factor correction caps shall be floor -mounted with all connections to the motor housing being made through flexible conduit. 8. Line and thrust bearing shall be of adequate size to take the Toad of the rotor, together with that of such parts of the shaft not carried by the driven machinery. A suitable base of high-grade cast iron shall be provided for mounting the motor. Adequate provisions must be made at the top of the motor for adjustments to the drive shaft. The motors shall have a protected head cover with a suitable lifting ring or rings. JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt#200-41125-16005 16220-5 062117 9. Nameplates shall be metal and be installed with data as required by NEMA and also show locked rotor current and lead connection diagram. 10. The maximum overall noise level shall not exceed the level defined in the latest revision of NEMA Standard MG1-12.49 or MG1-20.49, whichever is applicable to the particular machine. 11. Certified routine shop tests shall be made on one motor out of each size group for motors 1,500 horsepower or smaller. Full running shop tests shall be made on each motor larger than 1,500 horsepower. Test results shall be submitted to ENGINEER for ENGINEER's record. 12. Provisions for mounting a vibration motor sensor on each motor shall be provided. The mountings for the vibration sensors shall consist of a threaded mounting hole 1/2-20 UNF 2B 0.400 -inch minimum depth full threads. Hole shall be located perpendicular, within 0.010-inch/inch, to the centerline of a raised 2.0 -inch diameter machined flat surface. Machined surface shall be flat within 0.005 inch. The machined surface is to be located on the upper part of the motor, as close top the thrust bearings as practical and between lifting lugs. The machined surface is to be oriented vertically and parallel plus or minus 3 degrees to the shaft centerline such that the threaded hole is horizontal and perpendicular to the shaft centerline within plus or minus 5 degrees. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Electric motors shall be shop -finished with 2 coats of enamel paint per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions. B. Lubricate oil -lubricated bearings. C. Provide electrical wiring and connections as specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect all terminations for proper connection. B. Check motor for proper rotation. JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 16220-6 062117 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.03 INSTALLATION CHECK A. Installation Check: Manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory -trained representative to check the installation of all equipment installed in this Section. The services shall be as noted in Section 01600. Equipment supplier's representative shall revisit Site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to ENGINEER. B. Manufacturer's representative shall provide all necessary tools and testing equipment required including noise level and vibration sensing equipment. C. Inspection Report: A written report of the installation check shall be submitted to ENGINEER. The report shall be as noted under Section 01600 certifying that the equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated; 2. Is in accurate alignment; 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by any connection or anchor bolts; 4. Has been operated under full Toad condition and that it operated satisfactorily to ENGINEER; and 5. That OWNER's representative has been instructed in the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment. 6. Furnish OWNER a copy of all test data recorded during the installation check including noise level and vibration readings. JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 16220-7 062117 HP RPM Syn. HIGH EFFICIENCY MOTOR SCHEDULE NO. 16220.2 MOTOR OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Efficiency (percent) Guar. Min. Full 1/2 Nominal 3/4 Full Power Factor (percent) 1/2 3/4 Full 1 1800 1200 81.5 75.5 78.1 69.5 81.0 75.6 81.5 78.5 54.2 38.4 67.3 49.4 75.8 58.3 1.5 3600 1800 1200 78.5 81.5 81.5 78.4 79.2 80.5 80.2 82.9 83.4 81.5 84.0 84.0 75.3 52.1 44.0 84.4 65.1 56.6 88.8 74.0 85.6 2 3600 1800 1200 81.5 81.5 84.0 78.8 78.8 83.0 82.9 82.6 83.6 84.0 84.0 86.5 66.3 48.9 46.6 78.4 61.7 59.6 85.0 70.0 68.0 3 3600 1800 1200 84.0 86.5 86.5 75.4 86.9 84.5 84.3 88.5 87.5 86.5 88.5 88.5 69.7 62.3 45.9 80.0 73.9 58.3 85.6 79.9 68.0 5 3600 1800 1200 86.5 88.5 86.5 86.2 84.0 85.8 88.2 88.2 88.2 88.5 88.5 88.5 71.7 68.5 50.8 81.7 79.2 63.8 86.4 84.6 71.9 7.5 3600 1800 1200 86.5 88.5 86.5 82.9 89.2 87.5 86.7 90.3 88.8 88.5 90.2 88.5 75.9 66.5 58.6 84.3 77.2 68.8 88.1 82.4 73.7 10 3600 1800 1200 86.5 88.5 88.5 87.7 89.3 89.0 89.0 90.4 90.3 88.5 90.2 90.2 77.1 67.6 60.1 84.5 77.4 70.2 87.6 81.9 74.9 15 3600 1800 1200 88.5 90.2 88.5 82.3 91.0 89.9 87.4 91.9 90.6 90.2 91.7 90.2 81.1 68.5 67.4 87.2 78.1 77.1 90.4 82.3 81.4 20 3600 1800 1200 90.2 90.2 90.2 89.1 90.9 91.0 91.1 91.9 91.0 91.7 91.7 91.7 83.7 68.9 69.8 88.5 78.1 78.5 90.5 81.8 81.9 25 3600 1800 1200 90.2 91.7 90.2 91.6 92.8 90.0 92.0 93.2 91.4 91.7 92.4 91.7 81.9 72.7 79.8 88.6 81.4 84.5 90.6 84.5 85.5 30 3600 1800 1200 90.2 91.7 90.2 90.6 92.8 91.7 91.7 93.3 92.0 91.7 93.0 91.7 81.1 71.5 78.9 87.8 80.6 85.4 90.3 84.2 86.8 40 3600 1800 1200 90.2 91.7 91.7 89.1 91.0 93.0 91.2 92.6 93.3 91.7 93.0 93.0 83.8 71.6 80.9 88.6 80.6 86.4 89.9 84.2 88.0 50 3600 1800 1200 90.2 93.0 91.7 88.7 92.4 93.0 90.8 93.7 93.3 91.7 94.1 93.0 82.5 76.4 80.9 90.8 83.7 87.3 92.0 86.3 88.9 60 3600 1800 1200 91.7 93.0 91.7 89.9 93.2 92.5 92.0 94.0 93.1 93.0 94.1 93.0 84.9 76.3 75.8 89.9 84.0 82.9 91.6 86.8 85.5 75 3600 1800 1200 93.0 93.0 93.0 91.0 92.6 93.5 93.1 93.8 94.2 94.1 94.1 94.1 82.6 76.4 75.1 88.7 83.8 82.4 90.9 86.6 84.7 100 3600 1800 1200 93.0 94.1 93.0 91.3 93.8 93.1 93.3 94.8 93.9 94.1 95.0 94.1 86.1 83.8 72.5 89.7 87.6 80.0 91.0 89.0 83.2 125 3600 1800 1200 93.0 93.7 93.0 91.2 93.5 93.5 93.1 94.6 94.2 94.1 95.0 94.1 83.0 79.2 75.2 88.3 84.6 82.3 89.0 86.0 85.2 150 3600 1800 1200 93.0 94.1 94.1 91.8 93.7 94.1 93.4 94.7 94.9 94.1 95.0 95.0 85.3 81.6 77.2 89.3 86.4 84.4 89.1 86.6 85.7 200 3600 1800 1200 94.1 94.5 94.3 92.7 94.2 94.2 94.3 94.9 94.9 95.0 95.0 95.0 83.3 80.0 78.0 87.5 85.6 84.5 88.5 86.7 86.0 250 3600 1800 94.3 94.3 94.8 96.0 95.5 96.0 95.3 95.8 83.0 79.5 87.5 85.6 88.5 83.0 JCR/sc/specs/16220 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 16220-8 062117 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16748 SOFTWARE SERVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for furnishing fabrication, production, and installation of items specified in this Section or as shown on Drawings. B. Work includes programming, testing, and installation of software required for a complete and fully operational control system. Principal segments of Work include, but are not limited to, programmable logic controller ladder logic, data collection, supervisory control, operator process control interfaces, process data management, laboratory management, and plant administrative/management reports. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements. System consists of PLC programming and Operator Interface functions for the following equipment at each site: 1. Two (2) Fluoride Metering pumps a. Start/Stop control b. Speed control proportional to dosing requirements; Dosing rate operator adjustable with maximum rate limitations c. Interlock with Discharge High Pressure d. Associated fault alarms 2. One (1) Fluoride Transfer Pump a. Start/Stop control b. Time-limited pump operation adjustable by operator c. Interlock with Day Tank Hi Level 3. One (1) Fluoride Bulk Storage Tank a. Continuous Level Indication P M W/a b/specs/16748 Tt#200-41125-16005 16748-1 062617 b. Hi and Lo level alarms c. "Next Order" levels adjustable by operator 4. One (1) Day Tank a. Continuous Level Indication b. Hi and Lo Level alarms B. Performance Requirements: Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) shall complete execution of all rungs with a cycle time not to exceed 250 mS. Operator interface functions shall have a 2 -second response time or better. Adjust timing and operating system parameters of PLCs and computers as necessary. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 13410, Shop Drawings and product data for products provided under this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Software Progress Meetings: Allow in Bid for three (3) meetings at site for review of PLC logic and graphic operator screens. Meeting to commence at time of Contract Award. B. Project progress meetings shall be held at Site at an interval not to exceed once per month during the software development cycle. Meetings shall be once per week during software installation and field checking phases. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will attend these meetings. 1. These meetings shall be for specific purpose of assuring that software development Work is in accord with Project requirements and are in addition to Project progress meetings that may otherwise be required. Document and distribute to all attendees minutes of meetings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SERVICE SUPPLIER A. Software services shall be fulfilled by the organization selected as "Equipment Supplier" under Section 13410. 2.02 SOFTWARE SERVICES A. Software services include program development, testing, documentation, and Work necessary to implement a complete and fully operating system as shown on Drawings P M W/a b/specs/16748 Tt #200-41125-16005 16748-2 062617 and/or as specified. Provide programming to implement required functions and features for Fluoride System to match existing graphics. B. Work requires coordination with concurrent program development for PLCs, Operator Interfaces, Management Reports, and Data Collection. Include PLC error detection logic for communications failures, data highway faults, internal faults, and time outs. Communicate PLC error conditions to Operator Interface for logging and reporting. C. Communication between PLCs, Operator Interface, and Data Collection shall be on an exception basis. When reportable changes in process state occur, such as alarm assertion, return to normal, or analog value out of dead band, report event to PLC that communicates with Operator Interface and Data Collection. This PLC shall maintain data tables current with all process inputs and outputs. Organize data to be transferred into contiguous blocks of information using bit -mapped and integer tables. Employ a "watchdog" timer for each remote PLC and poll that PLC if no message has been received in a reasonable amount of time. Accept Operator Interface directives for setpoint changes and hand switches. 2.03 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER LOGIC A. Develop programs for execution on PLC using development software supplied under that Section. Logic shall perform functions required to control processes and equipment as shown on Drawings and/or as specified. Develop complete cross-references for ladder logic and complete input/output listings. 2.04 OPERATOR INTERFACE (LOCAL OPERATOR COMPUTER) A. Operator Interface programs for Local Operator Computers (LOCs) provide graphic representation of local processes and control over machinery. Provide following screens: 1. Fluoride Process overview. B. Screens shall include indicating lamps and hand switches shown. Include analog instruments such as indicators, manual loading stations, controllers, etc., as shown. Programming shall be done using compatible programming software for existing operator interface. 2.05 OPERATOR INTERFACE AND DATA COLLECTION (DATA MANAGEMENT COMPUTER) A. Operator Interface programs provide graphic representation of plant processes and control over machinery. Data collection activities provide historical trend analysis and process data readings for use in management reporting. B. Provide following screens: 1. Process overview for each process. P M W/a b/specs/16748 Tt#200-41125-16005 16748-3 062617 C. Operator Displays: Develop programs to provide following elements and as required for a complete fully functional Operator Interface and data collection system: 1. Video displays shall be color at highest resolution supported by hardware. Install operating system drivers as necessary. They shall be fully windowed and shall use a mouse for control. Use colors, function keys, and navigational controls consistently. 2. Alarm Management: For each process or system event classed as an alarm provide facilities for displaying and logging on system alarm printer, acknowledgment, and purging of stale messages. Alarm events are derived from discrete inputs, analog trip values, logic combinations and computations as needed. Print and display both alarm events and returns to normal. Provide date/time stamps for events, descriptive message, and event type code. Use color combinations to distinguish following alarm states: Alarm - Unacknowledged, Alarm -Acknowledged, Normal -Unacknowledged, and Normal -Acknowledged. 3. Graphic Displays: Provide process -oriented displays showing current process status and accepting operator input for setpoint and status changes. Submit for approval color scheme and screen -to -screen navigation strategies. For each display, show process elements such as pumps, valves, tanks, pipe lines, etc., with their current operational status. Provide analog displays for board instruments shown including indicators, controllers, manual loading stations, etc. Indicators shall use an appropriate number of significant digits and dead band to produce steady values and color to show operational status. 4. Print Screen function shall direct an image of the currently displayed screen to any system printer as the user directs. When directed to a color printer, a color screen image shall be produced. 5. Trending: Provide on-screen trending displays that are user definable that operate from either previously collected historical trend groups (named file) or from a group of real-time variables. Provide facilities for user selection of colors, time (horizontal), and measurement (vertical) scales. Accommodate real-time sampling intervals as short as 1 second. Real-time trends shall show alarm setpoints. Historical trend displays shall have time -scale panning controls. 6. Security: Using operator interface and operating system software, implement a security system to restrict access to parts of system. Provide following as a minimum: P M W/a b/specs/16748 Tt #200-41125-16005 a. Programmer - Access to all facilities including changing displays and logic. b. Supervisor Access to all displays, change master set points and purge stale alarm messages. 16748-4 062617 c. Operator Access to all displays, change normal operational sequences and acknowledge alarms. d. Observer =Access to displays only. D. Provide following data management functions: 1. Collection files are closed at 00:05 of first day of each calendar month and a new file started. Establish a file naming convention based on file type (analog, historical, or motor), month, and year. Provide operator screens for managing file space: a. Backing up to archive medium. b. Restoration from archive. c. Deleting archive files. d. Display/print of archive catalog. e. Forcing early closure of collection file. f. Create export file. 2. Analog Points: Scan each analog point every minute. Every hour, store minimum, maximum, and average values in a journal file. Do not store values that are out of range, out of service, or not valid for any other reason. 3. Historical Trend Data Collection: Establish data collection tables for up to 20 groups of up to 6 process points each with a collection interval of 1 minute. Provide facilities for defining and changing trend groups. Removal and archiving of closed trend files shall be accomplished using operating system's standard backup/restore programs. Do not store values that are out of range, out of service, or not valid for any other reason. 4. Motor Run Times: For each monitored motor, store daily values for running time. Run times may be developed either by scanning points every minute or by providing PLC timer logic. Daily accumulated run times are to be stored at 00:01 of each day and then reset. Close running time data collection file at 00:05 on first day of each month. 5. Data Export: Provide collected data file export facilities for use by management reporting programs and third -party data analysis programs such as dBase IV and spreadsheets. Export files shall be ASCII encoded, fixed record (and field) length with carriage control. Export files shall be made from closed collection files on user demand. 2.06 DATA MANAGEMENT AND REPORTING PM W/a b/specs/16748 Tt #200-41125-16005 16748-5 062617 A. Develop reports and data entry facilities to support management and regulatory reporting requirements of facility. 1. Daily motor run times. 2. Daily operations. 3. Laboratory operations. 4. State monthly operations report. 5. U.S. EPA NPDES Report. B. Provide for manual entry of laboratory analyses. Include editing facilities for process and laboratory data. Process data shall be acquired from exported data collection files. Reports shall be printable on any wide -carriage system printer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct preliminary testing prior to factory checkout by executing programs supplied for this Project. Use simulated input and output devices as necessary to verify correct interpretation. Exercise inputs to test logic for correct function and proper response of outputs. Verify correct interface of PLC logic with programs used for Operator Interface and Data Collection Activities. Verify correct PLC to PLC communications. B. Examination, Installation, Field Quality Control, Demonstration: In accordance with Section 13410. PM W/ab/specs/16748 Tt #200-41125-16005 END OF SECTION 16748-6 062617 ADDENDUM NO. 1 FOR WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION WTP #1 AND WTP #2 PROJECT # 16 -0031 -UT DATE: March 26, 2018 SUBJECT: Clarifications TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified the following Addenda are made clear to the Contract Documents: Contract Drawings: 1. Drawing D-1001 (Sheet 5 of 29) Remove the entire run (± 100 LF) of existing double wall containment piping that runs north from the existing sulfuric acid pump skid inside of the RO building. Pre -Bid Questions: 1. Pre -Bid Attendee requested clarification regarding disposal of existing sulfuric acid contained within the existing feed system. Answer: The existing sulfuric acid system has been drained and offline for several years. It is not anticipated that the Contractor will discover substantial quantities of sulfuric acid. However, if any sulfuric acid is in the system, it will need to be neutralized and disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Field Engineer. Any cost for disposal of sulfuric acid will be paid for under the Contingency Bid Item. - All other specifications, drawings, terms and conditions remain the same. Please remember to acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in Section V, Page 14 of 16 END OF ADDENDUM #1 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: /s/William B. Horne, II City Manager SECTION V — Contract Documents SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 16 SECTION V Page i Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: B98824-030885 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (1) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR SURETY OWNER American Southern Insurance Company City of Clearwater KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. tnan:ej Engineering Dept. PO Box723030 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Atlanta, GA 31139 Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562-4747 22031 US Hwy 19, Clearwater, FL 33765 Cpriictpol'; usness`;adt :!4 31 404-266-9599 727-333-7105 [ptiote:riarrberj PROJECT NAME: WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 PROJECT NO.: 16 -0031 -UT PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Fluoride feed facilities at the City's Water Treatment Plants 1 and 2 (WTP 1 and WTP 2). The fluoride equipment includes storage, pumping, and related equipment to add fluoride to the City's potable water system. BY THIS BOND, We, _KAT Construction & Materials, Inc., as Contractor, and American Southern Insurance Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of 5552.036.20, for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated ( 7, -01 , between Contractor and Owner for construction of WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2, the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 1 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V —Contract Documents Bond No.: B98824-030885 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connect he contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby ed with t waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of 20_ (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). WITN SS: Corporate Secretary or Witness Print Name: Anima rho rc (affix corporate seal) KAT Construction & $tlaJerials, In By: Title: Print Name: WITNESS: Print Name: 6 10, American Sou a surance Company (Corporate Sur By: ATTOR EY -IN -FACT& FL LICENSED AGENT Print Name: Kevin R. Wojtowicz (affix corporate seal) (Power of Attorney must be attached) SECTION V Page 2 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 AMERICAN SOUTHERN INSURANCE COMPANY I Domicile: 200 S.W. 30th Street Mailing Address: 3715 Northside Pkwy, NW, STE 4-800 Topeka, Kansas 66611 Atlanta, Georgia 30327 1 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY Know all men by these Presents, that the American Southern Insurance Company had made, constituted and appointed, and by these presents does make, constitute and appoint Charles J. Nielson or David R. Hoover of Miami Lakes, Florida; IKevin R. Wojtowicz, Laura D. Mosholder, or Jessica P. Reno of St. Petersburg, Florida, as its true and lawful attorney for it and its name, place and stead to execute on behalf of the said company, as surety, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship to be given to all obligees provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in 'amount of the sum of $1,000,000 (One Million U.S. Dollars). This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted pursuant to due authorization by the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors of the American Southern P Insurance Company on the 26th day of May, 1998: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, President or any Vice President of the Company be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute in behalf of Ithe American Southern Insurance Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of suretyship; and that any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future, with respect to any bond undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. In Witness Whereof, the American Southern Insurance Company has caused its official seal to be hereto affixed, and these presents to be signed by its President and attested by its Secretary this 1st day of April, 2016. 1 'Attest: 'Melanie A. Coppola, Corporate ecrdtary 1 American Southern Insurance Company Scott G. Thompson, President STATE OF GEORGIA (CORPORATE SEAL) On this 1st day of April, 2016, before me personally came Scott G. Thompson, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he resides in Atlanta, in the County of Fulton, State of Georgia, at 421 Hollydale Court; that he is the President of American Southern Insurance Company, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; I that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said inssuch rp seal; that it was so affixed and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to due authorization. 1 Jonathan Bell, Notary Public, State of Georgia My Commission Expires March 12, 2021 I, the undersigned, a Vice President of American Southern Insurance Company, a corporation domiciled in Kansas, DO IHEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked; and, furthermore, that the Resolution of the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in 1 1 force. `\`,„%vokunu,to,,. Signed and sealectAtItAti Qt ta, Dated the day of `` 0 ..'..(\153/0,.;... (NOTARY SEAL) = :'c,° TA v;•, :? NO Ry :cn: SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this ,0,7 day of 04).).:t , 20 1 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and KAT Construction & Materials, Inc., of the City of Clearwater County of Pinellas and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". [Or, if out of state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20_ by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and , a/an,. (State) Corporation authorized to do of Florida, of the City of County of and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 PROJECT NO.: 16 -0031 -UT in the amount of $ 552,036.20 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727-562-4092, Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: SECTION V Page 5 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. 1) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: 9cOI c9nr'C' $ George N. Cretekos, Mayor Contractor must indicate whether: XCorporation, Partnership, Company, or In iiduai,„ %q\ Cotes },a. £r' 'ir,�1g %N (- . (Contractor) j `- r - i r` -r P nt Name: At 'T—N-W.A.....{ Aa <:, Attest: f j Rosemarie Call City Clerk Ap/prroved as to form: )c 4 kOJ/L /MHO Assistant City Attorney Title: _J y) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V —Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 Engineering Dept. PROJECT NO.: 16 -0031 -UT 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ 1 Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO.: 1, recorded in O.R. Book [ 1, Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: [insert name of Surety] [address] [address] ,SURETY, on bond of KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. 22031 US Hwy 19 Clearwater, FL 33765 ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Engineering Dept. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) SECTION V Page 7 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 '1/40 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSALBID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. as Contractor, and American Southern Insurance Company as Surety, whose address is PO Box 723030, Atlanta GA 31139 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid Dollars ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. as Contractor, and American Southern Insurance Company as Surety, for work specified as: 16 -0031 -UT Water Treatment Fluoride Additions WTP-1 & WTP-2 all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Signed this 2nd day of April KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. Individual ,20 18 • Contractor Principal Kr: 511._v% 'root ey By: FreS de. rvi- Title AmericanSoutJern Insurance Company C Surety vin R. Wojtowicz, Attorney -in -Fact & FL Licensed Agent The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;, where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the s„:,,,,‘,` Corporation — provide Affidavit. R' °'"� SECTION V Page 8 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 AMERICAN SOUTHERN INSURANCE COMPANY 'Domicile: 200 S.W. 3011 Street Mailing Address: 3715 Northside Pkwy, NW, STE 4-800 Topeka, Kansas 66611 Atlanta, Georgia 30327 1 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY Know all men by these Presents, that the American Southern Insurance Company had made, constituted and appointed, and by these presents does make, constitute and appoint Charles J. Nielson or David R. Hoover of Miami Lakes, Florida; ,Kevin R. Wojtowicz, Laura D. Mosholder, or Jessica P. Reno of St. Petersburg, Florida, as its true and lawful attorney for it and its name, place and stead to execute on behalf of the said company, as surety, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship to be given to all obligees provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount of the sum of $1,000,000 (One Million U.S. Dollars). This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted pursuant to due authorization by the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors of the American Southern I Insurance Company on the 26th day of May, 1998: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, President or any Vice President of the Company be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute in behalf of Ithe American Southern Insurance Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of suretyship; and that any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such 'Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future, with respect to any bond undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. In Witness Whereof, the American Southern Insurance Company has caused its official seal to be hereto affixed, and these presents to be signed by its President and attested by its Secretary this 1st day of April, 2016. 1 1 'Attest: 1 Melonie A. Coppola, Corporate Secrdta"ry STATE OF GEORGIA (CORPORATE SEAL) On this lst day of April, 2016, before me personally came Scott G. Thompson, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he resides in Atlanta, in the County of Fulton, State of Georgia, at 421 Hollydale Court; that he is the President of American Southern Insurance Company, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said ins• such rp seal; that it was so affixed and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to due authorization. American Southern Insurance Company Scott G. Thompson, President Jonathan Bell, Notary Public, State of Georgia My Commission Expires March 12, 2021 I, the undersigned, a Vice President of American Southern Insurance Company, a corporation domiciled in Kansas, DO IHEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked; and, furthermore, that the Resolution of the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force. `\„01,0ttn►urli6,�i Signed and seale041tat .p t1 ta, Dated the I - ,-� 0 . co1ssio,; ••, �� ,.. (NOTARY SEAL) _ :'•-.0.0N ,N ° (*.#:.• . OTARY C i2 �B� a: Q POA • -0 -• -72-29! : 44, �' Z.-- -.:, le 1; Q --...• NUMBERS 8 5 2 ,,f'',/ieCOUtsI`•Fr 1 Z"4' day of Amt._ rry A. nderwood ce Pr=sident - Surety SECTION V — Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pinellas ) Kristen Tooley , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of KAT Construction & Materials Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 22031 US HWY 19 (Street & Number) Clearwater Pinellas Florida (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of KAT Construction & Materials Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Patrick Tooley is Vice -President (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for City of Clearwater or said corporation by virtue of State of Florida Sworn to before me this 02 (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution Board of Directors. If by Resolut' . n !,'ve date of adopti day of April 4;0'4, ANDREA M. MOORE %State of Florida -Notary Public *I Commission # GG 180735 �`; My Commission Expires ��111P%March 12, 2022 SECTION V ). of Affiant Notary Public AvIdrehzkooce. Type/print/stamp name of Notary IrYF Ce Mc dfje( Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Page 9 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Florida ) Patrick Tooley being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is Vice -President of KAT Construction & Materials Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. a=�� Sworn to and subscribed before me this 2 day of Apr SECTION V „0,1;411,,p„ ANDREA M. MOORE ,, s State of Florida -Notary Public Commission # GG 180735 ,,My Commission Expires """' March 12, 2022 frwesmonstalwarettsesamiwitimisti Notary Public , 20 18 • Page 10 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 (16 -0031 -UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 (16 -0031 -UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 11 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on 10% Bid Bond Bank, for the sum of 10% (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ ) The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Kristen Tooley - President, Secretary, Treasurer 2030 Ripon Dr. Clearwater, FL 33764 Patrick Tooley - Vice President 2030 Ripon Dr. Clearwater, FL 33764 Signature of Bidder: The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: k`-‘tc By: Title: v c t e re swf�.-- Company Legal Name: KAT Construction & Materials Inc. Doing Business As (if different than above): Business Address of Bidder: 22031 US HWY 19 City and State: Clearwater, Florida (' Phone: 727-333-7105 Email Address: ptooley@katinc.us Zip Code 33765 Dated at 22031 US HY 19 Clearwater, FI. 33765, this 2 day of April , A.D., 2018• W SECTION V Page 12 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 (16 -0031 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 03/26/18 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. SECTION V Date: Date: Date: KAT Construction & Materials Inc. (Name of Bidder) (Sig Vice -President Patrick Tooley (Title of Officer) 04/02/18 (Date) Page 13 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: WATER TREATMENT FLUORIDE ADDITION — WTP 1 AND WTP 2 (16 -0031 -UT) CONTRACTOR: KAT Construction & Materials Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ ,5507, 03(o. 2-0 (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: RUQ, horid red �FU)b LaJS0-n ci aallA (5 Cv c 7-10,2_04-jGe nLA-s (Words) ITEM DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED UNIT UNIT AMOUNT 1 UANTITY PRICE 1 Mobilization and1 Demobilization LS $ as, 006.00 $ 25,000.00 2 General Requirements 1LS 5,aoo.00 $6, $ 5,00o . oo 3 Chemical Storage and Feed Systems 1 LS $ 1701000. CV $ )70, OW . 00 4 Process Piping, Valves and Supports 1 LS $ 70, OOO.go $ 70, oDo .o o 5 Electrical and Instrumentation 1 LS $ MA 600 , oe $ 150, 000.00 6 All Other Work Not Included in Line Items 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 to Construct the Fluoride Addition Systems at WTP No. 1 and WTP No. 2 1 LS $ SI I i es.).09 $ al, g -S/, o 1 SUBTOTAL $ 60/1 8.5/.01 $/.o r 7 Contingency (10%) 1 LS $ 5D, 1tsv5, si $ 60,1857 11 GRAND TOTAL $ 650, o, . Zv SECTION V Page 14 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COPY OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY. THESE DOCUMENTS MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE BID PROPOSAL PACKAGE. FAILURE TO PROVIDE THESE DOCUMENTS IN THE BID PROPOSAL WILL DEEM THE CONTRACTOR'S BID AS NON-RESPONSIVE. SECTION V Page 15 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Printed Name Vice -President Title KAT Construction & Materials Inc. Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Pinellas The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 2 day of April 2018 , by Patrick Tooley (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the Vice -President (title) of KAT Construction & Materials Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein Known , or produced a (type of identification) as ide ; ifica1i s , and who did/did not take an oath. l go!. ANDREA M. MOORE fr: State of Florida -Notary Public ._ Commission # GG 180735 ice' My Commission Expires March 12, 2022 y ommission x•i -s. NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Notary Public d MCOrP• Printed Name Page 16 of 16 Updated: 10/16/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD 2601 BLAIR STONE ROAD TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 TOOLEY, PATRICK JOHN KAT CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS, INC. 2030 RIPON DR CLEARWATER FL 33764 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from boxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR (850) 487-1395 STATE OF FLORIDA- DEPARTMENTQFdBUSINESSAND PROFESSIONAL. REGULATION CGC1523963St1ED 107/14/2016 CERTIFIED GEIVERAL°C TOOLEY, PATRICK:JOHI KAT CONSTRUCTDON4 NTRA�T�R INC. IS CERTIFIED under the provisions of Ch.489 FS. Expiration date : AUG31;2018. L1607140001146 DETACH HERE KEN LAWSON, SECRETARY STATE OF -FLORIDA DEPARTMENT -OF -BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION` CONSTRUCTION_INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD LICENSE NUM6ER CGC15239'63. ". The -G E N;ERACCONT RACTO R Named belowlS CERTIFIED__ Lfntlerr the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AUG -.31,"2018 1 1 TOOLEY, PATRICK JOHN -KAT 'CONSTRUCTION &NkTERIALS, INC. - 2030 RIPON DR__ CLEARWATER,. E.L X3764 - ISSUED: 07/14/2016 DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SEQ # L1607140001146 A`a Rd CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 4/23/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER owen, Miclette & Britt of Florida, LLC 020 N. Orlando Avenue, Suite 200 aitland FL 32751 CONTACT Pam Medley PHONE FAX (A/C. No, Ext): (407) 647-1616 (A/C, No): (407) 628-1635 ADDRESS: certificates@bmbinc.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURERA: FCCI Insurance Company 10178 SURED KATCONSTRU T Construction & Materials, Inc. 22031 US Highway 19 N. Iearwater FL 33765 INSURER B : Crum & Forster Specialty 44520 INSURERC: 9/1/2018 INSURER D : $1,000,000 INSURER E : INSURER F : CLAIMS -MADE COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 1435893597 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. SR TR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSD SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y GL0019962 9/1/2017 9/1/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY X 12a. X LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y Y CA100017038 9/1/2017 9/1/2018 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $1,000,000 X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ OWNED AUTOS ONLY SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X HIRED AUTOS ONLY y NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ A X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR Y Y UMB100017093 9/1/2017 9/1/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 DED X RETENTION $ 10 000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITYY PER STATUTE OTH- ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEN / N E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) /A E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ B Contractor's Pollution Liability PKC106064 9/1/2017 9/1/2018 Each Poll Condition Per Poll Cond Ded 1,000,000 5,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Errors & Omissions: Policy #PKC106064 Carrier: Crum & Forster Specialty Insurance Company Dates: 9/01/2017-9/01/2018 Each Wrongful Act Limit: $1,000,000 Per Claim Deductible: $5,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability and Errors & Omissions are both subject to General Policy Aggregate of $1,000,000. The following policy provisions and/or endorsements form part of the policies of insurance represented by this certificate of insurance. The terms contained in See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Clearwater Engineering Departmet Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater FL 33758-4748 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD THIS CERTIFICATE SUPERSEDES PREVIOUSLY ISSUED CERTIFICATE IIS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • Policy Number: 0196-42963 Date Entered: 05/01/2018 ACORif �� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD/YYYY) 4/23/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER WorkComp Partners 702 Tillman Place Plant City, FL 33566 CONTACT NAME: lac NI v Exn: (813) 747-7490 (A/C, No): AX ( - E-MAIL ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC 8 INSURER A : Bridgefield Casualty Insurance Company COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURED KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. 22031 US Hwy 19 N Clearwater, FL 33765 INSURER B: INSURER C : INSURER D: $ INSURERE: INSURER F : OCCUR COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADD SU D POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MMIDDIYYW) LIMITS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: LIMIT APPLIES JECOT PER: LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIRED AUTOS ONLY SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY YIN OFFICER/MEMBEANY R EXCLUDED? ECUTIVE (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N /A 0196-42963 5/1/2018 5/1/2019 PER OTH- STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1 DOD 000 $ r r DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached 8 more space Is required) Description: 16 -0031 -UT Water Treatment Fluoride Additions WTP-1 & WTP-2 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 1 City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Maria L Wetherington © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Produced using Forms Boss Plus software. www.FormsBoss.com; Impressive Publishing, LLC 800-208-1977 1 AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: KATCONSTRU LOC #: ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY owen, Miclette & Britt of Florida, LLC LICY NUMBER RRIER NAIC CODE NAMED INSURED KAT Construction & Materials, Inc. 22031 US Highway 19 N. Clearwater FL 33765 EFFECTIVE DATE: DDITIONAL REMARKS HIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, ORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ie policies and/or endorsements supersede the representations made herein. Electronic copies of the policy provisions and/or endorsements listed below are available by emailing: certificates@bmbinc.com hen required by written contract, those parties listed in said contract, including the Certificate Holder, are added as additional insureds with respect to the eneral Liability including ongoing and completed operations, Auto Liability, and Umbrella Liability as afforded by the policy and/or endorsements. When required by written contract, waiver of subrogation is granted with respect to the General Liability, Auto Liability, and Umbrella Liability to those parties ted in said contract, including the Certificate Holder. e General Liability and Auto Liability certified herein are primary and non-contributory to other insurance available, but only to the extent required by written ontract. E: 16 -0031 -UT Water Treatment Fluoride Additions WTP-1 & WTP-2 ACORD 101 (2008/01) © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD